Owner’s manual
California Proposition 65 WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle
Ghibli
Owner's Manual Dear Customer, Thank you for choosing a Maserati. This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and racing vehicles. With this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and options of your Maserati in order to take advantage of its full potential. Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touchscreen display of your vehicle. The updated version of the onboard documentation can be consulted by accessing the section “SERVICES” on the website www.maserati.com or by using the specific apps developed for the more common Tablet and Smartphone. In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving. Keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and protect the environment. For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other operation, contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer: you can trust our trained technical staff, who is constantly updated and provided with the required equipment in order to ensure that all service operations are performed properly and reliably. The Quick guide and other documents contained in onboard documentation kit are integral part of the vehicle and should always be kept on board. You can purchase a printed copy of the documents visible on dashboard touchscreen display at your dealer of your Authorized Maserati Dealer.
2 WARNING! CALIFORNIA proposition 65. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle
3 4 Introduction 1
Before Starting 2
Understanding the Vehicle 3
Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4
Driving 5
In an Emergency 6
Maintenance and Care 7
Features and Specifications 8
Index 9
5 6 1 – Introduction
Consulting the Manual ...... 8 Abbreviations ...... 8 Updating ...... 9 Service and Warranty ...... 10 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle ...... 10 If You Need Assistance ...... 11 Warranty Information ...... 12 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 12 Parts Service ...... 13 Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement ...... 13 Symbols ...... 14 Warnings when Driving ...... 15 Maserati Roadside Assistance Program (available for USA and Canada only) ...... 16 Vehicle Identification Data ...... 18
7 Introduction Consulting the Manual Abbreviations 1 For an easy identification of the topics, WARNING! Some descriptions and terms with this Manual is divided into sections Failure to comply with the instructions particular meanings are found in this and chapters: each chapter can have could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS manual in abbreviated form. involving personal and vehicle safety. more paragraphs. A/C Air-Conditioning system. Within the text, important warnings and notes are also easily identifiable ABA Advanced Brake Assist. through icons. ENVIRONMENTAL! ABS Anti-Lock Braking System. This note indicates the correct ABSA Active Blind Spot Assist. behavior when using the vehicle to ACC Adaptive Cruise Control. WARNING! protect the environment. ADAS Advanced Driver Assistance California Proposition 65 Systems. Operating, servicing and maintaining ALR Automatic Locking Retractor. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle CAUTION! can expose you to chemicals including Aimed at preventing any damage to AQS Air Quality Sensor. such as, engine exhaust, carbon the vehicle and thus hazards involving ATC Automatic Temperature monoxide, phthalates and lead, that the safety of persons. Control. which are know to the State of AWD All-Wheel Drive. California to cause cancer and birth NOTE: defects or other reproductive harm. To BAS Brake Assist System. minimize exposure, avoid breathing Additional information regarding the BSA Blind Spot Assist. subject and/or the operation exhaust, do not idle the engine except BTO Brake Throttle Override. as necessary, service your vehicle in a described. CAN Controller Area Network. well-ventilated area and wear gloves • “Left” and “right” in this manual, or wash your hands frequently when CC Cruise Control. always refer to the driving direction. servicing your vehicle. For more CRS Child Restraint System. • All indications and images in this information go to: DRL Daytime Running Lights. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Manual refer to a vehicle with vehicle left-hand drive. On right-hand drive EBD Electronic Brake-force vehicles, some controls are ordered Distribution. differently than shown in the ECU Electronic Control Unit. illustrations.
8 Introduction
EDR Event Data Recorder. SABIC Supplemental Side Air Bag Updating EPB Electric Parking Brake. Inflatable Curtains. Constant improvements are being 1 ESC Electronic Stability Control. SBR Seat Belt Reminder. performed to maintain this vehicle's high level of quality. Therefore, there ETC Electronic Throttle Control. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. may be differences between this FCW Forward Collision Warning. manual and your vehicle. TCS Traction Control System. HAS Highway Assist. Maserati reserves the right to carry TFT Thin Film Transistor. HSA Hill Start Assist. out design and functional changes TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring and to provide updates or HBA Hydraulic Brake Assistance. System. improvements. I.C.E. Increased Control and TSA Traffic Sign Assist. This Owner's Manual illustrates and Efficiency. describes all versions of the current VIN Vehicle Identification LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether vehicle model. Therefore, some of the Number. for Children. equipment and accessories in this LDW Lane Departure Warning publication may not appear on your (LaneSense). vehicle; please only consider the information related to your vehicle. LKA Lane Keeping Assist. All specifications and illustrations MIL Malfunction Indicator Light. contained in this manual are as of the MTC+ Maserati Touch Control Plus. Manual publishing date. OBD On Board Diagnostics. NOTE: ORC Occupant Restraint The updated version of the on-board Controller. documentation can be consulted by PDC Park Distance Control. accessing the section “SERVICES” on the website www.maserati.com or by RAB Ready Alert Braking. using the specific apps developed for RCP Rear Cross Path. the more common Tablet and RKE Remote Keyless Entry. Smartphone. SAB Side Air Bag.
9 Introduction Service and Warranty that do not comply with Maserati’s Suggestions for Obtaining 1 specifications. The information provided in this An Authorized Maserati Dealer is at Service for Your Vehicle manual is limited to instructions and your complete disposal for any indications that are strictly required information and questions you may Prepare for the Appointment for vehicle use and proper have. If warranty work is required, be sure to maintenance. have the right papers with you and By following these instructions take your warranty folder. Not all work carefully, the vehicle will meet the being performed may be covered by owner's satisfaction and best results. the warranty: therefore discuss We advise to have all service and additional charges with the service inspections completed only by an manager. It is advisable to keep a Authorized Maserati Dealer, where maintenance log of your vehicle’s you will find a specially trained staff service history, as this can often and the proper equipment to repair provide a clue to the current problem. your vehicle. Please visit the www.maserati.com to Prepare a List find the nearest Authorized Maserati Make a written list of your vehicle’s Dealer. problems or the specific work you wish All features and accessories installed to be performed. If the vehicle has had on the vehicle have been designed by an accident or work done that is not Maserati engineers and have indicated on the maintenance log, successfully passed rigorous tests, please communicate this to the service submitted in all conditions of use. advisor. Installing aftermarket components or accessories not approved by Maserati Optimize the Requests may interfere with the vehicle If there are a number of items needing electronics and compromise driving attention, it is advisable to discuss this safety and possibly voiding the with your service advisor to agree on warranty coverage. the order of priorities. Nor do the warranties cover the costs At many Authorized Dealers/Service of repairing damage or conditions Centers, it is possible to obtain a caused by any changes to your vehicle loaner vehicle or a rental vehicle at a
10 Introduction minimal daily charge. If you need a If You Need Assistance Contact: rental vehicle, it is advisable to make MASERATI North America, Inc. 1 these arrangements prior to the visit, The manufacturer/Maserati and its 250 Sylvan Avenue for example when you call to set the Authorized Dealers/Service Network Englewood Cliffs appointment. set highest priority to the client’s NJ 07632 satisfaction with the products and Phone: services. Maserati Customer Care Warranty service must be performed 1-877-MY-MASERATI (877-696-2737) or by an Authorized Maserati 1-201-510-2369 Dealer/Service Center. Should there be any issues, please keep in mind that most matters can be resolved with the following process. • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, please contact the general manager or owner of the Service Center, it is their responsibility to assist you. • If a Service Center is unable to resolve the issue, you may contact Maserati Customer Center. Any communication to the Maserati Consumer Affairs should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address. • Owner’s telephone number (home and office). • Maserati Service Center name. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). • Vehicle delivery date and mileage.
11 Introduction Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects in addition to notifying Maserati North 1 America, Inc. Please refer to the Warranty booklet, NHTSA’s Toll-free Auto Safety Transport Canada can be contacted at: included in the Owner’s Hotline 1-800-333-0510 documentation kit, for the terms and If you believe that your vehicle has a Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 provisions of Maserati warranties Fax: 1-819-994-3372 applicable to this vehicle and market. defect which could cause a crash, injury or death, immediately inform Mailing Address: Transport Canada - the National Highway Traffic Safety Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, Administration (NHTSA) in addition to (Quebec) J8Z 0A1. notifying Maserati North America, Inc. In Canada If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it If you believe that your vehicle has a finds that a safety defect exists in a safety defect, contact the Customer group of vehicles, it may order a recall Service Department immediately. and remedy campaign. However, Canadian customers who wish to NHTSA cannot become involved in report a safety defect to the Canadian individual problems between you, your government should contact Transport dealer, or Maserati North America, Inc. Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect To contact NHTSA, you may call the Investigations and Recalls at Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-333-0510 or go to 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada
12 Introduction Parts Service Aftermarket Parts & distributed by Maserati North America, Inc. Genuine parts keep the reliability, Accessories Statement 1 comfort and performance of your new Modification of the vehicle or car unchanged throughout its life. installation of any accessory or For service and scheduled components attached to the vehicle maintenance Maserati suggests you to which alters the original engineering ask for genuine parts since they are and/or vehicle operating the result of constant research and specifications, or which result in development, reliability test and new damage to the other original technologies, as well as they are components, electrical interference, specifically designed for this vehicle. electrical short(s), radio static, water leaks and wind noise may result in damage to genuine components, compromise the safety of the vehicle and affect the validity of the new car warranty on the vehicle. Non-genuine Maserati Parts Non-genuine Maserati Parts (while you may elect to use non-genuine Maserati parts for maintenance or repair services), Maserati North America, Inc. is not obligated to pay for repairs that include non-genuine Maserati parts or for any damage resulting from the use of non-genuine parts. Maserati will not accept any liability for any parts and accessories not approved by Maserati, including Dealer-installed accessories not
13 Introduction
Symbols Coolant expansion Battery - jack 1 There are specific colored plates on or reservoir Refer to the owner manual. near some of the components on your Do not open cap with Maserati designed to attract user’s engine warm. attention. Important warnings Coil - headlights High voltage. concerning all specific devices that the WARNING! user must consider, are reported on California Proposition 65 the internal hood cover central label Belts and pulleys Operating, servicing and maintaining (see “Vehicle Identification Data” in Moving parts, keep body a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle this section). and clothing clear. can expose you to chemicals including All symbols reported on the plate and Air-conditioning lines such as, engine exhaust, carbon inside the vehicle, as well as the High pressure gas, do not monoxide, phthalates and lead, that component for which the symbols open. which are know to the State of stand, are summarized in the California to cause cancer and birth following list. These symbols are Symbols of Prohibitions and defects or other reproductive harm. To divided into categories according to minimize exposure, avoid breathing their meaning. Compulsory Measures exhaust, do not idle the engine except Danger Symbols Battery as necessary, service your vehicle in a Keep away from flames. well-ventilated area and wear gloves Battery or wash your hands frequently when Corrosive liquid. Battery servicing your vehicle. For more Keep out of children’s information go to: Battery reach. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Explosion. Heat guards - belts - vehicle pulleys - fans Blower Do not touch. May start automatically Battery even with engine off. Wear eye protection.
14 Introduction
Warning Symbols Windshield washer fluid Warnings when Driving Engine - Engine Oil Filler reservoir Always comply with local traffic 1 Cap Windshield washer. We regulations wherever you drive. Engine oil. We recommend recommend using a liquid Failure to operate this vehicle correctly using an oil with the with the characteristics may result in loss of control or a characteristics indicated in indicated in chapter collision. chapter “Refillings” in “Refillings” in section Operating this vehicle at excessive section “Features and “Features and speed or in an altered state or while Specifications”. Specifications”. intoxicated may result in loss of Brake fluid reservoir control, going off the road, or Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do overturning. In all these situations a not exceed max. level. We collision with other vehicles or objects WARNING! recommend using a fluid is more likely to happen with the risk with the characteristics California Proposition 65 to cause an accident that may lead to indicated in chapter Operating, servicing and maintaining serious injury. “Refillings” in section a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle In case of an accident, failure to use “Features and can expose you to chemicals including seat belts causes the driver and Specifications”. such as, engine exhaust, carbon passengers a greater risk of injury or monoxide, phthalates and lead, that Radiator coolant expansion death. Use your seat belt at all times. which are know to the State of This Owner's Manual contains reservoir California to cause cancer and birth Use antifreeze liquid for warnings against operating defects or other reproductive harm. To procedures that could result in a radiators. We recommend minimize exposure, avoid breathing using a liquid with the collision or injury or damage to the exhaust, do not idle the engine except environment. It also contains cautions characteristics indicated in as necessary, service your vehicle in a chapter “Refillings” in against procedures that could damage well-ventilated area and wear gloves the vehicle. section “Features and or wash your hands frequently when Specifications”. If you do not read this manual in its servicing your vehicle. For more entirety, you may miss important information go to: information. Consider carefully all www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- warnings and cautions. vehicle
15 Introduction is necessary to recharge the battery in Maserati Roadside 1 order to allow all vehicle’s components WARNING! and systems to function correctly. Assistance Program • It is the driver’s responsibility to (available for USA and operate the vehicle in a safe way: if Canada only) you are distracted while driving you can lose control and cause serious Welcome to Maserati and the benefits accidents. and security of the Maserati Roadside • Maserati strongly recommends you Assistance Program. Please take a use particular care when operating moment to review the benefits listed the features and tools that may below and available to you through distract you. the Maserati Roadside Assistance • Mobile phones, PC, portable audio Program. device or other features operated Emergency Roadside Services while the vehicle is moving can be very dangerous and can cause In the event you require Roadside serious accidents, and in some states Assistance, please call 1-888-371-1802, is against the law. 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You will be connected with a Roadside • It is very dangerous to send text Assistance representative who will messages while driving; do so only dispatch a local towing vendor. when the vehicle is not moving. • In some Countries/States the use of Information needed for when mobile phones when driving is you call forbidden: it is the driver’s sole When you call, please be prepared to responsibility to respect local provide the following information: regulations. • Your Name. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). CAUTION! • Location of your vehicle. If battery charge is too low, proper • Nature of your call (for example; you function of some electric/electronic require a tow, vehicle will not start, components may not be guaranteed. It out of gas, tire service, etc.).
16 Introduction
Summary of Program Benefits days of the rental car transaction to NOTE: and Services the address listed below; the original Membership is intended to cover 1 pre-printed rental car receipt, which • Towing of a disabled registered emergencies and is not intended to be must include your name, address, Maserati vehicle. In the event a a substitute for proper vehicle telephone number, VIN, rental dates registered vehicle becomes disabled maintenance or repair. Repeated calls and the corresponding warranty in connection to a warranty related which are considered by Maserati repair order. concern it will be transported to the North America, Inc. Signature Motor nearest Authorized Maserati Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of Dealership. You may request that Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. California, Inc. to be excessive may, at the vehicle be taken to a different P.O. Box 8140 Ft. our discretion, result in cancellation of Authorized Maserati Dealer, as long Washington, PA 19034 the membership. as it is no more than 50 miles further NOTE: Emergency road service providers are away from the nearest authorized independent contractors and are not dealer (one tow per disablement). An authorized licensed driver must be driving at the time of the disablement. employees, agents or representatives • Battery jump start. of Maserati North America, Inc. • Flat tire change providing the Items excluded from coverage: Signature Motor Club, Inc. or vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. • Parts, labor, tire repair, rental of Signature Motor Club of California, • Fuel delivery (up to 2 gallons). towing equipment, storage fees, or Inc. • Lockout Services. any labor performed at the service Under this Agreement facility. • Service Loaner Vehicle: For warranty • You will not be required to pay any repairs, your dealer may provide you • Any form of impound towing, or sum for services up to the mileage with a Maserati Service Loaner towing by someone other than a limit on towing. licensed service station or garage. Vehicle (if available) or provide you • Your registered Maserati vehicle is with Rental Car allowance: in the • Assistance from a private citizen. the vehicle covered. The Vehicle event your vehicle is disabled due to Identification Number (VIN) that a warranty related concern, we will appears on the vehicle represents reimburse you up to $50 per day. A your identification number with five (5) day or $250 maximum Signature Motor Club, Inc. or applies. In order to receive Signature Motor Club of California, reimbursement, you must supply the Inc. following information within 20
17 Introduction • NEW VEHICLES: Your membership Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. Vehicle Identification Data 1 begins on the date the Registered P.O. Box 8140 Vehicle was originally sold (in service Ft. Washington, PA 19034 Vehicle Identification Number date) and continues until the expiration date of the New Car The vehicle's identification number Limited Warranty or unless (VIN) is punched on the foot platform, terminated by Maserati North in front of the right-hand front seat. America, Inc. for cause. • PRE OWNED VEHICLES: Your membership begins on the date the registered vehicle was sold (in service date) and continues until the expiration date of the Maserati Certified Pre-Owned Limited Warranty or unless terminated by Maserati North America, Inc for cause. Address Inquiries to To read the number, lift the mat and rotate the guard. General Inquiries: Maserati Roadside Assistance P.O. Box 968008 Schaumburg, IL 60173 Rental Car Reimbursements: Within 20 days of your rental car transaction, the original pre-printed rental car receipt, which must include your name, address, telephone number, VIN, rental dates and the corresponding warranty repair order should be submitted to: The VIN Number is also visible from Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: the outside through the windshield on the front left corner of the dashboard.
18 Introduction
1
NOTE: Passenger Air bag Labels Another label is applied on the When ordering spare parts or making The labels are applied on the external dashboard to indicate that air bag inquiries, always quote the vehicle side of sun visors and behind it, on the system is installed. identification number. dome.
Warning and Identification Labels Overview label with cautions and warning notes The centrally attached label placed inside the engine hood cover displays cautions, warnings, and symbols. For further information refer to “Symbols” in this section.
19 Introduction
Danger Restart Engine with Hood 1 Open Label The label is applied on the lower right side of the hood.
NOTE: NOTE: For further informations see “Tire To ensure optimum performance and Safety Information” in section fuel economy, please ensure to refill "Driving". your vehicle using Premium Unleaded Loading Information Label Fuel ONLY, with a minimum of 91 AKI. Paint Identification Label This label applied on the driver's side rear door pillar attests the compliance The label is applied on the lower left with safety standards. side of the hood.
Tire Information Label Fuel Warning Label This paper label is applied on the The label is applied inside the fuel driver's side rear door pillar. filler door.
20 2 – Before Starting
Keys ...... 22 Sentry Key Immobilizer System ...... 24 Vehicle Security Alarm ...... 26 Illuminated Entry/Exit ...... 28 Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob ...... 31 Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs ...... 33 Remote Start System ...... 35 Doors Locking ...... 38 Passive Entry System ...... 40 Power Windows ...... 45 Rear Window ...... 47 Trunk Lid Operation ...... 48 Trunk Safety ...... 53 Hood Operation ...... 54 Occupants Restraint Systems ...... 55 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags ...... 63 Child Restraint Systems ...... 71 Transporting Pets ...... 76 Rear Parking Camera ...... 76 Surround View Camera System (optional) ...... 78 Safety Tips ...... 81 Park Assist (if equipped) ...... 84
21 Before Starting Keys Keyless Ignition Device The vehicle is equipped with a Remote This device allows the driver to Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless operate the ignition switch with the Ignition Node, to enter, start and push of a button, as long as the protect the vehicle. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter 2 is inside the vehicle.
In case the ignition switch does not change by pushing a button, the RKE transmitter (key fob) may have a low or discharged battery. If this occurs it is necessary to replace the battery in order to operate the ignition switch (see “Requiring and Setting Additional The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has Key fobs” in this section). three operating setups indicated on It is still possible to operate the the outer ring. Pressing and releasing ignition device using the key fob RKE the middle button, you can switch transmitter with discharged battery by from one setup to the next without pressing the nose side (side opposite of starting the engine, the switched on the emergency key) of the key fob on indication will turn amber. the START/STOP button. The engine will start by pushing the center button START/STOP with the brake pedal pressed and the device set in any of the three operating setups.
22 Before Starting
NOTE: You can insert either side of the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert 2 Opening the driver's door to exit the vehicle when the ignition device is set in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a Key fob You can keep the emergency key with beep will remind you to cycle the you when using valet parking. ignition to OFF. This vehicle is provided with two To remove the emergency key: In addition to the acoustic signal a programmed key fobs. dedicated message is displayed on the The key fob contains a Remote Keyless • hold the mechanical latch on the instrument cluster. Entry (RKE) transmitter and an back of the key fob sideways; If the ignition device is left in the ACC emergency key that is inserted in to • simultaneously remove the or RUN position, when vehicle is the remote. emergency key by sliding laterally locked the system will turn off the The emergency key allows you to towards the end of the key fob. instrument cluster and automatically open the vehicle by inserting into the set ignition device to OFF. lock of the opening handle on the With the MTC+ System, the power driver's door, in case the battery of the window switches, radio, power vehicle or the key fob go dead. sunroof (optional), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature, it is possible to set the timing of this feature.
23 Before Starting NOTE: switch to OFF and lock all doors Sentry Key® Immobilizer Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in Section when leaving the vehicle System “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” unattended. for further information. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle 2 operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or WARNING! activated. Operation is automatic, • When leaving the vehicle, always regardless of whether the vehicle is remove the key fob and lock your locked or unlocked. vehicle. The system uses a key fob with Remote • Do not allow children to be in a Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an vehicle unattended or with access to ignition switch and a RF (Radio an unlocked vehicle. A child or Frequency) receiver to prevent others could be seriously or fatally unauthorized vehicle operation. injured. Children should be warned Therefore, only key fobs expressly not to touch the parking brake programmed can be used to start and trigger, brake pedal or the shift operate the vehicle. lever. After placing the ignition in the RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light (see • Do not leave the key fob in or near picture) will light up for a three the vehicle, and do not leave the seconds bulb check. ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
24 Before Starting
If the light remains on after the bulb Operation is subject to the following NOTE: check, it indicates that there is a conditions: • When having the Sentry Key® problem with the electronics: this • This device may not cause harmful Immobilizer System serviced, bring condition will result in the engine interference. all key fobs provided with the being shut off after two seconds. • This device must accept any vehicle with you to the Authorized If the Vehicle Security Light turns on interference that may be received, Maserati Dealer. 2 during normal vehicle operation including interference that may • When selling the vehicle, it is (engine running for longer than 10 cause undesired operation. necessary to provide the new owner seconds), an electronic fault is with all key fobs. detected. Should this occur, contact Replacement Key fobs the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible for assistance. NOTE: Only key fobs that are updated with the vehicle electronics can be used to CAUTION! start and operate the vehicle. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some remote starting systems that can be installed in after-market. WARNING! Use of these systems may result in • Always remove the key fobs from vehicle starting problems and loss of the vehicle and lock all doors when security protection. leaving the vehicle unattended. All key fobs provided with the new • Always remember to cycle the vehicle have been updated with the ignition switch to OFF. vehicle electronics and are therefore Duplication of key fobs may be able to guarantee correct functioning performed by an Authorized Maserati and protection. Dealer only. General Information This procedure consists of programming a key fob that has never This device complies with Part 15 of been programmed to the vehicle’s the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry electronics. Canada.
25 Before Starting Vehicle Security Alarm and will then flash slowly until the located on the driver door trim vehicle is disarmed. panel with the driver and/or The vehicle security alarm monitors the passenger door open. vehicle doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and the 2 START/STOP button for unauthorized operations. The system includes a dual function anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors the vehicle for any lifting or tilting Rearming the System actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry If something triggers the security transport, etc). A siren with battery alarm, and no quick action is taken to backup which senses interruptions of disarm it, the vehicle security alarm power and communications is also will turn off the beeper after 29 included. seconds, and turn off all of the visual While the vehicle security alarm is signals after 31 more seconds; the enabled, interior door locks switches, vehicle security alarm will then rearm trunk lid and fuel filler door release itself. are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will Arming the System provide the following audible and Follow these steps to arm the vehicle • Press the button on the exterior visible signals: intermittent buzzer, security alarm. position lights and/or turn signals and “Passive Entry” door handle having the vehicle security light on the • Make sure the vehicle ignition switch a valid key fob RKE transmitter in dashboard will flash. is OFF. the same exterior zone (see This light will fast flash for • Perform one of the following “Passive Entry System” in this approximately 15 seconds, when the methods to lock the vehicle: section for further information). vehicle security alarm is being armed, • Press the lock button on the interior power door lock switch
26 Before Starting
will remain open if it was left open. In possible to disable these sensors by this condition, it will be necessary to pressing the button on the key fob first close the trunk lid as described three times within 5 seconds from the under "Trunk Lid Operation" in this moment the system has been armed section, and repeat the arming (meanwhile the security alarm light operation, to be able to arm the alarm flashes rapidly). 2 system. Vehicles equipped with Power Trunk To disarm the System Lid/Hands Free option a button - Use any of the following steps to located at the bottom of the trunk lid disarm the vehicle security alarm. • Press the lock button on the key and indicated in the figure - that can • Press the button on key fob RKE fob RKE transmitter. be used to completely close and lock transmitter. the trunk lid, lock all the doors and • Grasp the “Passive Entry” unlock arm the alarm system if all the door handle (see “Passive Entry passengers and driver doors and trunk System” in this section for further lid are closed. information). See chapter “ Trunk Lid Operation” in this section for further information. • Press the START/STOP button so as to release the OFF position. NOTE: • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switch will not allow unlocking of • If any door is open, close it. the doors. In any of these situations, if one or • The use of the emergency key into more windows are open, they will the driver door lock and the use of remain open. To close the windows the button on the key fob press again the lock button and cannot arm or disarm the security hold it until their closure. alarm of the vehicle. If vehicle is equipped with Power Each time the vehicle security alarm is Trunk Lid/Hands Free, when arming armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift • The vehicle security alarm remains the alarm system in any of the sensors actively monitor the vehicle. engaged while accessing the power described ways, the power trunk lid When arming the security alarm, it is (Continued)
27 Before Starting (Continued) disarm the vehicle security alarm. Illuminated Entry/Exit trunk lid. Pressing the button Check the vehicle for tampering. between the license plate lights will Lights will turn on and off when you not disarm the vehicle security alarm. enter/exit the vehicle and operate the If anyone enters the vehicle through buttons on the key fob RKE 2 the trunk lid and opens a door, the transmitter and/or on the “Passive alarm will trigger. Entry” system as follows: The vehicle security alarm is designed • If the unlock command is enabled by to protect your vehicle; however, you pressing the specific button on the can create conditions where the key fob RKE transmitter or by the system will give you a false alarm. If “Passive Entry” system, the one of the previously described arming “illuminated entry” mode will sequences has occurred, the vehicle activate. Courtesy & dimmable security alarm will arm regardless of internal lighting, night front seats whether you are in the vehicle or not. lighting, and approach lighting will If you remain in the vehicle and open a stay on for 27 seconds. door, the alarm will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the buzzer will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. Tamper Alert If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
28 Before Starting
• If the lock command of the car is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the “Passive Entry” system, when the key fob RKE transmitter is moved out of range, 2 all the lights will turn off within 3 seconds, if they were previously on.
• After activating the trunk lid opening command in the possible modes (see “Trunk Lid Operation” in this section), the inner trunk light will turn on and will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off. The light will immediately turn off if you lock the trunk lid before 10 minutes.
29 Before Starting
Vehicle Lighting with Use of Light Switch for Vehicle Open/Closed Doors Lighting • If one or more doors are open, the Vehicle lighting can be operated from central light, front/rear domelights the key fob RKE transmitter, the (main and spot light), the instrument “Passive Entry” system and from the 2 cluster, the MTC+ display, the night light switch on the left side of the front seats lighting and the ignition dashboard (refer to “Lights” in section switch backlight will turn on and will “Understanding the Vehicle” for light up for 27 seconds. further information). • If the doors are closed, all lights will turn off (within 3 seconds) with the exception of the console display and the ignition switch backlight, which will turn off after 27 seconds.
30 Before Starting • If the light switch is in the “0” (OFF) “DAY” or “NIGHT” mode according Unlock the Vehicle with mode all switch backlights and the to the twilight sensor. In “DAY” front seats lighting will turn off. mode the switches backlighting will Key fob • If the light switch is in the be at 100% intensity, in “NIGHT” The RKE system allows you to unlock position and the ignition switch mode they will be as set by the left the doors and the fuel filler door, is in OFF position, the front low dimmer control switch. open the trunk and turn the approach 2 intensity LEDs of the external light NOTE: and courtesy lights on from a distance and rear position light guide LED up to approximately 33 ft (10 m). The In “DAY” mode, the switches are not will turn on and will turn off key fob RKE transmitter does not need backlit, except the windows and automatically after 8 minutes to to be pointed at the vehicle to steering switches. preserve the battery charge. activate the system. See “Illuminated • If the light switch is in position Entry/Exit” in this section for further and the ignition switch is in RUN Light Dimmer Controls information. position, no lighting feature will be The light dimmer controls are part of available. the headlight switch and are • If the light switch is in position positioned beside the switcher itself (Low beam mode) the front (see “Lights” in section domelight LED (if enabled), the "Understanding the Vehicle" for switches backlighting, the further information). instrument cluster’s display, the night front seats lighting will turn on. The front domelight LED and the night lighting of the front seats will light up with the intensity set by the NOTE: right-hand regulator. If the regulator is in "0" (OFF) position, the night Driving at speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) lighting will turn off. and above disables the system from responding to all key fobs RKE • If the light switch is turned in transmitter buttons. “AUTO” position (on/off AUTO mode) and the ignition is switched in RUN position, as in “low beam mode” all lights turn on either in
31 Before Starting
Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler section “Dashboard Instruments and See chapters “Passive Entry System” Door and Trunk Controls”. and “Trunk Lid Operation” in this section for further information. Press and release the unlock button Turn Headlights On with Remote key on the key fob RKE transmitter once This feature activates the headlights to unlock the driver's door or twice for up to 90 seconds when the doors 2 within five seconds to unlock all doors, are unlocked with the key fob RKE the fuel filler door and the trunk lid. transmitter. The duration can be set as The turn signal lights will flash for the desired. To change the current setting, unlock signal recognition. The see “MTC+ Settings” in section illuminated entry/exit system will also “Dashboard Instruments and turn on. See “Passive Entry System” in Controls”. this section for further information. Locking Doors Sound Alarm Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Remote Key 1st Press This feature will cause the alarm to activate when the doors are locked This feature allows you to program the with the key fob RKE transmitter. This system to unlock either the driver's feature can be enabled or disabled. To door or all doors, the fuel filler door change the current setting, see “MTC+ and the trunk lid, by the first press of Settings” in section “Dashboard the unlock button on the key fob Instruments and Controls”. RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in section Unlatch the Trunk Lid “Dashboard Instruments and Press the button on the key fob Controls”. RKE transmitter two times within five Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights seconds to unlatch the manual trunk This feature will cause the flash of the lid. turn signal lights when the doors are If the vehicle is equipped with Power locked or unlocked with the key fob Trunk Lid/Hands Free, besides RKE transmitter. This feature can be unlocking the trunk lid, the control turned on or turned off. To change the will fully open it. current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in
32 Before Starting Requiring and Setting Key fob Battery Replacement Additional Key fobs NOTE: Provide your Authorized Maserati A low charge level of the key fob Dealer the following when ordering battery will be indicated on the additional key fob RKE transmitters: instrument cluster display. 2
• all key fobs RKE transmitters in your The recommended replacement possession; battery type is: CR2032. • a personal ID; To replace the battery proceed as • the identification and registration follows: documents proving ownership of the • Remove the emergency key as vehicle. indicated in “Keys” chapter of the Setting new key fobs or re-setting the current section. original ones can only be performed • Loosen the lateral screw that at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. connects the two side covers with a NOTE: torx T6 screwdriver. Codes of any key fob RKE transmitters that are not present when the new setting procedure is done will be deleted from the memory to prevent lost or stolen key fobs transmitters being used to disarm the electronic WARNING! alarm system. California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including • Separate the two lateral covers from such as, engine exhaust, carbon the key fob case. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth (Continued)
33 Before Starting
(Continued) defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing WARNING! exhaust, do not idle the engine except California Proposition 65 as necessary, service your vehicle in a Operating, servicing and maintaining 2 well-ventilated area and wear gloves a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle or wash your hands frequently when can expose you to chemicals including servicing your vehicle. For more such as, engine exhaust, carbon information go to: monoxide, phthalates and lead, that www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- which are know to the State of vehicle California to cause cancer and birth • Remove the battery from its seat and defects or other reproductive harm. To replace with a new recommended • Separate both parts of the key fob minimize exposure, avoid breathing type of battery. case. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle
NOTE: Avoid touching the new battery with • Remove the card with PCB (Printed your fingers. Skin oils may cause Circuit Board). battery deterioration. If you touch a ENVIRONMENTAL! battery, clean with alcohol. Batteries contain dangerous materials that could harm the environment. • Match the + sign on the battery to Please dispose of them according to the + sign on the inside of the local regulations or at an Authorized battery clip, located on the back Maserati Dealer. cover.
34 Before Starting • Replace the printed circuit board by • Closeness to a radio transmitter such Remote Start System using the indicated pin for the as a radio station tower, airport sealing of the two covers. transmitter, and some mobile or CB This system enables the key fob RKE • Assemble the key fob case and radios. transmitter to start the engine reassemble the two lateral covers: a conveniently from outside the vehicle click will indicate successful sealing. while still maintaining security. The 2 system has a range of approximately • Combine the disassembled parts 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between with clamping screw and reassemble the vehicle and the key fob may the emergency key. reduce this range. Radio Frequency RKE General Information Transmitter - General This device complies with Part 15 of Information the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry This device complies with Part 15 of Canada. Operation is subject to the the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry following conditions: Canada. • This device may not cause harmful The current device feature is subject to interference. following conditions: • This device must accept any • This device may not cause harmful interference received, including interference. interference that may cause • This device must accept any undesired operation. interference received, including NOTE: interference that may cause Changes or modifications not undesired operation. expressly approved by the party If your key fob RKE transmitter fails to responsible for compliance could void operate from a normal distance, check the user's authority to operate the for these two conditions: equipment. • A weak battery in the key fob RKE transmitter. The expected life of the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate battery in normal use is a minimum from a normal distance, check for of three years. these conditions:
35 Before Starting
• A weak battery in the RKE To enter Remote Start Mode transmitter. The expected life of the Press and release the button on the battery is a minimum of three years. WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a key fob RKE transmitter twice within • Closeness to a radio transmitter such five seconds. The vehicle doors will as a radio station tower, airport closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon lock, position lights will flash and the 2 transmitter, and some mobile or CB horn will ring twice (if this function is radio. Monoxide (CO) which is odourless and colourless set using the MTC+ System, refer to • Obstructions between the vehicle “MTC+ Settings” in section and the Key Fob. • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away “Dashboard Instruments and from children. Operation of the Controls”). Then, the engine will start How to use Remote Start Remote Start System, windows, door and the vehicle will remain in the All of the following conditions must be locks or other controls could cause “Remote Start” mode for a 15-minute met before the engine will remote serious injury or death. cycle. start: • System not disabled from previous Engine Remote Start Abort remote start event. Message on Instrument Cluster WARNING! • Vehicle theft alarm not active. The following messages will display on California Proposition 65 • Doors closed. the instrument cluster if the vehicle Operating, servicing and maintaining fails to remote start or exits remote a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle • Hood closed. start prematurely: can expose you to chemicals including • Power trunk lid closed. • “Remote Start Canceled Door Open”. such as, engine exhaust, carbon • Hazard lights switched off. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • “Remote Start Canceled Trunk • Brake pedal not pressed by any which are know to the State of Open”. passenger remained in the vehicle. California to cause cancer and birth • “Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low”. • Battery at an acceptable charge level. defects or other reproductive harm. To • “Remote Start Canceled Time • The shift lever is in P (Park) position. minimize exposure, avoid breathing Expired”. exhaust, do not idle the engine except • The vehicle transmission is in • “Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle as necessary, service your vehicle in a automatic mode. to Reset”. well-ventilated area and wear gloves • The remote start has not been The message on the instrument cluster or wash your hands frequently when activated yet two consecutive times. stays active as long as the ignition servicing your vehicle. For more switch is in RUN position. information go to:
36 Before Starting www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- To exit Remote Start Mode Auto-On Comfort with Remote vehicle without Driving the Vehicle Start Press and release the button one The driver's heated and ventilated time or allow the engine to run for seat and the heated steering wheel (if the entire 15-minute cycle. provided) can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer 2 NOTE: to “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the function in chapter “MTC+ Settings”, system will disable the one time press section “Dashboard Instruments and of the button for two seconds after Controls”, for further information. receiving a valid “Remote Start” request.
NOTE: To exit Remote Start Mode and • In case of an engine fault or low fuel Drive the Vehicle level, the vehicle will start and then Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, shut down in 10 seconds. press and release the button on the • The position lights will turn on and key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the remain lighted up during “Remote doors and disarm the vehicle security Start” mode. alarm. Then, prior to the end of the • For security reasons, power window 15-minute cycle, press and release the and power sunroof operation are START/STOP button. disabled when the vehicle is in the NOTE: “Remote Start” mode. The message “Remote Start Active • The engine can be started two Push Start Button” will display in the consecutive times (two 15-minute instrument cluster until you push the cycles) with the key fob RKE START/STOP button. transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
37 Before Starting Doors Locking Doors Manual Lock Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE transmitter is not inside the vehicle To lock each door, push the door lock before closing the door. knob on each door trim panel WARNING! downward. Power Doors Locking/ 2 • For personal security and safety in Unlocking the event of an accident or robbery, A power door lock switch and a lock the vehicle doors before you power door unlock switch are drive as well as when parking and positioned on the front door trim leaving the vehicle unattended. panel. Use this switches to lock or • When leaving the vehicle, always unlock the doors. remove the key fob RKE transmitter and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. • Do not allow children to be in a vehicle unattended. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children must not touch the parking brake trigger, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or start the engine and the vehicle. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock.
38 Before Starting
If the vehicle has been locked from the door locks will lock automatically Child-Protection Door Lock inside with the above-figured when the vehicle's speed exceeds System — Rear Doors switches, the fuel filler flap remains 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock unlocked. feature can be enabled or disabled by To provide a safer environment for If Power Trunk Lid/ Hands Free (if an Authorized Maserati Dealer only small children sitting in the rear seats, equipped) has been left open, it will which can also service the vehicle. the rear doors are equipped with a child-protection door lock system. 2 stay open when you press lock button Automatic Door Unlock on Exit , and the locking feature will only Engage or Disengage the occur after the closing of the power The doors will unlock automatically on Child-Protection Door Lock vehicles with power door locks if: trunk lid. • Open the rear door. The doors can also be locked and • The automatic unlock doors on exit • Insert the tip of the emergency key unlocked with the “Passive Entry” feature is enabled. into the lock and rotate to the lock system. For further information, see • The transmission is in gear and the or unlock position. “Passive Entry System” in this section. vehicle speed is 0 (mph - km/h). • Repeat the first two steps on the If you press the power door lock • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or opposite rear door. switch while the ignition switch is in P (Park). the ACC or RUN position, and any • The driver door is open. front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you • The doors were not previously from accidentally locking the key fob unlocked. RKE transmitter in the vehicle. • The vehicle speed is 0 (mph - km/h). Cycling the ignition to the OFF Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit position or closing the door will allow To change the current setting, see the locks of the doors and fuel filler “MTC+ Settings” in section door to operate. If a door is open with “Dashboard Instruments and the key fob RKE transmitter inside the Controls”. cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or RUN position, a beep will draw the NOTE: driver’s attention. Use the automatic door unlock on exit WARNING! Automatic Locking Doors feature in accordance with local Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in The auto door lock feature default regulations. a collision. Remember that the rear condition is disabled. When enabled, (Continued)
39 Before Starting (Continued) During the soft closing phase operated Passive Entry System doors can only be opened from the by the system, it is possible to outside when the child-protection intervene manually by opening or The “Passive Entry” system is an locks are engaged (locked). closing the door. enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote If you are pushing the door hard Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This 2 NOTE: enough to close just like a regular one, feature allows you to lock and unlock For emergency exit from the rear seats the system still works, but only to the vehicle’s door(s) without having to when the child-protection door lock check whether the door is properly press the key fob RKE transmitter lock system is engaged, manually raise the closed. or unlock buttons. door lock knob to the unlocked NOTE: position, roll down the window, and • “Passive Entry” may be programmed open the door using the outside door WARNING! to on/off; see “MTC+ Settings” in handle. The system works properly if the ajar section “Dashboard Instruments and door has a gap , between exterior Controls” for further information. Soft Door Close System door panel surface and exterior • If wearing gloves, or if it has been bodyshell surface in the latch area , of (optional) raining on the “Passive Entry” door max 0.23 in (6 mm). In the presence of This system makes doors easier to shut handle, the unlock sensitivity can be higher gap, the system is not able to without having to slam if you do not affected, resulting in a slower close the door with the risk of get it closed the first time. It increases response time. travelling with the door not the vehicle's safety and comfort, in completely closed or even open. • Access to the vehicle using “Passive particular for children in the back seat, Entry” system may not work properly it is not necessary to slam the door and in case of interference caused by it also prevents the risk of traveling external sources such as metal with the door ajar. objects, mobile phones, overhead The system uses a sensor to detect the power lines, antennas, etc. In these door ajar and an electric actuator to cases, use the buttons of the key fob close it. The sensor detects your RKE transmitter to open and close attempt to close the door and once the vehicle or the emergency key, the latch catches the handle the inserting it into the driver side door electric actuator pulls the door firmly lock. bringing the door back in the fully closed position.
40 Before Starting
• The “Passive Entry” system does not lock and unlock the doors directly and immediately but with a slight delay (about 2 seconds).
Unlock Door from the Driver 2 Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the driver's door handle, grip the driver’s door outside handle to unlock the door NOTE: automatically. The interior door panel If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is lock knob will rise when the door is programmed on all doors will unlock unlocked. when you grip the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”.
Unlock Door from the NOTE: Passenger Side All doors will unlock when you grip With a valid key fob RKE transmitter the front passenger door handle within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the passenger regardless of the driver’s door unlock door handle, grip the front passenger preference setting (“Unlock Driver outside door handle to unlock all four Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors doors automatically. 1st Press”). The interior door panel lock knob will rise when the door is unlocked.
41 Before Starting
Preventing Inadvertent Locking NOTE: of the Key fob RKE Transmitter The vehicle unlocks the doors under inside the Vehicle any of the following conditions: To minimize the possibility of • the doors are manually locked using the door lock knob positioned on the 2 unintentionally locking a key fob RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the door panel; “Passive Entry” system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If one of the vehicle doors is open and • there is a valid key fob RKE the door panel switch is used to lock transmitter outside the vehicle and the vehicle, once all open doors have within 3.3 ft (1 m) of either “Passive been closed, the system checks the Entry” door handle; inside and outside of the vehicle for • fifteen attempts are made to lock any valid key fobs RKE transmitter. the doors using the door panel If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE switch and/or the RH button (on • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitters is detected inside the the vehicles equipped with Power transmitter inside the vehicle; vehicle, and no other valid key fobs Trunk Lid/Hands Free) and then close RKE transmitters are detected outside • there is not a valid key fob RKE the doors. transmitter outside the vehicle. the vehicle, the “Passive Entry” system If the key fob RKE transmitter is inside automatically unlocks all vehicle doors the passenger compartment and one NOTE: and chirps the horn fourteen times (on of the doors locked only to the first the fifteenth attempt ALL doors will The vehicle will not unlock the doors detent of lock pawl (hence it is not lock and the key fob RKE transmitter under any of the following conditions: fully closed), when the vehicle lock will be locked in the vehicle). This will • the doors are locked using the key function with alarm system for trunk happen even on vehicles equipped fob RKE transmitter; lid and doors is being activated by with Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free • the doors are locked using the means of RH button at the bottom pressing RH button on its right lower button on the “Passive Entry” door of the trunk lid, said function will be part to close and lock the trunk lid. handles; activated all the same. In this condition, any attempt to duly close the door that is partially open
42 Before Starting will cancel vehicle lock and alarm lights to open the trunk lid manually system arming thus leaving vehicle or automatically. unlocked. Since when the doors are locked, the Manual Door Lock from "Passive Entry" system waits for about Outside 16 seconds before verifying if a key With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE 2 fob RKE transmitter is present inside transmitters within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the the vehicle. driver or passenger front door handles, press the external door Release the Lid and Enter the handle button to lock all four doors. Trunk NOTE: The vehicle doors can also be locked For vehicles equipped with manual by using the key fob RKE transmitter trunk lid, with the key fob within 3.3 • After pressing the outside door lock button or the lock button ft (1 m) of the lid, press the button handle button, you must wait two located on the vehicle’s inner door located between the licence plate seconds before you can lock or panel. lights and lift it manually. unlock the doors using this door For vehicles equipped with Power handle. By pulling the external door Trunk Lid/Hands Free, with the key fob handle, you can check if the car within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the lid, press the remains locked, without “Passive button located between the license Entry” system reacting and plate lights, the power trunk lid will unlocking the doors. automatically open until it has • The “Passive Entry” system will not reached its maximum height; if the operate if the key fob RKE same button is not pressed again to transmitter battery is dead. stop it (for more information, see • If Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free (if chapter “Trunk Lid Operation” in this equipped) has been left open, it will section). stay open when you press the button If the vehicle had already been on door external handle, and the unlocked through key fob or “Passive locking feature will only occur after Entry”, the presence of the key fob is the closing of the power trunk lid. not required; simply use the button located between the license plate
43 Before Starting
• This device must accept any The device is covered by: interference received, including Continental FCC ID: M3N-40821703. interference that may cause undesired operation. The device is covered by: 2 Continental FCC ID: M3N-7393490. Ignition device (Keyless Enter-N-Go) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The device is covered by: Continental FCC ID: OHT-40821803. Control Unit (Keyless Enter-N-Go) General Information This device complies with Part 15 of Key Fob (Keyless Enter-N-Go) the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of Operation is subject to the following the FCC Rules. two conditions: Operation is subject to the following • This device may not cause harmful two conditions: interference. • This device may not cause harmful • This device must accept any interference. interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
44 Before Starting Power Windows NOTE: prevent the windows being • The power window switches will accidentally activated, posing a risk to The window controls on the driver's remain active for up to 10 minutes passengers remaining onboard. door panel govern all the door after the ignition switch is turned to windows. the OFF position. Opening either Auto-Down Feature front door will cancel this feature. The driver door power window switch 2 The time lapse can be set. See and some model passenger door “MTC+ Settings” in section power window switches have an “Dashboard Instruments and auto-down feature. Controls” for further information. Press the window switch to the second • Frequent activations of the power detent, release, and the window will windows could result in a temporary go completely down automatically. lock out of the motors. In this case, To open the window part way, press wait a moment before a new the window switch to the first detent activation. and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto-down WARNING! operation, pull up on the switch Improper use of the power windows briefly. and the sunroof (if equipped) can however be dangerous, even with the Auto-Up Feature with anti-pinch prevention system. Before Anti-Pinch Protection and during activation of the power Lift the window switch to the second window, always check that the detent, release, and the window will passengers are not exposed to the risk go all the way up automatically. There are single window controls on of injury both by the moving window To stop the window from going all the each passenger door trim panel, which and by personal objects that could be way up during the auto-up operation, operate the corresponding window. dragged or hit by it. Do not leave push down on the switch briefly. The window controls will operate only unattended children in a vehicle with To close the window part way, lift the when the ignition switch is in the ACC a key fob RKE transmitter inside. window switch to the first detent and or RUN position. When getting out the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter to
45 Before Starting
release it when you want the window Reset Auto-Up/Down to stop. Should the auto-up/down feature stop NOTE: working, the window probably needs • If the window runs into any obstacle to be reset. To reset auto-up/down, pull the 2 during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. window switch up to close the window Remove the obstacle and use the completely and push the window window switch again to close the switch down to open the window window. completely. • Any impact due to rough road Open the Windows and To enable the controls previously conditions may trigger the auto Sunroof with RKE Transmitter described, press the window lockout reverse function unexpectedly during and Ignition Off button again (setting it in the up auto-closure. If this happens, pull the position). switch lightly to the first detent and When the ignition switch is in OFF hold to close the window manually. position, windows can be opened by Wind Buffeting pressing the button on the RKE • Frequent activations of the Wind buffeting can be described as transmitter. anti-pinch function could disable the the perception of pressure or a auto-down and auto-up function of • Press the button and release it; helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle the windows. In order to re-activate • Press a second time the button may exhibit wind buffeting with the this function proceed with a reset and keep it pressed until complete windows down, or the sunroof in open cycle as described in the next opening of the windows, if they or partially open positions. This is a paragraph. were closed. normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Rear Window and Sunshade the rear windows open, open the front Lockout Button and rear windows together to WARNING! The window lockout button on the minimize the buffeting. If the There is no anti-pinch protection when driver's door trim panel allows to buffeting occurs with the sunroof the window is almost closed. Be sure disable the window and sunshade open, then adjust the sunroof opening to clear all objects from the area control on the rear doors by pressing to minimize the buffeting. before closing the window. the window lockout button (setting it in the down position).
46 Before Starting Rear Window On versions equipped with heated rear seats is available the trigger Rear Window Defroster button of the rear sunshade, positioned at the rear of the central The rear window defroster button is console, which can be operated from located on the climate control panel. the rear passengers. See “Air Conditioning Controls” in 2 section “Dashboard Instruments and • Press the button to raise the Controls”. sunshade. • Press the button a second time to Power Sunshade (optional) lower the sunshade. Without ADAS Your vehicle can be equipped on request with a power sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will enter through the rear window. The sunshade is rolled in and stored inside the cover behind the rear seats; when activated, it rolls out upwards. The power sunshade can be operated using the MTC+ System. • Touch the “Controls” soft-key. NOTE: • Within 15 seconds, touch the “Rear With ADAS The rear sunshade control and rear Sunshade” soft-key to raise the If the sunshade is in the raised power windows switches, can be power sunshade. position and the gear lever is locked by pressing the window • Within 15 seconds, touch the “Rear positioned in R (Reverse), the lockout button on the driver side door Sunshade” soft-key a second time to sunshade will automatically fully panel. lower the sunshade. lower. When the gear lever is shifted out of R (Reverse) the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after approximately five seconds.
47 Before Starting Trunk Lid Operation the license plate lights, when the vehicle has been unlocked using the The manual trunk lid can be unlocked key fob or the “Passive Entry” system. from inside the vehicle by pressing the button on the front dome console. 2 This command will fully open the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free (if equipped). Pressing this button in sequence, if the power trunk lid stops in intermediate position, it resumes his . opening movement. NOTE: The shift lever must be in P (Park) before the button can operate.
When the button on the key fob is pressed twice within five seconds, the The manual trunk lid can be released direction indicators flash twice to from outside the vehicle by pressing indicate the opening or closing of the the button on the key fob with trunk lid, if the light flashing function RKE transmitter twice within five at closing is activated on MTC+ (for seconds or by using the external more information, see the chapter release button located on the lower "MTC+ Settings" in section side of the trunk lid ledge, between
48 Before Starting
“Dashboard Instruments and With the ignition device in the OFF kick sensor option, as specified in the Controls”). position, the trunk open symbol and paragraph “Hands Free Power Trunk To manually close the trunk lid use the message will display until closure. Release and Closing”. In this latter handle as indicated beside the closing See “Passive Entry System” in this case, the lid will be opened and closed device. section for more information on trunk only if the “Passive Entry” system lid operation with the “Passive Entry” acknowledges the presence of the key 2 feature. fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the trunk lid. Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free uses the (optional) button in between the license plate Automatic opening and closing lights, indicated in figure, to activate movement of the trunk lid is driven by the opening once the car has been electric actuators and a motorized unlocked by the key fob or by the latch ensuring lid locking upon “Passive Entry” function. closing. By pressing this button when the Power Trunk lid can be opened using Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free is closed With the ignition switch in RUN button on the key fob RKE you can open it completely or by position, the red symbol will transmitter and the button on driver pressing the button again stop the display on the instrument cluster with side door trim panel used also for opening process, or by pressing the the message indicating that the trunk non-power version. button again invert the movement lid is open. Once the trunk is closed The button on key fob and button and close it completely. both symbol and message will on dome console not only allows user disappear from the display. to completely open the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free, but also to stop it at any intermediate position by pressing the button again at anytime you wish to stop and resume the opening process. In addition to these commands, it is possible open and close the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free by simply moving your foot under the rear bumper, if the vehicle is so equipped with the
49 Before Starting
When the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free In any case, when you press the LH NOTE: is open, to move it there are two button , the doors will not be • The order of the functions shown buttons positioned on its right lower locked and the alarm system will not does not represent the sequence in part as indicated in figure. be armed. which they can be performed. When the power trunk lid is • The buttons of the Power Trunk completely open if you press and 2 Lid/Hands Free do not work if a gear release the RH button , the power is engaged or if the vehicle speed is trunk lid will be completely closed higher than 0 (km/h - mph). unless it is stopped; • The Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free does • if instead the power trunk lid is in an not work with temperatures lower intermediate position and you press than −22 °F (−30 °C) or higher than and release the RH button during 150 °F (65 °C). the closing or opening stroke, it will • If the opening buttons or the be stopped; handles are operated while the When the power trunk lid is • if instead the power trunk lid is Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free is completely open if you press and stopped in an intermediate position closing, the stroke of lid stops. release the LH button , the power and you press and release the RH Pressing another time the same trunk lid will be completely closed button , it will reverse its previous command it reverses movement and unless it is stopped; movement and it will be completely fully open. opened or closed unless it is stopped • if instead the power trunk lid is in an • If the opening buttons or the handle again. intermediate position and you press are operated while the Power Trunk In any case, when you press the RH and release the LH button during Lid/Hands Free is opening, the motor button , the doors will not be the closing or opening stroke, it will of the lid is disabled to allow manual locked and the alarm system will not be stopped; operation. be armed immediately, but only when • if instead the power trunk lid is the power trunk lid will have reached • If the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free stopped in an intermediate position the totally closed position as effect of finds several obstacles during the and you press and release the LH every movement commands received same operating cycle, it will stop button , it will reverse its previous from every other available inputs. automatically and must be opened or movement and it will be completely closed manually. opened or closed unless it is stopped • If the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free is again. closing and a gear is engaged, the lid
50 Before Starting
will continue closing. In this Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free condition, it is possible that, during Automatic Safe Movement WARNING! the closing stroke, it may find an Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free safe obstacle and stop. opening and closing is ensured by a • Activate Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free protection system able to stop its only when vehicle is at a standstill. Set the Position of Maximum Power movement when an obstacle is • Always pay utmost attention when 2 Trunk Lid Opening detected along the path: when opening and closing Power Trunk The maximum opening position of the opening or closing, it stops Lid/Hand Free. trunk lid can be modified using the automatically and then slightly moves • After the closing command, always previously described buttons on its back. make sure that Power Trunk right lower side. After the closing command, when Lid/Hand Free is completely closed. 1. Activate the trunk lid and stop it in Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free starts the new maximum opening closing, all the indicators will blink to warn anyone within range. Apart position to be set, by pressing the CAUTION! LH button. from activating indicators blinking when power trunk lid is operated, it is • Under extreme weather conditions, 2. Press the LH and RH buttons also possible to activate a sound trunk lid seal could freeze and at the same time and keep them warning by selecting the relevant compromise Power Trunk Lid/Hand pressed for 3 seconds. function within MTC+ user settings Free automatic opening and closing. 3. Release both buttons. Upon the (see “MTC+ Settings” in section • Before opening Power Trunk following opening controls, the “Dashboard Instruments and Lid/Hand Free, make sure that no trunk lid will stop in the stored Controls”). When Power Trunk objects or snow are set on trunk lid position. Lid/Hands Free edge reaches the car or might jam or prevent its opening. If you want to reset the maximum body, the motor locking the latch is possible opening position of the activated automatically. Hands Free Power Trunk Release and power trunk lid, proceed as described If necessary, the Power Trunk Closing below starting from the previously set Lid/Hands Free can also be opened or This mode is controlled by the “Passive opening position. closed manually. This operation could Entry” system (see paragraph “Passive 1. Manually push the trunk lid to the be required when the trunk lid Entry System” in this section), which maximum possible opening remains open for a long period of automatically releases and closes the position. time. Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free when you 2. Repeat the previously performed place your foot in the area under the steps 2 and 3. rear bumper.
51 Before Starting
The system will only operate if the • if the movement was stopped system acknowledges the presence of another kick operation will invert a the key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 complete opening. ft (1 m) of the Power Trunk Lid/Hands NOTE: Free. 2 The range of the sensors that detect • If your foot movement fails to your foot movement extends along activate the Power Trunk Lid/Hands and underneath the central portion of Free movement, wiggling your foot the rear bumper. under the bumper will not help. To activate the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Repeat the whole kick movement. Free, stand behind the vehicle, near In order for the sensors to detect your • In particular situations, external the trunk lid, and move your foot foot movement, move your foot factors affecting the sensor area may under the bumper as if to kick towards the vehicle rather than trigger the Hands free power trunk something. Do not place your foot too sideways and immediately pull it back: lid release feature. For example, close to the bumper or touch the from this moment, the Power Trunk when washing the vehicle, a water underbody. Lid/Hands Free will activate within two jet aimed at the sensor area may seconds. trigger the “Hands free” power If closed, with the foot movement the trunk release feature. Keep the key WARNING! Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free will: fob RKE transmitter away from the sensing range of the sensors (10 ft/3 • Pay careful attention to the exhaust • unlock and completely open; tailpipes as they can reach high m) or disable the Hands free feature • after another kick, will stop; temperatures and, in case of contact, from the MTC+ menu (see “MTC+ they can cause severe burns. • after another kick, will reverse its Settings” in section “Dashboard movement and completely close Instruments and Controls”). A key • When it is not necessary to open the unless stopped again. fob RKE transmitter located in the Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free with the If open, with the foot movement the front seat passenger area is Hands Free mode, make sure the key Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free will: considered out of range of the fob results outside the range of use “Hand free” trunk release sensor. (3.3 ft/1 m). Otherwise, the Power • completely close but not lock; • If somebody or something knocks Trunk Lid/Hand Free can be opened • another kick before the completed against the Power Trunk Lid/Hands accidentally by an unintentional closing can stop the movement; Free while it is moving, the safety movement of the foot.
52 Before Starting system might stop lid opening or Trunk Safety closing movement.
Trunk Lid Emergency Release WARNING! If accessing the trunk compartment Do not allow children to have access 2 from the rear seats, operate the to the trunk. Always close the trunk emergency release lever (see the lid when your vehicle is unattended. chapter “Trunk Safety” in this section) Once in the trunk, young children may in order to lower the rear seat not be able to escape. If trapped in backrest (see “Cargo Area” in section the trunk, children can die from “Understanding the Vehicle”). If the suffocation or heat stroke. power release control operated by pressing the button on the dome Trunk Lid Emergency Release console fails, it may be that the battery is critical. In this case, it is from inside the Trunk possible to temporarily power the As a security measure, an internal system by using the battery remote trunk emergency release lever is built poles located inside the engine into the trunk latching mechanism. In compartment (see “Auxiliary the event of a person trapped inside Jump-Start Procedure” in section “In the trunk, the trunk lid can be simply an Emergency”). Then it is possible to opened by pulling on the With Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free Option normally open the trunk lid by using phosphorescent handle shown in the key fob RKE transmitter. Have the figures. vehicle subsequently serviced by an Authorized Maserati Dealer center in order to solve the failure.
53 Before Starting Hood Operation • Slightly lift the hood and push the safety catch as indicated by the Opening arrow. The safety catch is located in CAUTION! the center of the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not Two latches must be released to open slam the hood to close it. the hood. 2 • From inside the vehicle, pull the hood release lever located under the left lower side of the dashboard. WARNING! • Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the lid is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious • Lift the hood completely: this injury or death. operation is facilitated by two gas • Gear shifting is always active and struts keeping the hood in the fully may be performed even when one open position. or more doors, the hood or the trunk With the ignition switch in RUN lid are open. Therefore, in these • Move to the outside and stand in position, the red symbol will conditions, take great care to avoid front of the vehicle front grille. display on the instrument cluster with moving the transmission shift lever the message indicating that the hood and so accidentally engage gears. is open. Closing Lower the hood, and then drop it. This should secure the inclusion of both latches.
54 Before Starting Occupants Restraint desired length to restrain a child seat cause neck wounds or other injuries in or secure a large item in a seat. an accident. Additionally, in an Systems Please pay close attention to the accident, the lower section of the belt The listed occupants restraint systems information in this section. It tells you could press against the upper part of are some of the most important safety how to use your restraint system your stomach rather than the pelvic features in your vehicle: properly, to keep you and your area, causing serious internal injuries. 2 passengers as safe as possible. • Three-point seat belts (also called lap If you are carrying children too small NOTE: and shoulder belts) for the driver for adult-sized seat belts, the seat and all passengers. The advanced air bags have a multi belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether stage inflator. This allows the air bag • Advanced front air bags for driver for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can to have different stages of inflation and passenger. be used to hold infant and child based on the severity and type of • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable restraint systems. For more collision. Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and information on LATCH, refer to passengers seated next to a window. “Lower Anchors and Tether for Here are some simple steps you can • Supplemental driver side knee air CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. take to minimize the risk of harm bag. from a deploying air bag: • Supplemental seat-mounted side air • Children 12 years old and under bags. WARNING! should always ride buckled up in a • An energy-absorbing steering To help provide maximum protection, rear seat. column and steering wheel. you are advised to keep the seatback • Front seat belts incorporate dual in the most upright position possible pretensioners that may enhance and the seat belt close to your chest WARNING! occupant protection by managing and pelvis. If the seat belt is loose, in Infants in rear facing child restraints the energy created during an the event of an accident you could should never ride in the front seat of impact. move too far forward and could be a vehicle with a passenger Advanced injured. Travelling with the seatback • All seat belt systems (except the Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment too far reclined could also be driver’s) include Automatic Locking can cause severe or fatal injury to dangerous: even if the seat belts are Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat infants in that position. fastened, they may not work belt webbing into position by Do not use child seats or child booster correctly. In fact, the belt itself may extending the belt all the way out cushions/backrests in the front not be close enough to your body and then adjusting the belt to the (Continued) and, if it is in front of you, it could
55 Before Starting
(Continued) system to make sure that you are using Buckle up even though you are an passenger seat. Occupants in the front it properly. excellent driver, even on short trips. passenger seat must never sit on the • All occupants should always wear Someone on the road may be a poor edge of the seat, leaning toward the their lap and shoulder belts properly. driver and cause an accident that dashboard or otherwise sit out of includes you. This can happen far • The driver and front passenger seats position. The occupants’ back must be away from home or on your own 2 should be moved back as far as as upright as comfort allows, and street. must rest against the seatback with possible to allow the Advanced the seat belt properly fastened. Feet Front Air Bags room to inflate. Statistics report that seat belts save must be on the floor (i.e. not on the • Do not lean against the door or lives and help reduce the seriousness dashboard, seat or out of the window. Your vehicle has of injuries in an accident. Some of the window). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable worst injuries happen when people are Curtains (SABIC) and Supplemental thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts Children that are not big enough to Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), reduce the possibility of ejection and wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see and if deployment occurs, the SABIC the risk of injury caused by striking the “Child Restraints System” in this and SAB air bags will inflate inside of the vehicle. section) should be secured in the rear forcefully into the space between Everyone in a motor vehicle should be seat in child restraints seats or you and the door. belted at all times. belt-positioning booster seats. Older • If the air bag system in this vehicle children who do not use child Three-Point Seat Belts needs to be modified to restraints seats or belt-positioning accommodate a disabled person, All seating positions in your vehicle are booster seats should ride properly contact an Authorized Maserati equipped with combination lap and buckled up in the rear seat. Never Dealer. shoulder belts. allow children to slide the shoulder The belt retractor is designed to lock belt behind them or under their arm. during very sudden stops or impacts. The safest place for a child that has This feature allows the shoulder part WARNING! outgrown the child safety seat is in the of the belt to move freely with you rear seat using the standard seat belt In an accident, all occupants can suffer under normal conditions, conforming in combination with a suitable booster much greater injuries if not properly to the body of the occupants. seat if needed so the seat belt is buckled up. You can strike the interior However, in an accident, the belt will properly located on the child. of your vehicle or other occupants or lock and reduce your risk of striking You should read the instructions you can be thrown out of the vehicle. the inside of the vehicle or being provided with your child restraint Always be sure you and others in your thrown out. vehicle are buckled up properly.
56 Before Starting
The driver is responsible for equipped with seats and seat belts. • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt respecting, and ensuring that all the • Be sure all passengers are in a seat across you, make the belt go around other occupants of the car also and using a seat belt properly. your body and when the belt is long observe the local regulations enough to fit, insert the latch plate • Wearing your belt improperly could concerning the use of seat belts. into the buckle until you hear a make your injuries in an accident Always fasten the seat belts before “click.” much worse. You might suffer 2 starting the vehicle. internal injuries, or you could even Seat belts are designed to be used by slide out of part of the belt. Follow persons whose physical characteristics these instructions to wear your seat (age, height, weight) are provided for belt properly and to keep your by established legislation in each passengers safe, too. country. Anyone who does comply with these provisions may not travel in • Two people should never be belted the front passenger seat. This also into a single seat belt. People belted applies to children. Their heads are together can crash into one another proportionally heavier and larger than in an accident, hurting one another those of adults, while their bones and severely. Never use a lap/shoulder muscles are relatively undeveloped. To belt for more than one person. help protect them in case of a • Remember that, in the event of an collision, they must use special accident, the rear seat passengers WARNING! restraint or safety systems, even in the not wearing the seat belts are not • The seat belts height must be rear seat area. only subject to personal injuries but adjusted only with the vehicle also represent a serious danger for stationary. the front seat occupants. • Do not bring sharp edges in contact WARNING! with a seat belt. This could reduce • It is forbidden and dangerous to ride Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions their initial strength and cause them in a cargo area. In an accident, • Enter the vehicle and close the door. to tear in the event of a crash. people riding in these areas are Sit back and adjust the seat. • If a seat belt has been brought in more likely to be seriously injured or • The seat belt latch plate is on the contact with a sharp edge, or has killed. rear door pillar, above the seat on been used to pin something to it, • Do not allow any person to ride in the external side. have it immediately replaced by our any area of your vehicle that is not (Continued)
57 Before Starting
(Continued) rewinding, to prevent it from Authorized Maserati Dealer. twisting. • A belt that is latched into the wrong WARNING! buckle will not protect you properly. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in The lap portion of the belt could ride WARNING! an accident. The belt forces won't 2 too high on your body, possibly A frayed or torn belt could break in an impact on the strong hip and pelvic causing internal injuries. Always accident and leave you with no bones, but across your abdomen. latch your belt into the protection. Inspect the belt system Always wear the lap belt as low as corresponding buckle. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or possible and keep it comfortable. • A belt that is too loose will not loose parts. Damaged parts must be protect you properly. In a sudden • A twisted belt will not protect you replaced immediately. stop, you could move too far properly. In a collision, it could even Do not disassemble or modify the forward, increasing the possibility of cut into you. Be sure the belt is system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies injury. Wear your seat belt straight. If you can't straighten a must be replaced by an Authorized comfortably. belt in your vehicle, take it to a Maserati Dealer after an accident if Service Center immediately. • A belt that is worn under your arm is they have been damaged (bent dangerous. Your body could strike • Do not use devices (clips, fastenings retractor, torn belt, etc.). the inside surfaces of the vehicle in etc.) that prevent the seat belts from an accident, increasing head and laying close to the occupants bodies. Three-Point Seat Belt Height Adjustment neck injury. A belt worn under the • Never carry children on a passenger’s arm can also cause internal injuries. lap.
• The lower part must adhere to the • Position the shoulder belt on your WARNING! pelvis rather than the abdomen of chest so that it is comfortable and The seat belts height must only be the occupant. To fasten the lap belt not resting on your neck. The adjusted when the vehicle is pull slightly up the diagonal portion retractor will withdraw any slack in stationary. of the shoulder belt. To loosen the the belt. lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch • To release the belt, push the red The vehicle has a shoulder belt height plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug button on the buckle. The belt will adjuster for the driver and front belt reduces the risk of sliding under automatically retract to its stowed passenger seating positions. the belt in an accident. position. If necessary, guide the seat Adjust the guide so that the shoulder belt with your hand while it is portion of the belt is on the shoulder
58 Before Starting and not falling off of it. The belt When you release the anchorage try “Child Restraint Systems” in this should be close to, but not contacting, to move the belt slider up and down section. the neck. to make sure that it is locked in If the passenger seat position should Push the indicated button above the position. not be used to accommodate a child shoulder belt guide to release the restraint system, only pull the belt out anchorage, then move the belt slider Three-Point Seat Belt far enough to comfortably wrap 2 up or down to the fixed position that Untwisting Procedure around the occupant so as to not fits you best. Use the following procedure to activate the ALR. If the ALR is untwist a twisted three point belt. activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. In this case, • Position the latch plate as close as allow the belt to retract completely WARNING! possible to the anchor point. and then carefully pull out only the After the adjustment, always check • At about 0.5 to 1 ft (15 to 30 cm) that the slider to which the oscillating amount of belt necessary to above the latch plate, grasp and comfortably wrap around the seat ring is fixed, is locked into one of the twist the belt 180 degrees to create positions provided. With the handgrip occupant. a fold that begins immediately Slide the latch plate into the buckle released, push again downward to above the latch plate. allow the anchoring device to click until you hear a "click". • Slide the latch plate upward over the into place, in the event that it has not folded belt. The folded belt must been released in one of the positions enter the slot at the top of the latch provided. WARNING! plate. • Remember that, in the event of a • Continue to slide the latch plate up violent impact, the passengers in the until it clears the folded belt. rear seats who are not wearing the Passengers Seat Belts seat belts are not only subject to personal injury but also represent a All passengers seat belts are equipped danger for passengers sitting in the with Automatic Locking Retractors front seats. (ALR) and can be used to secure a • Always fasten the seat belts. child restraint system. For additional information, see “Installing Child • Traveling without the seat belts Restraint Systems using the Vehicle fastened significantly increases the Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under (Continued)
59 Before Starting
(Continued) retractor in a normal manner, Children under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, risk of serious injury in the event of without twisting it. should be properly buckled up in a a collision, even with the air bags. • Insert the first latch plate located at child restraint system. • In the event of a collision, the seat the end of the shoulder portion of Automatic Locking Mode Setting belts help reduce the possibility of the belt inside the left buckle (this is • Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. 2 the vehicle’s occupants being thrown the one without the red unlatch against the structures of the button on the top of the slot). • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull passenger compartment or out of downward until the entire belt is the vehicle. extracted. • The air bags are designed to work • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt together with the seat belts, not to retracts, you will hear a clicking substitute them. The front air bags sound. This indicates the safety belt only deploy in the event of certain is now in the automatic locking head-on collisions of sufficient mode. intensity. They may not be activated Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting if the vehicle rolls over, or in the Unbuckle the three point seat belt and event of rear bumps or minor frontal allow it to retract completely to collisions, or non-frontal collisions. • Insert the latch plate located at the disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle emergency Seat Belt for Rear Central Seat end of the lap portion of the belt inside the right buckle. locking mode. The rear central seat belt has two To unlatch the seat belt, release the buckles and two metal latch plates; in right plate of the lap portion by this way it is possible to release it from clicking on the red button. WARNING! the seat and fold down the long part • The belt and retractor assembly must (60) of the seatback (refer to “Cargo Using Seat Belt in Automatic be checked by an Authorized Area” in section “Understanding the Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) Maserati Dealer and must be Vehicle” for further information). To Use the seat belt automatic locking replaced if the Automatic Locking buckle the seat belt proceed as mode anytime a child safety seat is Retractor (ALR) feature or any other follows: installed in a seating position that has seat belt function is not working • Take place in the central seat and a belt with this feature. properly. pull out the belt from the upper • Failure to replace the belt and
60 Before Starting
retractor assembly could increase NOTE: vibrations or localized heating (over the risk of injury in collisions. To obtain the highest degree of 212°F/100°C for a maximum of 6 hours protection from the action of the max.) in the area around the Seat Belt Pretensioners pretensioning device, wear the seat pretensioners may damage or deploy belt tight to the chest and pelvis. them erroneously. These devices are The car is equipped with front seat not affected by vibrations caused by 2 belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in Pretensioners are triggered by the uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. the belts in the event of a severe Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A Contact the Authorized Maserati frontal impact. This guarantees the pretensioner may be used only once Dealer for any intervention that may perfect adherence of the seat belts to because it is a pyrotechnic device. be required. the occupants bodies before the Pretensioners do not require any restraining action begins. maintenance or lubrication: any This car is also equipped with a second Enhanced Seat Belt Use changes to its original conditions will Reminder System (BeltAlert®) pretensioner in the kick plate area. Its invalidate its efficiency. If, due to activation is signalled by the unusual natural events (floods, sea BeltAlert® is a feature intended to shortening of the metal cable and storms, etc.), the device has been remind the driver and front passenger curling of its protective sheath. affected by water and mud, it must be to fasten their seat belts. replaced. The feature activates with engine running. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the seat belt WARNING! reminder light and the related message will turn on in the instrument It is strictly forbidden to remove or cluster. Message remains on for 5 tamper with the pretensioner seconds. components. Any service intervention must be carried out only by qualified and authorized personnel. Always contact an Authorized Maserati Pretensioners work for all size Dealer. occupant restraint systems, including the child restraint systems. CAUTION! Operations which lead to impacts,
61 Before Starting
If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification on the instrument cluster. 2 The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is not occupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat. It The BeltAlert® warning sequence is recommended to restrain pets in the When a safety belt is worn properly, it is begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet more likely that the baby will not be hurt mph (8 km/h) for more than 19 carriers that are secured by seat belts, in a crash. For pregnant women, as for seconds, by blinking the seat belt and properly stow cargo. anyone, the key to making safety belts reminder light and message and by Seat Belts and Pregnant effective is wearing them properly. sounding an intermittent chime. Women Once the sequence starts, it will Seat belts should be worn by pregnant continue for the entire duration. After WARNING! women: the risk of injury in the event the sequence completes, the seat belt Pregnant women should observe the of an accident is greatly reduced for reminder light remains illuminated above indications, as well as local them and the unborn child if they are until the respective seat belts are regulation concerning the use of seat wearing a seat belt. The best way to fastened and the message remains on belts. for 5 seconds. protect the fetus is to protect the If the opened front door on the driver mother. or passenger side is closed and the Pregnant women must position the occupant presence sensor detects a lower part of the belt below the belly status change from occupant not so that it passes over the pelvis and present to occupant present the under the abdomen (see figure). system will repeat the warning sequence. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts.
62 Before Starting Supplemental Restraint side windows and their covers are also labeled “AIR bag”. System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle is also equipped with This vehicle has advanced front air Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air bags for both the driver and front Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger passenger as a supplement to the seat pelvis-chest-shoulder protection 2 belt restraint systems. during a side impact. The The driver's advanced front air bag is Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air mounted in the center of the steering Bags are mounted on front seats and wheel in the area shown in the are located in the outboard side of the picture. On this area is embossed the The advanced front air bags have a front seats. word “SRS AIRBAG” for easier multistage inflator design. This allows NOTE: recognition. the air bag to have different rates of After any accident, the vehicle should The passenger's advanced front air inflation based on the severity and be taken to the Authorized Maserati bag is mounted in the dashboard, type of collision. Dealer immediately. above the glove compartment in the This vehicle is equipped with driver area shown in the picture. On this and front passenger seat track area is embossed the word “AIRBAG” position sensors that may adjust the Air Bag System Components for easier recognition. inflation level of the advanced front Your vehicle may be equipped with In addition, the vehicle is equipped air bags based upon seat position. the following air bag system with a supplemental driver side knee This vehicle is also equipped with a components: air bag mounted in the dashboard front passenger seat belt buckle • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC); below the steering column. sensor that detects whether the front passenger seat belt is fastened. The • Air bag warning light on the NOTE: seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the instrument cluster; These air bags are designed to the inflation rate of the advanced front • Steering wheel and column; advanced air bag regulatory air bag. • Instrument cluster; requirements. This vehicle is equipped with • Driver advanced front air bag; Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable • Passenger advanced front air bag; Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads of front and rear outer occupants. The • Supplemental driver side knee air SABIC air bags are located above the bag.
63 Before Starting
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air information from the front impact on the passenger side of the Bags (SAB); sensors. dashboard since they could interfere • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable The first stage inflator is triggered with correct inflation of the Curtains (SABIC); immediately during an impact that passenger air bag and also cause • Front and side impact sensors; requires air bag deployment. This serious injury to the occupants. inflation rate is used in less severe 2 • Front seat belt pretensioners; • Do not place anything on or around collisions. A higher energy output, the air bag covers or attempt to • Seat belt buckle switch and seat track inflation rate, is used for more severe open them manually. You may position sensors; collisions. damage the air bags and you could • Pyrotechnical charge to cut power be injured because the air bags may from the battery; it is located on the no longer be functional. The CAUTION! positive battery terminal. protective covers for the air bag are • The electronic control unit provides designed to open only when the air for the activation of the bags are inflating. WARNING! pretensioners, front air bags or side • Always drive with your hands on the The air bag is not a substitute for the air bags (front and rear) based on steering wheel rim, so that the air seat belts. Correct use of the seat different criteria, according to the bag can inflate freely if required. belts, in combination with the air bag, type of impact. Failure of one or During the drive your back must be will offer protection for the driver and more systems to activate is not as upright as comfort allows and be passenger in the front seat in the indicative of a system malfunction. against the seat back with the seat event of a head-on collision. • The front and/or lateral air bags may belt properly fastened. inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent • Do not apply stickers or other impact involving the underbody Advanced Front Air Bags objects on the steering wheel, on area, for example in case of violent Properties the dashboard in the passenger’s impacts against steps, sidewalks, side air bag area, on roof side trims The advanced front air bag system has speed bumps, or when the vehicle or on the seats. multistage driver and front passenger falls into potholes, or similar. air bags. This system provides air bag • Do not travel with objects in your lap, inflation rates which are appropriate in front of your chest or especially with to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! a pipe, pencil or other objects in your determined by the Occupant Restraint • Never place objects (e.g. mobile mouth. In the event of a collision, the Controller (ORC), which may receive phones, toys, folders, tablets, ecc..) intervention of the air bag could result in serious injury.
64 Before Starting
• EXTREME HAZARD! Do not place a When the air bag deploys, it opens the rearward-facing infant seat onto the seam between the front and side of front seat in front of a not the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deactivated air bag (see warning deploys independently; a left side plate on the dashboard and above impact deploys the left air bag only and behind the sun visors). and a right side impact deploys the 2 Deployment of the air bag in an right air bag only. accident could cause fatal injuries to Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable the baby regardless of the severity Curtain (SABIC) of the collision. SABIC air bags are designed to protect Supplemental Air bags the head of front and rear occupants Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air in the event of a side impact, thanks Bags (SAB) to the wide cushion inflation surface. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Each air bag features inflated Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest chambers placed adjacent to the head and shoulder area of the occupants in of each outboard occupant that the event of a side impact of reduce the potential for side-impact medium/high severity. The SAB is head injuries. The SABICS deploy marked with “AIRBAG” label sewn downward, covering both windows on into the outboard side of the front the impact side. seats.
WARNING! • Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door, windows or the area in which the window bag is located to avoid possible injury during air bag inflation. Sit upright in the centre of the seating area. • Do not cover the front seatbacks (Continued) 65 Before Starting
(Continued) front seat belt pretensioners, as type and location of impact, advanced with clothes or covers. Do not use required, depending on the severity front air bags may deploy in crashes accessory seat covers or place and type of impact. with little vehicle front-end damage objects between you and the side air On top of what previously described, but that produce a severe initial bags; the performance could be the characteristics of the collision deceleration. 2 adversely affected and/or objects registered by the sensors and sent to The side air bags will not deploy in all could cause serious injury. the control unit of the ORC can also side collisions. Side air bag deployment • Do not add roof racks that require cause a sudden cut of the power from will depend on the severity and type permanent attachments (bolts or the battery, “blowing” the of collision. Because air bag sensors screws) for installation on the pyrotechnical charge located on the measure vehicle deceleration over vehicle roof. Do not drill into the positive battery terminal. time, vehicle speed and damage roof of the vehicle for any reason. merely are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air CAUTION! deployed. bag After a collision that has caused the Seat belts are necessary for your ignition of the pyrotechnical charge, The supplemental driver side knee air protection in all accidents, and also are this must be replaced at an Authorized bag provides enhanced protection and needed to help keep you in position, Maserati Dealer. works together with the driver away from an inflating air bag. The advanced front air bag during a Advanced front air bags are designed ORC monitors the readiness of the frontal impact. to provide additional protection by electronic parts of the air bag system supplementing the seat belts in certain whenever the ignition switch is in the Air Bag Deployment Sensors frontal collisions depending on the RUN position. If the ignition switch is and Controls severity and type of collision. in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not active, the air bag Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Advanced front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in system is not activated and the air The Occupant Restraint Controller rear, side, or rollover collisions. bags will not inflate. (ORC) determines if deployment of the The advanced front air bags will not The ORC contains a backup power front air bags and/or side air bags in a deploy in all frontal collisions, supply system that may deploy the air frontal or side collision or rollover including those that may produce bags even if the battery has low power event is required. Based on the impact substantial vehicle damage, for or it becomes disconnected prior to sensor's signals, a central electronic example, some pole collisions, truck deployment. When starting the ORC deploys the advanced front air under rides, and corner impacts. On vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and the other hand, depending on the warning light on the instrument
66 Before Starting cluster for approximately 4 to 8 vehicle is in complete stop, the air quantity of nontoxic gas is generated seconds for a test. bags can be deployed in case of to inflate the advanced front air bags. After the test, the air bag warning collision. For this reason, children The steering wheel hub trim cover and light will turn off. If the ORC, during must never occupy the front seat in the upper right side of the dashboard the diagnosis phase detects a a rearward facing seat even if the separate and fold out of the way as malfunction that could affect the air car is not moving. Deployment of the air bags inflate to their full size. 2 bag system, it turns on the air bag the air bag following an impact The air bags then quickly deflate while warning light and the “Service Airbag could cause fatal injuries to the helping to restrain the driver and System” message either momentarily child. Please note that when the front passenger. The advanced front or continuously. The diagnostics also ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC air bag gas is vented through the vent record the nature of the malfunction. position or is turned off, the air bag holes in the sides of the air bag. In this A beep will sound if the light will not deploy in case of collision. way, the air bags do not interfere with illuminates again after initial startup. Therefore, in these cases, lack of air your control of the vehicle. bag deployment is not an indication Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air of a system malfunction. Bag Inflator Unit • Ignoring the air bag warning light The supplemental driver side knee air and message in your instrument bag unit is located in the dashboard cluster could mean you won't have trim beneath the steering column. the air bags to protect you in the When the ORC detects a collision event of a collision. If the light does requiring the air bag, it signals the not come on as a bulb check when inflator units. A large quantity of the ignition is first turned on, stays non-toxic gas is generated to inflate on after you start the engine, or if it the supplemental driver side knee air The air bag warning light monitors comes on as you drive, have an bag. The trim cover separates and the internal circuits and Authorized Maserati Dealer service folds out of the way allowing the air interconnecting wiring associated with the air bag system immediately. bag to inflate to the full size. air bag system electrical components. Front Air Bag Inflator Units Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units When the ORC detects a collision The ORC unit determines if a side WARNING! requiring the advanced front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large collision requires the side air bags to • If the ignition switch is in RUN inflate, based on the severity and type position, the engine is off and the of collision. Based on the severity and
67 Before Starting
type of collision, the side air bag injure you if you are not belted and • disconnect the battery with a inflator on the crash side of the vehicle seated properly, or if items are pyrotechnic charge. may be triggered, releasing a quantity positioned in the area where the side Air Bag Deployment Result of nontoxic gas. curtain air bag inflates. This especially The inflating SAB exits through the applies to children. The advanced front air bags are 2 seat seam into the space between the The SABICs may also help reduce the designed to deflate immediately after occupant and the door. The side air risk of partial or complete ejection of deployment. bag moves at a very high speed and vehicle occupants through side If you do have a collision which with such a high force that it could windows in certain rollover events deploys the air bags, any or all of the injure you if you are not seated (because equipped with rollover following may occur: properly, or if items are positioned in sensing). • The nylon air bag material may the area where the side air bag Front and Side Impact Sensors sometimes cause abrasions and/or inflates. This especially applies to skin reddening to the driver and In front and side impacts, impact children. front passenger as the air bags sensors can aid the ORC in determining deploy and unfold. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable appropriate response to impact events. Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units • As the air bags deflate, you may see Enhanced Accident Response System During collisions where the impact is some smoke-like particles. The confined to a particular area of the In the event of an impact causing air particles are a normal by-product of side of the vehicle, the ORC may bag deployment, if the communication the process that generates the deploy the SABIC air bags, depending network and the power remains intact, non-toxic gas used for air bag on the severity and type of collision. In depending on the nature of the inflation. These airborne particles these events, the ORC will deploy the accident, the ORC will determine may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or SABIC only on the impact side of the whether the enhanced accident throat. If these particles settle on vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is response system will have to perform your clothing, follow the garment generated to inflate the side curtain the following functions: manufacturer's instructions for air bag. • cut off fuel to the engine; cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If The inflating side curtain air bag • turn hazard lights and interior lights you are involved in another collision, pushes the head/s of the occupant/s on as long as the battery has power the air bags will not be in place to seating in the outside seats from the or until the ignition switch is turned protect you. edge of the headliner out of the way off; and covers the window. The air bag • unlock the doors automatically; inflates with enough force to possibly
68 Before Starting
pretensioners cannot protect you in are made. Take your vehicle to an another collision. Have the air bags, Authorized Maserati Dealer for any ENVIRONMENTAL! seat belt pretensioners, and the air bag system service. If your seat Air bag inflation releases a small front seat belt retractor assemblies including your trim cover and amount of powder. This powder is not replaced by a Maserati Service cushion needs to be serviced in any harmful to the environment. Center. Also, have the Occupant way (including removal or 2 Restraint Controller (ORC) system loosening/tightening of seat serviced as well. attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! • Have the air bag checked, serviced and replaced only by an Authorized • Only Maserati manufacturer California Proposition 65 Maserati Dealer. approved seat accessories may be Operating, servicing and maintaining used. If it is necessary to modify the a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle Air Bag System Maintenance air bag system for persons with can expose you to chemicals including disabilities, contact an Authorized such as, engine exhaust, carbon Maserati Dealer. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of WARNING! • If the speedometer, Rev Counter, or California to cause cancer and birth • Modifications to any part of the air any engine related gauges are not defects or other reproductive harm. To bag system could cause it to fail; working, the Occupant Restraint minimize exposure, avoid breathing thus you could be injured if the air Controller (ORC) may also be exhaust, do not idle the engine except bag system is not there to protect disabled. The air bags may not be as necessary, service your vehicle in a you. Do not modify the components ready to inflate for your protection. well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wiring. Do not modify the front Promptly check the fuse block for or wash your hands frequently when bumper, vehicle body structure, or blown fuses. To identify the air bag servicing your vehicle. For more add aftermarket side steps or fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in information go to: running boards. section "Maintenance and Care". See www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- • It is dangerous to try to repair any an Authorized Maserati Dealer if the vehicle part of the air bag system without fuse is efficient. the necessary know-how. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag WARNING! may inflate accidentally or may not • Deployed air bags and seat belt function properly if modifications
69 Before Starting
Transport of persons with Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: disability This vehicle is equipped with an event EDR data are recorded by your vehicle If it is necessary to modify the data recorder (EDR). The main purpose only if a non-trivial crash situation advanced air bag system of your of an EDR is to record, in certain crash occurs; no data are recorded by the vehicle to accommodate a person with or near crash-like situations, such as an EDR under normal driving conditions 2 disabilities, contact an Authorized air bag deployment or hitting a road and no personal data (e.g., name, Maserati Dealer. obstacle, data that will assist in gender, age, and crash location) are understanding how a vehicle’s systems recorded. However, other parties, such have performed. as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of WARNING! The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety personally identifying data routinely • The advanced air bag system of your systems for a short period of time, acquired during a crash investigation. vehicle is not designed to protect typically 30 seconds or less. adults with disabilities that require To read data recorded by an EDR, The EDR in this vehicle is designed to deactivation of the passenger or special equipment is required, and record such data as: driver air bag. access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. • If you or another occupant is an • how various systems in your vehicle In addition to the vehicle adult with a medical condition that were operating; manufacturer, other parties, such as requires air bag deactivation, please • whether or not the driver and law enforcement, that have the special contact an Authorized Maserati passenger safety belts were equipment, can read the information Dealer. For further information on buckled/fastened; if they have access to vehicle or the disabled driver or passengers see • how far (if at all) the driver was EDR. http://www.safercar.gov. depressing the accelerator and/or • As long as the air bag is activated, brake pedal; and persons with disabilities are advised • how fast the vehicle was traveling. not to travel in the front seat in These data can help provide a better order to avoid the risk of serious understanding of the circumstances in injuries or death, even in minor which crashes and injuries occur. crashes.
70 Before Starting Child Restraint Systems not hold the child, no matter how Convertible child seats can be used strong you are. The child and others either rearward-facing or NOTE: could be badly injured. Any child forward-facing in the vehicle. A child restraint system can help riding in your vehicle should always Convertible child seats often have a protect a child in a vehicle so ensure be in a proper restraint system higher weight limit in the that the child restraint selected has a suitable for the child’s size. rearward-facing direction than infant 2 carriers do, so they can be used certification label applicable to FMVSS There are different sizes and types of rearward-facing by children who have 213 in the U.S., or CMVSS 213 in restraint systems for children from outgrown their infant carrier but are Canada. newborn size to the child almost large still younger than at least two years enough for an adult safety belt. old. Everyone in your vehicle must be Always refer to the manual provided Children should remain rearward- buckled up all the time, including with child seat to ensure it is the facing until they reach the highest babies and children. Every state in the proper type according the travelling weight or height allowed by their United States and all Canadian child. Use the restraint system that is child seat. Both types of child restraint provinces require that small children correct for your child. ride in proper restraint systems. Please systems are fixed to the car by the be reminded that you can be Infants and Child Restraints lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to prosecuted for ignoring this law. Safety experts recommend that Children 12 years or younger should “Lower Anchors and Tether for children ride rearwardfacing in the CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, vehicle until they are two years old or if available. According to crash until they reach either the height or statistics, children are safer when weight limit of their rear facing child properly restrained in the rear seats seat. WARNING! rather than in the front. Two types of child restraint systems • Never place a rear facing infant seat can be used rearward-facing: infant in front of an air bag. A deploying carriers and convertible child seats. Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag WARNING! The infant carrier is only used can cause death or serious injury to In a collision, an unrestrained child, rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is a child 12 years or younger, even a baby, can become a projectile recommended for children from birth including a child in a rearward inside the vehicle. The force required until they reach the weight or height facing infant seat. to hold even an infant on your lap limit of the infant carrier. (Continued) could become so great that you could
71 Before Starting
(Continued) cushion while the back is against the NOTE: • Only use a rearward-facing child seatback, they should use a For additional information, refer to restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. belt-positioning booster seat. www.seatcheck.org or call The child and belt-positioning booster 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents Older Children and Child seat are fixed to the car by the should refer to Transport Canada’s 2 Restraints lap/shoulder belt. website for additional information: Children who are two years old or who Children Too Large for Booster http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ have outgrown their rear-facing child Seats safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and Children who are large enough to convertible child seats used in the wear the shoulder belt comfortably WARNING! forward-facing direction are for and whose legs are long enough to children who are over two years old or bend over the front of the seat when • Improper installation can lead to who have outgrown the rear-facing their back is against the seatback failure of an infant or child restraint. weight or height limit of their should use the lap/shoulder belt in a It could come loose in a collision. The rear-facing child seat. rear seat. child could be badly injured or killed. Children should remain in a • Make sure that the child is upright in Follow the restraint manufacturer’s forward-facing child seat with a the seat. directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. harness for as long as possible, up to • The lap portion should be low on the the highest weight or height allowed hips and as snug as possible. • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A by the child seat. These child seats are • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s rearward-facing child restraint in the also fixed to the car by the squirming or slouching can move the front seat may be struck by a lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child belt out of position. restraint anchorage system. Refer to deploying passenger air bag, which • If the shoulder belt contacts the face “Lower Anchors and Tether for may cause severe or fatal injury to or neck, move the child closer to the CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. the infant. center of the vehicle. Never allow a All children whose weight or height is child to put the shoulder belt under above the forward-facing limit for the an arm or behind their back. Here are some tips on getting child seat should use a belt-positioning the most out of your child booster seat until the vehicle’s seat restraint belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label
72 Before Starting
certifying that it meets all applicable Installing Child Restraint tighten it around the child restraint Safety Standards. Maserati also Systems using the Vehicle Seat seat. All seat belts will loosen over recommends that you make sure Belt equipped with ALR time, it is therefore necessary to check that you can install the child them periodically and set them restraint in the vehicle where you All the passenger seat belts are properly. will use it before you buy it. equipped with an Automatic Locking 2 Retractor (ALR) to secure child Lower Anchors and Tether for • The restraint system must be protection through a Child Restraint appropriate for your child’s weight Children (LATCH) System (CRS). These types of seat belts and height. Your vehicle's rear outboard seats are are designed to keep the lap portion all equipped with the child restraint • Check the label on the restraint of the seat belt tight around the child anchorage system called LATCH. system for weight and height limits. restraint seat avoiding to use a locking The LATCH system allows the child • Carefully follow the instructions that clip. restraint systems to be fixed without come with the restraint system. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise using the vehicle's seat belts, instead • If installed improperly, it may not if the entire belt is pulled out of the fixing the child restraint system to the work when needed. retractor in order to enable the belt to vehicle structure, using lower retract subsequently. For additional • Fit the child into the seat according anchorages A and upper tether strap information on ALR, see “Using Seat to the child restraint manufacturer’s B. directions. Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode” in “Occupants Restraint Systems” in this section. To install a Child Restraint System with WARNING! ALR, pull enough of the belt out of When your child restraint system is the retractor leading it through the not in use, secure it in the vehicle with belt path of the protection device. the seat belt or remove it from the Slide the latch into the buckle until it vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the clicks, then remove the entire safety vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, belt from the retractor in order to it could strike the occupants or rewound. While rewinding a click will seatbacks and cause serious personal indicate the safety belt is now in LATCH-Compatible child restraint injury. Automatic Locking mode. systems are now available. You should Exert then a traction on the exceeded never install LATCH child seats so that lap section of the belt in order to
73 Before Starting
two seats share a common lower NOTE: anchorage. The top tether strap anchorage behind If your child restraints are not the central rear seat should be used to LATCH-Compatible, install the secure a child restraint system with the restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. vehicle's seat belts. 2 Installing a LATCH- Compatible Child Restraint System The lower LATCH anchorages are “U-shaped” metal rings located on the rear seat where the cushion meets the seatback just below the symbol shown • Route the top tether strap to provide in the picture, but are not visible. You the most direct path between the will find them if you run your finger anchorage and the child restraint along the intersection of the seatback system passing it over the headrest. and seat cushion surfaces. • Attach the hook of the top tether strap (provided with the child To install a LATCH-Compatible child restraint system) to the anchor. restraint seat proceed as follows. • Secure the child seat to the “U-shaped” lower metal rings positioned on the rear seat. • Fix the top tether strap (provided with the child seat), to the anchor located in the panel between the rear seat back and the rear window. In addition, there are tether strap • Lift the plastic cover located behind anchorages behind each rear seat. the seat where you want to install • Tighten the upper strap until you the child restraint system. reach the tension level recommended by the restraint system manufacturer.
74 Before Starting
To install a child restraint system in the the manufacturer must supply with • Child restraint anchorages are center seating position route the hook the child restraint system. designed to withstand only those end of the tether strap between the • An incorrectly anchored tether strap loads imposed by correctly fitted seatback and adjustable headrest could lead to increased head motion child restraints. Under no (with the headrest in the full up and possible injury to the child. Use circumstances are they to be used position) then attach the hook to the only the anchor position directly for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for 2 anchor located in the panel between behind the child seat to secure a attaching other items or equipment the rear seatback and the rear child restraint top tether strap. to the vehicle. window. NOTE: Important Safety Notice for • Ensure that the tether strap does not Transporting Children slip into the opening between the • Install the child seat on the rear seat seatbacks as you remove slack in the as this is the safest position in case of strap. collisions. • When using a LATCH-Compatible • Keep the instructions in the vehicle child restraint system, please ensure together with the documents and that all seat belts not being used for this owner’s manual. Do not use a occupant restraints are stowed and child restraint system which does not out of reach of children. contain instructions for use. NOTE: • Every child has to use one child For any further details on installation restraint system; never carry two and/or use of child restraint system, children using only one child seat. WARNING! refer to the instructions provided with • If using the vehicle seat belt, always • Improper installation of a child the child seat. check that the belt does not restrain restraint system to the LATCH the child's throat. anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child • Firmly pull the seat belt to check WARNING! could be badly injured or killed. that it is correctly buckled. • A child seat should be fitted only Follow the child restraint • Never allow a child to seat when the car is stationary. Follow manufacturer's directions exactly improperly or to unbuckle the seat the instructions for assembly, when installing an infant or child belt while driving. disassembly and positioning that restraint system.
75 Before Starting • Never allow a child to wear the Transporting Pets Rear Parking Camera shoulder portion of the belt under the arms or behind the back. Air bags deploying in the front seat Your vehicle is equipped with a rear • Never carry children on your lap, not could harm your pet. An unrestrained parking camera that allows you to see even newborns. No one can restrain pet will be thrown about and possibly an image on the MTC+ screen of the 2 a child in the event of an accident. injured, or injure a passenger during rear surroundings of your vehicle panic braking or in an accident. whenever the shift lever is put into R • In case of accident, replace the child Pets should be restrained in the rear (Reverse). seat with a new one. seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers When “Parkview Backup Camera that are secured by vehicle seat belts. Delay” mode is enabled, the rear view image shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of R (Reverse). When “Rearwiew Camera Delay” mode is enabled, the rear view image shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of R (Reverse). To assist the driver during maneuvers on dead-ends/roads and on intersections, the vehicle may be equipped with an optional surround view camera system. For more details on this option, see chapter "Surround View Camera System (optional)" in this section. The image will be displayed along with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The rear parking camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
76 Before Starting
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone and color:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 11-12in(28-30cm) 2 Yellow 12 - 78 in (30 cm-2m) Green 78-157 in (2–4 m) or greater
When the shift lever is shifted out of R (Reverse), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When displayed, dynamic grid lines (if the function is set to “MTC+ Settings”) will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The dynamic grid lines will show separate zones in different color that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
77 Before Starting NOTE: Surround View Camera If snow, ice, mud, or any other WARNING! System (optional) substance builds up on the camera Drivers must be careful when lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, reversing even when using the rear System components and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover view camera. Always check carefully 2 the lens. The system uses four cameras to behind your vehicle, and be sure to monitor the area around the vehicle, check for pedestrians, animals, other placed on the front grid, under the vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots side rearview mirrors and on the trunk before reversing. You are responsible lid, between the number plate lights. for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to be careful while reversing. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, the rear camera should only be used as a parking aid, as the rear camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the rear camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using the rear camera.
78 Before Starting
which images to display according to 4 present under the images. The button possible settings. will highlight and the type of setting Rear view and top view will appear on each image.
Rear cross path view 2
Front cross path view
When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse) position, camera images will Front view and top view be automatically displayed on MTC+ display. In the top view, the vehicle is Instead, when the shift lever is shifted In any shift lever condition, when represented as it is during the to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) “Surround View” screen is displayed, a maneuver, therefore any open doors position, it is possible to activate/ pop-up message will appear in the will be visible in the image (see deactivate the system by pressing upper part for 5 seconds. example in the figure). “Surround Camera” softkey in With gear in P (Park), N (Neutral) or D To display also the dynamic lines of “Controls” screen of MTC+ display. (Drive), the upper right corner of the the trajectory you are setting, it is screen will show the “X” key: touch it necessary to set this function by to go back to the previous screen of accessing the “Settings” menu on MTC+ display, before entering in MTC+, at “Safety & Driving Assistant” “Controls”. item. Once this menu is displayed, it is The deactivation of the rear also possible to set the function that visualization via “X” soft-key is not delays the exit from this screen in possible when the transmission is in R special situations when the gear lever (Reverse) position. is in D (Drive), N (Neutral) and P (Park) Choose the most suitable setting for position. For further information, see the situation and the maneuver you “MTC+ Settings” in section Once the “Surround Camera” screen is are performing or going to perform, “Dashboard Instruments and displayed, it is possible to choose by touching the relevant button Controls”.
79 Before Starting
day or under good lighting NOTE: conditions. Do not use and rely on If snow, ice, mud, or any other the system under poor lighting substance builds up on the camera conditions. lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, • Distance lines and trajectory lines and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover 2 must be used only as a reference and the lens. only when vehicle is on a flat ground. The distance shown on MTC+ display must be interpreted as a reference and might be different WARNING! from the distance actually present California Proposition 65 between the vehicle and any Operating, servicing and maintaining WARNING! displayed objects. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle Failure to follow the precautions • Any obstacles present above the can expose you to chemicals including below might result in serious injury or cameras cannot be detected. such as, engine exhaust, carbon even death. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • Drivers must be careful during which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth maneuvers also when using the CAUTION! camera system with surround view. defects or other reproductive harm. To • To avoid vehicle damage, the camera minimize exposure, avoid breathing • Always check carefully the areas system with surround view should exhaust, do not idle the engine except around your vehicle, before only be used as a parking aid, as the as necessary, service your vehicle in a proceeding forward or backward. cameras are unable to view every well-ventilated area and wear gloves • Be sure to always check for any obstacle or object in your drive path. or wash your hands frequently when pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle servicing your vehicle. For more obstructions, or blind spots. must be driven slowly when using information go to: • The driver must use the utmost the camera system with surround www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- caution while using the system to view, to be able to stop in time when vehicle avoid damage to property or an obstacle is seen. It is personal injury. recommended that the driver looks • The camera system with surround frequently over his/her shoulder view is designed for use during the when using this system.
80 Before Starting Safety Tips • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any Transporting Passengers longer than needed to move your WARNING! vehicle in or out of the area. California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining • If it is necessary to sit in a parked a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle vehicle with the engine running, 2 WARNING! can expose you to chemicals including adjust your heating or cooling • Do not leave children or animals such as, engine exhaust, carbon controls to force outside air into the inside parked vehicles in hot monoxide, phthalates and lead, that vehicle. Set the blower at high weather. Interior heat build-up may which are know to the State of speed. cause serious injury. California to cause cancer and birth • Never ride in a cargo area, inside of • If you are required to drive with the defects or other reproductive harm. To a vehicle. trunk open, make sure that all minimize exposure, avoid breathing windows are closed and the climate • Do not allow people to ride in any exhaust, do not idle the engine except control blowers switch is set at high area of your vehicle that is not as necessary, service your vehicle in a speed. DO NOT use the recirculation equipped with seats and seat belts. well-ventilated area and wear gloves mode. or wash your hands frequently when • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is servicing your vehicle. For more in a seat and using a seat belt The best protection against carbon information go to: properly. monoxide entry into the passenger www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- compartment is a properly maintained vehicle Exhaust Gas engine exhaust system. Whenever detecting a change in the sound of the exhaust system or Vehicle Safety Checks Seat Belts WARNING! eventual exhaust fumes inside the vehicle have the Authorized Maserati Exhaust gases can injure. They contain • Inspect the belt system periodically, Dealer inspect the complete exhaust carbon monoxide (CO), which is checking for cuts, frays, and loose system and adjacent body areas for colorless and odorless. Breathing it parts. Damaged parts must be broken, damaged, deteriorated, or can make you unconscious and can replaced immediately. mispositioned parts. eventually poison you. To avoid • Do not disassemble or modify the Open seams or loose connections breathing (CO), follow these safety system. could permit exhaust fumes to seep tips: • If the belt has been sharply pulled, into the passenger compartment. for example as the result of an
81 Before Starting
accident, the safety belt, together vehicle end of life disposal. See NOTE: with the anchoring devices, the www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ The Authorized Maserati Dealer can anchoring device mounting screws perchlorate. provide you with any information and the pretensioner must be about the available Maserati floor completely replaced. Even if the belt Defroster mats included in the “Genuine 2 does not present any exterior signs Check operation by selecting the Accessories” range. of wear or damage, it may have lost defrost mode and place the fan system its restraining properties. on high speed (see “Air Conditioning Air Bag Warning Light Controls” chapter in section “Dashboard Instruments and WARNING! The light should illuminate and Controls”). Pedals that cannot move freely can remain lit for a few seconds bulb You should be able to feel the air cause loss of vehicle control and checking when the ignition switch is directed against the windshield and increase the risk of serious personal pushed in RUN position (see front side windows. Contact injury. “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Authorized Maserati Dealer for service — Air Bags” chapter in this section). • Always make sure that floor mats if your defroster is inoperable. are properly attached to the proper • If the light does not illuminate Floor Mat fasteners. while starting, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. Always use floor mats designed to fit • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle • If the light stays on, flickers, or comes the footwell of your vehicle. Use only that cannot be properly secured to on while driving, have the system floor mats that leave the pedal area prevent them from moving and checked by the Authorized Maserati unobstructed and that are firmly interfering with the pedals. Dealer. secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals • Never put floor mats or other floor or impair safe operation of your coverings on top of already installed vehicle. floor mats. Additional floor mats and WARNING! other coverings will reduce the size Certain components of this vehicle of the pedal area and interfere with such as air bag modules, seat belt the pedals. pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may • Check mounting of mats on a regular contain Perchlorate material. Special basis. Always properly reinstall and handling may apply for service or secure floor mats that have been
82 Before Starting
removed for cleaning. Lights and Indicator Lights monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • Always make sure that objects • Have someone observe the which are know to the State of cannot fall into the driver footwell operation of exterior lights while California to cause cancer and birth while the vehicle is moving. Objects you operate the controls (see defects or other reproductive harm. To can become trapped under the “Lights” chapter in section minimize exposure, avoid breathing brake pedal and accelerator pedal “Understanding the Vehicle”). exhaust, do not idle the engine except 2 as necessary, service your vehicle in a causing a loss of vehicle control. • Check turn signal and high beam well-ventilated area and wear gloves • Mounting posts must be properly indicator lights on the instrument or wash your hands frequently when installed, if not equipped from the cluster (see “Instrument Cluster” servicing your vehicle. For more factory. Failure to properly follow chapter in section “Dashboard information go to: floor mat installation or mounting Instruments and Controls”). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- can cause interference with the Door Latches vehicle brake pedal and accelerator pedal • Check for positive closing, latching, operation causing loss of control of and locking of doors and trunk lid the vehicle. (see “Unlock the Vehicle with Key Tires fob” chapter in this section). • Examine tires for excessive tread Fluid Leaks wear and uneven wear patterns. • Check area under vehicle after • Check for stones, nails, glass, or overnight parking for recent fluid other objects lodged in the tread or leaks (oil, fuel, etc.). sidewall. • If gasoline fumes are detected or • Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. fluid leaks are suspected, contact the • Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and Authorized Maserati Dealer. bulges. • Check the wheel nuts for tightness. WARNING! • Check the tires (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” chapter in section California Proposition 65 “Features and Specifications”) for Operating, servicing and maintaining proper cold inflation pressure. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
83 Before Starting Park Assist (if equipped) increased to approximately 7.5 mph cm) from the front bumper in the (12 km/h) or above. The system will horizontal direction, depending on the The Park Assist (also called become active again if the vehicle location, type and orientation of the “ParkSense”) system provides visual speed is decreased to speeds less than obstacle. and audible indications of the distance approximately 6.2 mph (10 km/h). 2 between the rear and/or front bumper and a detected obstacle when backing Park Assist Sensors up or moving forward, e.g. during a The four Park Assist sensors, located in parking maneuver. the rear bumper, monitor the area Besides the use of the sensors available behind the vehicle that is within the on the bumpers and of the rear sensors' field of view. The sensors can parking camera, the vehicle may be detect obstacles up to approximately equipped with surround view cameras 78 in (200 cm) from the rear bumper in (optional) to assist the driver during the horizontal direction, depending on maneuvers on dead-ends/roads and on the location, type and orientation of intersections. For more details on this the obstacle. Park Assist Warning Messages option, see chapter "Surround View Display Camera System (optional)" in this The Park Assist Warning screen will section. only be displayed if “Sound + Display” Refer to “Park Assist System Usage is selected from the MTC+ System. Precautions” for limitations of this Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section system and recommendations. “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” Park Assist system will retain the last for further information. system state (enabled or disabled) The Park Assist Warning screen is from the last ignition cycle when the located on the instrument cluster ignition is changed to the RUN display. position. It provides visual warnings to indicate The six Park Assist sensors, located in Park Assist system can be active only the distance between the rear bumper the front bumper, monitor the area in when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or and/or front bumper and the detected front of the vehicle that is within the D (Drive). obstacle. sensors' field of view. If Park Assist is enabled at one of these The warning display will turn on The sensors can detect obstacles up to shift lever positions, the system will indicating the system status (ready or a distance of approximately 50 in (120 remain active until the vehicle speed is off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
84 Before Starting or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has one flashing red arc only, combined been detected. with a continuous sound. The detection area in front of the The following charts show the vehicle is divided into two parts with warning alert visualization when the four arcs while the two detection system is detecting an obstacle. areas behind the car into five arcs. 2 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by displaying arcs with fixed or flashing light and a characteristic sound according to the obstacle distance. The color indicates the distance and the arc indicates the position of the detected obstacle. The green color of the outer arc indicates the maximum distance, the amber color of the middle arcs indicates the medium distance, while the red color of the nearest arc indicates the minimum distance.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the instrument cluster will display the arc moving towards the vehicle and the sound tone will change from single to slow, to fast and to continuous. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster displays
85 Before Starting
Front Sensors - Warning Alerts More than 50 in 50-40 in 40-24 in 23.6-12.2 in Less than 12 in Front distance (120 cm) (120-101 cm) (100-61 cm) (60-31 cm) (30 cm) Audible Alert None None Slow Fast Continuous 2 Arc in left and None 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) right areas Light type None Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc color - Green Amber Amber Red Radio sound Active Active Mute Mute Mute
Rear Sensors - Warning Alerts Rear More than 78 in 78-59.4 in 60-40 in 40-24 in 23.6-12.2 in Less than 12 in distance (200 cm) (200-151 cm) (150-101 cm) (100-61 cm) (60-31 cm) (30 cm) Audible None Single Slow Slow Fast Continuous Alert Arc in left and right None 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) areas Light type None Solid Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc color – Green Amber Amber Amber Red Radio sound Active Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute
NOTE: • Maserati reserves the right to change specifications without prior notification. • Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
86 Before Starting
Enabling and Disabling Park the system requires service, the LED (11 km/h). Under this condition Park Assist will blink momentarily, and then the Assist will not operate. See LED will be on. “Instrument Cluster” in section By accessing the submenu “Safety & When the shift lever is moved to R “Dashboard Instruments and Driving Assistant” from MTC+ System, (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of Controls” for further information. the “Park Assist” can be disabled 7 mph (11 km/h) or below and the If the instrument cluster displays a 2 (option “Off”). The available options system is disabled, the instrument message prompting you to clean the regarding the warning alerts are: cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST sensors, make sure the outer surface “Sound” or “Sound + Display”. Refer Off” message for 5 seconds until the and the underside of the rear bumper to “MTC+ Settings” in section shift lever remains in R (Reverse) or and/or front bumper is clean and clear “Dashboard Instruments and when the shift lever is moved in D of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other Controls” for further information. (Drive). obstruction and then cycle the ignition The front sensors can be enabled or switch. If the message continues to disabled at any time by pressing the Service the Park Assist System appear contact the Authorized button on the front dome console. In case of malfunction of the Park Maserati Dealer. Assist system, the instrument cluster will actuate a single sound, once per ignition cycle. The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service. After pressing the button the If a failure message is displayed on the instrument cluster will display the When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system instrument cluster, contact the state of front parking sensors for Authorized Maserati Dealer. approximately five seconds. The has detected a faulted condition, the button LED will be on when the front instrument cluster will display the sensors are disabled. The button LED corresponding message for the time will be off when the front sensors are lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D enabled. If the button is pressed and (Drive) at speeds less than 7 mph
87 Before Starting
Cleaning the Park Assist surroundings. Failure to do so can Sensors result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! When cleaning the sensors, take special care not to scratch or damage • Park Assist is only a parking aid and Park Assist Volume them; therefore, do not use dry, rough it is unable to recognize every The volume of the acoustic signal 2 or hard cloths. obstacle, including small obstacles. emitted by the front and rear parking The sensors must be washed with clean Parking curbs might only be sensors is set to the medium level. water, possibly adding car shampoo. temporarily detected or not detected Three different levels of volume can be Should you need to repaint the at all. Obstacles located above or selected via the submenu “Safety & bumper or in case of paint touch-ups below the sensors will not be Driving Assistant” from the MTC+ in the sensor area, please contact detected when they are in close System. exclusively the Authorized Maserati proximity. Low level is useful in certain conditions Dealer. Incorrect paint application • The vehicle must be driven slowly when the parking sensor acoustic could affect the parking sensors when using Park Assist in order to be signal keeps coming on although there operation. able to stop in time when an is no actual collision hazard. This may obstacle is detected. When backing typically occur when driving in a queue Park Assist System Usage up, it is recommended that the driver or when the vehicle is overtaken by Precautions looks over his/her shoulder when motorcycles or other vehicles on one using Park Assist. NOTE: or both sides in a queue of traffic. When you set the volume, only the • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other parking sensor acoustic signal will be vibrations could affect the affected. The radio or any other performance of Park Assist. WARNING! devices connected to the vehicle sound • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer Drivers must be careful when backing system will not be affected. hitches, etc., must not be placed up even when using the Park Assist Refer to chapter “MTC+ Settings” in within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear system. Always check carefully behind section “Dashboard Instruments and bumper while driving the vehicle. your vehicle, look behind you, and be Controls” for further information. Failure to do so can result in the sure to check for pedestrians, animals, system misinterpreting a close object other vehicles, obstructions, and blind as a sensor problem, causing the spots before backing up. You are service Park Assist message to be responsible for safety and must displayed in the instrument cluster. continue to pay attention to your
88 3 – Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Components ...... 90 Front Power Seats ...... 93 Driver Memory Seat ...... 97 Rear Seats ...... 99 Power Steering Wheel Adjustment ...... 101 Adjustable Pedals (if equipped) ...... 103 Rearview Mirrors ...... 103 Lights ...... 106 Windshield Wipers and Washers ...... 118 Interior Features ...... 121 Cargo Area ...... 129 Power Sunroof with Sunshade ...... 132 HomeLink (optional) ...... 134 Air Conditioning Distribution ...... 138
89 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components Dashboard Components
3
90 Understanding the Vehicle
1 Adjustable side air outlets. 21 Internal rear view mirror. 8 Cover for cupholder and power 2 Engine START/STOP button. 22 Auto-dimming on/off button. socket compartment (some versions can have the 3 Light switch. 23 Front dome console. compartment with cupholder 4 Light dimmer controls. (*) If equipped and power socket visible, 5 Steering wheel controls. without access cover). 6 Instrument cluster. Central Console Components 9 Central console covers with 7* Right shift paddle +. armrest function. 3 8* Left shift paddle –. 10 Air outlets (adjustable). 9 Hood release. 11 Rear power sunshade and rear seats comfort controls panel (if 10 Adjustable central air outlets. equipped). 11 Analog clock. 12 MTC+ display. Front Dome Console 13 Multifuction lever (windshield Components wipers, headlight washer and headlight selection, turn signals). 14 Climate controls. 1 Automatic transmission shift 15 Dashboard glove box handle. lever. 16 Dashboard glove box. 2 Hazard lights switch. 17 Cover for compartment with 3 Drive mode switches. AUX, USB, SD memory card 4 Electric Parking Brake lever. port and slide phone drawer. 5 Glove compartment. 18 Storage compartment handle. 6 Unlock button for central 19 Storage compartment. console with cupholder and 1 Reading lights control button. 20 Vehicle security light and solar power outlet. sensor. 7 Rotary selectors and buttons 2 Central light control button. for the multimedia navigation. 3 Reading lights.
91 Understanding the Vehicle
4 Central light. Components between the Rear Seats 5 Sunroof controls. 6 HomeLink controls (optional). 7 Button to release the manual trunk lid or to open fully/partially the power trunk lid (optional). 3 8 Button to enable/disable front sensors of the Park Assist system (if equipped). 1 Internal door handle. 2 Driver’s seat and rear mirrors Front Doors Components memory switch. 3 Rear view mirrors switches. 1 Armrest cupholder covers 4 Power window switch. unlock button (some versions can have the cupholder visible, 5 Power door unlocks/locks. without access cover). 6 Rear windows and sunshade 2 Armrest compartment unlock lockout button. button with power outlet and 7 Loudspeakers. USB port (optional). 8 Storage compartment. 9 Internal door lock/unlock knob. 10 Passenger door panel grip. 11 Reflex reflector. 12 External door handle. 13 Door lock button with “Passive Entry” function. 14 Door outboard opening lock.
92 Understanding the Vehicle
Rear Dome Console 1 Internal rear door handle. Front Power Seats Components 2 Grip. Seats and seat belts are part of the 3 Loudspeaker. Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. 4 Door storage pockets. For further information, see chapter 5 Power window switch. “Occupant Restraint System” in 6 Power doors lock/unlock Section “Before Starting”. buttons. Depending on the different markets 7 “Child protection” door lock and versions, the front seats may have 3 system. different controls for adjustment and optional features. The configurations 8 Inside door lock/unlock knob. shown below may differ from the ones 9 Reflex reflector. in your vehicle. 1 Reading lights control button. 10 External door handle. 2 Central light control button. WARNING! 3 Reading light LED. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in 4 Central light LEDs. a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Rear Doors Components Front Power Seat Controls The power seats switches are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Use the front switch 1 to move the seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat cushion. Use the switch 2 to recline the seatback. Use the rear switch 3 to adjust the lumbar support.
93 Understanding the Vehicle
Grip switch 1 from the back side and push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired WARNING! position is reached. Remember that the headrests must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s CAUTION! head. If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) 3 is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse The angle of the seat cushion can be Replacement” in section “Maintenance adjusted in four directions. and Care”). Pull upward or push the front of the switch 1, to move the front cushion Head Restraints Adjustment (for seat in the direction of the switch. Comfort Seat only) Release the switch 1 when the desired To manually lift or lower the head position is reached. restraints on the Comfort Seat press Seat Back Tilt Control the indicated lateral button. The angle of the seatback can be NOTE: adjusted forward or rearward. The optional Sport Seat does not Push the seatback switch 2 forward or include the head restraint adjustment. rearward, the upper seatback will Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment move in the direction of the switch. The seat can be adjusted both forward Release the switch 2 when the desired and rearward. position is reached. Push the seat switch 1 forward or Power Lumbar rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Push the switch 3 forward or rearward Release the switch 1 when the desired to increase or decrease the lumbar position is reached. support. Push the switch 3 upward or Seat Up/Down Adjustment downward to raise or lower the The height of the seat can be adjusted lumbar support. up- or downward.
94 Understanding the Vehicle
The seats comfort commands are in • Starting from the state “OFF”, the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. indicated below the respective icon, WARNING! They are present in the "Climate" within 15 seconds touch the driver or • Never adjust the seat while driving. screen even when the A/C is off. See passenger seat soft-key once to You could lose control of the vehicle. “Air Conditioning Controls” in section select HI-level heating. Moving the seat could distract you “Dashboard Instruments and or make you press a pedal Controls” for further details. unintentionally. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while WARNING! 3 the vehicle is parked. • Persons with low skin sensitivity • Do not travel with the seatback because of advanced age, chronic reclined so that the shoulder belt is illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, no longer resting against your chest. medication, alcohol use, exhaustion In a collision you could slide under or other physical conditions must be the seat belt, which could result in careful when using the seat heater. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver serious injury or death. It may cause irritation even at low or passenger seat soft-key a second temperatures, especially if used for time to select LO-level heating. long periods of time. CAUTION! • Do not place anything on the seat Do not place any object under a that insulates against heat, such as a power seat or obstruct its movement blanket or cushion. This may cause as it may cause damage to the seat the seat heater to overheat. controls. Seat movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the Front Seats Heat Function way. NOTE: The engine must be running for the Front Heated Seats heated seats to operate. The front seats are equipped with • Within 15 seconds, touch the same heaters in both seat cushions and • Touch the “Climate” softkey on the soft-key a third time to shut off the seatbacks. lower part of the MTC+ display. seat heating.
95 Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: The seats comfort commands are in • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver Once a heat setting is selected, heat the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. or passenger seat soft-key a second will be felt within 2 to 5 minutes. They are present in the “Climate” time to select LO-level ventilation. screen even when the A/C is off. See When the HI-level setting is selected, “Air Conditioning Controls” in section the heater will provide a boosted heat “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” level during the first 4 minutes of for further details. operation. Front Ventilated Seats Function Then, the heat output will drop to the 3 normal HI-level. NOTE: If the HI-level setting is selected, the The engine must be running for the system will automatically switch to ventilated seats to operate. LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. • Touch the “Climate” softkey on the At that time, the display will indicate lower part of the MTC+ display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the the change from HI to LO. • Starting from the state “OFF”, seat ventilation. The LO-level setting will turn OFF indicated below the respective icon, automatically after a maximum of within 15 seconds touch the driver or approximately 45 minutes. passenger seat soft-key once to select Front Ventilated Seats HI-level ventilation. (optional) To enhance occupants comfort by high external temperatures, both the driver and passenger seats, on request, can be ventilated. Small fans are located in the seat cushion and seatback, they draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler when the temperature is high.
96 Understanding the Vehicle Driver Memory Seat • The “1” and “2” buttons which are • Check on the instrument cluster for used to recall either of two the positive response of the actions This feature allows the driver to store programmed memory profiles. “Memory 1 (or 2) profile set”. up to two different memory profiles After these steps, the profile set will for easy recall through a memory be memorized in the selected position. switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver NOTE: seat, external side mirrors, adjustable Memory profiles can be set without pedals (optional), and power tilt and the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle telescopic steering column and a set of must be in P (Park) to recall a memory 3 programmed radio stations. profile. Your key fob RKE transmitter can also be set to recall the same positions by Pairing Remote Keyless Entry pressing the button. Transmitter to Seats Memory Memory Profiles Setting NOTE: Your key fob with RKE transmitters NOTE: • Only one key fob RKE transmitter can be programmed to recall one of can be linked to each of the memory Saving a new memory profile will two programmed memory profiles by positions. erase an existing profile from memory. pressing the button on the RKE transmitter. • “Passive Entry” door handles cannot To create a new memory profile, be linked to the memory function. NOTE: perform the following: Use either the memory recall switch This feature can be enabled or • Cycle the ignition device to the ACC or the key fob RKE transmitter (if disabled using the MTC+ System, refer or RUN position. linked to the memory feature) to to “MTC+ Settings” in section recall memory positions 1 or 2. • Adjust all memory profile settings to “Dashboard Instruments and desired preferences (i.e., seat, side The memory seat switch is located on Controls” for further information. mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), the driver's door trim panel. The power tilt and telescopic steering To program your key fobs RKE switch consists of three buttons: column, and radio station presets). transmitter, perform the following • The “S” (SET) button, which is used • Press and release the “S” button on actions: to activate the memory save the memory switch. • Cycle the ignition device to the RUN function. • Within 5 seconds, press and release position. the memory button “1” or “2”.
97 Understanding the Vehicle
• Move the seat and/or the other Memory Position Recall Easy Entry/Exit Driver Seat adjustable devices in the position This feature provides automatic driver that you wish to memorize, or recall NOTE: seat positioning to enhance driver a previously memorized profile, The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall mobility when entering and exiting pressing the corresponding memory memory positions. If a recall is the vehicle. button “1” or “2”. attempted when the vehicle is not in P The distance the driver seat moves • Cycle the ignition device to the OFF (Park), a message will display in the instrument cluster. depends on where you have the driver position. seat positioned when you place the • Press and release the “S” button. 3 To recall the memory settings for ignition device to the OFF position. • Within 5 seconds, press and release driver, press memory button number • When you cycle the ignition device the memory button “1” or “2”. “1” or “2” on the driver's door trim to the OFF position the driver seat: • Press and release the button on panel or the button on the RKE • will move about 2.36 in (60 mm) key fob RKE transmitter. transmitter linked to memory position rearward if the driver seat position “1” or “2” with ignition device in the • Within 3 seconds, press and release is greater than or equal to ca. 5.51 RUN position. the button on the key fob RKE in (140 mm) forward of the rear A recall can be canceled by pressing transmitter. stop; any of the buttons (“S”, “1”, or “2”) To check if the system has memorized • will move to a position of ca. 3.15 during a recall. When a recall is the correct profile, you can move the in (80 mm) rearward of the rear canceled, the driver seat, external side seat and press the button: the seat stop if the driver seat position is mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), will move to the memorized position. between 5.51 in (140 mm) and 3.15 and power tilt and telescopic steering in (80 mm) forward of the rear NOTE: column stop moving. stop. Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be A delay of at least one second will unlinked to your memory settings by occur before selecting a new recall. • The seat will return to its previously pressing the “S” button followed by set position when you place the the button on the key fob RKE ignition device into the ACC or RUN transmitter. position. • The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 3.15 in (80 mm) forward of the rear stop. In this position, there would be no benefit
98 Understanding the Vehicle to the driver by moving the seat for Rear Seats Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have Rear seats can fit three passengers. an associated easy entry/exit position. Seats and seat belts are parts of the occupant restraint system of the NOTE: vehicle. The Easy Entry/Exit feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in WARNING! section “Dashboard Instruments and Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in 3 Controls” for further information. a seat and using a seat belt properly. • To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the foot NOTE: of the head restraint on the left side, See chapter “Occupants Restraint and push downward on the head Systems” in section “Before Starting” restraint. for seat belt positioning.
Rear Head Restraints Side seats are endowed with fixed head restraints. The center seat head restraint has two positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the NOTE: center seat the head restraint can be To remove the head restraint of lowered in order to provide the driver central seat see “Cargo Area” in this for maximum visibility. section. • To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint.
99 Understanding the Vehicle
Rear Armrest Rear Side Heated Seats The rear armrest is mobile and can be (optional) folded up into the seat back. The side rear seats can be equipped • To lower it, pull the stripe as with heaters both in seat cushion and indicated. seatback. Rear seats heating can be adjusted by operating control devices on the panel located on the rear side of the central 3 console. The panel also includes command for the rear window sunshade (see “Rear Windows” in section “Before Starting”).
WARNING! • Persons with low skin sensitivity • To close it, pull it upwards then push because of advanced age, chronic it back into its seat. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, On the front part of the armrest there medication, alcohol use, exhaustion are two cupholders (see “Interior or other physical conditions must be Features” in this section). careful when using the seat heater. It Inside the armrest there is a glove or • To close the compartment, lower the cover. may cause irritation even at low document compartment. Pressing the temperatures, especially if used for opening button and lifting the cover long periods of time. of the armrest box you access to an CAUTION! illuminated compartment where you • Do not place anything on the seat The armrest is not designed to support can find on request a 12 V power that insulates against heat, such as a the weight of an adult or a child: outlet and an USB charging port. blanket or cushion. This may cause please use it only to store beverages, the seat heater to overheat. Sitting small objects or documents. in a seat that has been overheated could cause irritation due to the
100 Understanding the Vehicle increased surface temperature of the • The engine must be running for the Power Steering Wheel seat. heated seats to operate. Adjustment The buttons on the panel with the By selecting the HI-level setting, the resistance icon activate the heating on heater will provide a boosted heat This feature allows you to tilt the one or both seats. level during the first four minutes of steering column upward or downward or to lengthen or shorten it in order to • Push the button once to select the operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. adjust the steering wheel to an highest heating level. The upper LED optimized position. located on the side of the icon will By setting the HI-level, the system will illuminate. automatically switch to LO-level after The power tilt/telescoping steering 3 a maximum of 60 minutes of column/wheel switch is located on the • Push the same button a second time continuous operation. The LO-level lower left side of the steering column. to select the lowest level. The lower setting will turn off automatically To adjust the tilt of the steering LED will illuminate. after a maximum of approximately 45 column/wheel, move the switch up or • Push the same button a third time to minutes. down as desired. shut the heating elements OFF. The LED will turn off.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column/wheel, pull the switch toward NOTE: you or push the switch away from you • Once a heat setting is selected, heat as desired. will be felt within two to five minutes.
101 Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: The heated steering wheel can shut off You can use your key fob with RKE early or may not turn on when the transmitter or the memory buttons on steering wheel is already warm. the driver's door trim panel to return The heating steering wheel command the tilt/telescopic steering is in the “Climate” screen of MTC+. See column/wheel to programmed “Air Conditioning Controls” in section positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” this section. for further details. 3 NOTE: The engine must be running for the • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated heated steering wheel to operate. WARNING! steering wheel soft-key a second Do not adjust the steering • Touch the “Climate” softkey located time to turn it off. column/wheel while driving. on the lower part of the MTC+ Adjusting the steering column/wheel display. while driving could cause the driver to WARNING! lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the • When the heating function is in the • Persons with low skin sensitivity steering column/wheel is adjusted off state, soft-key is not highlighted. because of advanced age, chronic before driving your vehicle. Failure to illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, follow this warning may result in medication, alcohol use, exhaustion serious injury or death. or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It Heated Steering Wheel may cause irritation even at low (optional) temperatures, especially if used for The steering wheel contains a heating long periods of time. element inside the rim that helps • Do not place anything on the warm driver’s hands by cold weather. steering wheel that insulates against The heated steering wheel has only heat, such as a blanket or steering one temperature setting. Once turned • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated wheel covers of any type and on, this function will operate for steering wheel soft-key to turn on material. This may cause the steering approximately 58 to 70 minutes before the function. wheel heater to overheat. automatically shutting off.
102 Understanding the Vehicle Adjustable Pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could Rearview Mirrors (if equipped) lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals position External Mirrors while the vehicle is parked. The adjustable pedals system is External mirrors can be adjusted designed to allow greater range of The following messages will be electrically and are equipped with pedals positions enabling driver displayed if the driver is attempting to anti-mist resistors operated by the air comfort with regard to the steering adjust the pedals when the system is conditioning system (see “Air wheel tilt and the seat position. locked out: Conditioning Controls” in section This feature allows the brake and “Dashboard Instruments and accelerator pedals to move toward or • “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable 3 While Reversing”; Controls”). away from the driver’s feet. The mirrors can be closed electrically • or “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable The switch is located on the front side and will yield in both directions in case While Cruise Engaged”. of the driver's seat cushion side shield. of a collision. NOTE: The external mirrors are For vehicles equipped with driver electrochromic, which means, they memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) automatically operate an anti-glare transmitter or the memory buttons on function by gradually shading as the the driver's door trim panel to return light hitting the mirrors increases. the adjustable pedals to programmed The external rear-view electrochromic positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” mirrors work in conjunction with the in section “Understanding the internal rear-view electrochromic mirror. Vehicle” for further information. NOTE: • The mirrors can be adjusted Press the switch downward to move electrically only with the ignition the pedals forward (toward the front CAUTION! device in ACC and RUN position. of the vehicle). Do not place any object under the Lift the switch upward to move the adjustable pedals or obstruct their • When the vehicle is started, the pedals rearward (toward the driver). movements as it may cause damage to indicator light shown in the picture the pedal controls. Pedal movement may will momentarily illuminate in both become limited if there is an obstruction outside rear-view mirrors to let the in the adjustable pedal's path. driver know that the BSA system is WARNING! operational. For more details see Do not adjust the pedals position (Continued) 103 Understanding the Vehicle
(Continued) the adjacent lane and get a partial chapter “Blind Spot Assist” in section overlap with the visible image on the “Driving”. inside rearview mirror. Power mirror preselected positions can be reset by operating the Memory Driver Seat device. Check “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for further information. 3 WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the external side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they The external of the rear-view mirror really are. Relying too much on your support is equipped with LEDs, passenger side convex mirror could lighting up when the turn signals and cause you to collide with another vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. vehicle or object. Use the inside mirror When the surround view camera to judge the size or distance of a system is installed, at the external vehicle seen in the external side bottom side of the rear-view mirror is convex mirror. the side view camera (refer to To adjust a rearview mirror, press “Surround View Camera System either the L (left) or R (right) button to Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (optional)” in section “Before select the mirror that you want to This feature provides automatic Starting”). adjust. The spin button will illuminate external rearview mirrors positioning, indicating the rearview mirror is Mirrors Positioning allowing the driver to view the ground activated and can be adjusted. area behind the front doors. The The power mirror controls are located Press the mirror control switch external mirrors will move slightly on the driver's door trim panel. corresponding to the arrow indicating downward from the current position The power mirror controls consist of the direction of the desired when the shift lever is shifted into mirror select buttons and a four-way movement. reverse. The external mirrors will then mirror control switch. For optimal vision orientate the return to the original position when outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame
104 Understanding the Vehicle the lever is shifted out of the reverse position. Each memory set of the driver's seat (see "Driver Memory CAUTION! Seat" chapter in section Never retract or open the mirrors “Understanding the Vehicle”) manually: it could damage the power corresponds to a mirror tilt position in mechanism. reverse. Internal Rearview Mirror NOTE: The mirrors tilt in reverse can be The position of internal rearview 3 turned on and off using the MTC+ mirror can be manually adjusted, and Press the switch once and the mirrors System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in is endowed with an accident- will fold in; press the switch a second section “Dashboard Instruments and prevention release system operating in time to reset the mirrors to the Controls”. the event of a collision. standard position. Internal rearview mirror is There is a way to make external Folding Mirrors electrochromic: this glare function is mirrors automatically fold/unfold. automatically deactivated in reverse to The switch for the power folding • If the function is available, it need to ensure maximum visibility of obstacles. mirrors is located between the power be activated by MTC+ (refer to mirror switches. “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). • If the mirrors are automatically folded after the last lock action, then they will automatically unfold when the ignition device is set on ACC or RUN position. • If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfolded to reactivate the automatic function.
105 Understanding the Vehicle Lights CAUTION! Light Switch To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning The light switch located on the left solution directly onto the mirror. Apply side of the dashboard is used for the the solution onto a clean cloth and position/DRL lights, headlights, side wipe the mirror clean. marker, license plate lights and rear fog lights operation. 3 “Mirror Dimmer” Feature The regulation devices beside the switch may have a different The auto-dimming feature can be Rotate the light switch to the or disabled or re-enabled by pressing the configuration according to type of headlights installed. It can adjust to the position: the instrument on/off button on the mirror base. cluster will display the related telltale. Disabling this feature will increase the respectively: reflectance of the internal mirror, • the left one: brightness of the increasing visibility at night. instrument cluster lights, doors controls rear lighting, interior and night lighting (see “Interior Lights” in this chapter). • the right one: headlights leveling (see “Headlights Leveling” in this chapter) or brightness tuning of night lighting (see “interior Lights” in this chapter). NOTE: If the headlights or position/DRL lights are on after the ignition switch is placed in OFF position, a buzzer will alert the driver while opening the driver's door.
106 Understanding the Vehicle
Lighting Up External Lights according to the Position of the Lights Switch and Ignition Device, and according to the Engine Status and Twilight Sensor Mode
Ignition Engine Twilight Lights Switch Position Device Status Sensor Position Mode AUTO 0 All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position side marker and (1), side marker and OFF –– license plate lights on license plate lights (3). on. 3 All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position side marker and (1), side marker and ACC Off – license plate lights on license plate lights on (2). (2). All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position side marker and (1), side marker and RUN Off – license plate lights on license plate lights on (2). (2). DRL (1) on. DRL (1) on. DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position lights, side marker (1), side marker and RUN On DAY and license plate license plate lights lights on. on. Low beams, position DRL (1) on. DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position (1), side marker and lights, side marker (1), side marker and RUN On NIGHT license plate lights and license plate license plate lights on. lights on. on. (1) The lighting system uses the same LED for DRL and front position lights with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position lights. (2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery. (3) The lights are powered up for 8 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery.
107 Understanding the Vehicle
Headlights On with Wipers If you turn the headlights off (“0” engine is running and the light switch position) before the ignition, they will is in or “AUTO” position. When this feature is active, the turn off in the normal mode. If a turn signal is activated, the DRL headlights will turn on approximately LED on the same side of the vehicle 10 seconds after activation of the NOTE: switches in position light function for wipers, if the lights switch is placed in • To activate this feature the lights the duration of the turn signal the “AUTO” position. The headlights must be turned off (“0” position) activation. Once the turn signal is will additionally turn off by within 45 seconds of placing the deactivated, the DRL LED will light up deactivation of the wipers if previously ignition switch in the OFF or ACC again. 3 activated with this function. position. NOTE: NOTE: • Once the delay feature is active, any On Canadian vehicles DRL are always The headlights with wipers feature additional shifting of the light switch on. On USA vehicles, the DRL lights can may be turned on and off using the will cancel the feature. be turned on and off using the MTC+ MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ • The headlight delay time is System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section Settings” in section “Dashboard programmable using the MTC+ “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” Instruments and Controls”. System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and for further information. Headlights Time Delay Controls”. • If the low beam bulbs/LEDs are active Bi-Xenon Headlight This safety feature provides headlight due to “Headlights On with Wiper”, The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights illumination for up to 90 seconds then the headlamps delay feature operate with an electric arc saturated (programmable) when leaving your will not be activated when the with Xenon gas under pressure, vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the ignition switch is set in OFF position. instead of the incandescent filament. delay feature, place the ignition switch The light produced is assuredly higher in the OFF or ACC position while the compared to traditional light bulbs, in headlights are still on. Then turn off Daytime Running Lights (DRL) terms of quality (brighter light) as well the headlights within 45 seconds. The lighting system uses the same high as of the span and positioning of the The delay interval begins when the or low intensity headlamps LED, illuminated area. lights switch is turned off (position respectively, for the DRL lights and “0”). If you turn the headlights or front position lights. position lights on, or place the ignition DRL lights will turn on when the switch in RUN, the system will cancel twilight sensor is in “DAY” mode, the WARNING! the delay. If xenon headlamp replacement is
108 Understanding the Vehicle necessary, contact the Authorized equipped with traditional or Xenon Automatic High Beam (for Maserati Dealer only: DANGER - RISK light bulbs. versions/markets, where OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. Other advantages are: provided) • a clearer light beam, with a cold “Full-LED” Headlight with The Automatic High Beam headlight white tonality that allows a better control system provides increased Cornering Function perception of the contrasts thus forward lighting at night by These headlamps combine the making the night vision more automating high beam control cornering function to the “Full-LED” efficient and less tiring; through the use of the forward-facing technology consisting of an additional • a longer duration equivalent at least digital camera located behind the 3 LED module which turns on when two to that of the vehicle; rear-view mirror, which is the same conditions occurs: the driver turns the • a reduced current consumption. one used for example by the Lane steering wheel or the driver activates These features positively affect some Keeping Assist - LKA system on the turn indicator. The cornering vehicle management economy aspects vehicles with ADAS systems. function will illuminate the corner to by eliminating/reducing the light bulb This camera detects the environmental enhance the visibility to the driver as replacements and help limit fuel luminosity, the headlamps of long as speed will be lower than 25 consumption. oncoming vehicles and the tail lamps mph (40 km/h). The picture shows the increased of proceding vehicles in the front brightness of the low beam of area. In these cases, the system standard headlights (A) compared to automatically switches from high those Full-LED (B). beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. Futhermore, the digital camera is able to detect the urban areas and the inhabited centers and to turn off the high beams when driving near of one of them. The properly working for this feature (if all the other conditions are met) is “Full-LED” Technology ensured between 21.7 mph (35 km/h) This technology creates headlights and 155 mph (250 km/h). with a simpler construction and a more compact size compared to those
109 Understanding the Vehicle
Activation Mode NOTE: To activate Automatic High Beam • The function is enabled only if the feature: brightness sensor detects the right • Shift the multifunction lever onward lighting conditions and then switch . the low beam on. • Put the light switch in “AUTO” • Broken, muddy, or obstructed position. headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause • Touch the “Controls” soft-key in the headlights to remain on longer 3 lower part of the MTC+ display. (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto With ADAS and other obstructions on the High Beam Assist" soft-key to turn • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto windshield or camera lens will cause on the feature. High Beam Assist" soft-key a second the system to function improperly. time to turn it off. After these steps, the green indicator Automatic High Beam Failure on the upper right side of the TFT In the event of a failure on high beam display comes on. system, the related amber warning light will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible avoiding to use this system.
Without ADAS
110 Understanding the Vehicle
Fog Lights The rear fog lights switch is built into the lights switch. To activate the rear fog lights, turn the headlight switch to the low beam light or “AUTO” position. Press the lights switch to turn on the rear fog lights. 3 NOTE: The left or right arrow on the The rear fog lights will NOT activate speedometer and tachometer automatically when turning on the instrument cluster respectively, flashes low beam or “AUTO” headlights to show proper operation of the front if previously deactivated by turning and rear turn signal lights. the lights switch off. The rear fog lights will only turn on by operating the switch as previously described. Pressing again the lights switch will deactivate the rear fog lights. Multifunction Lever Turning the lights switch off (position The multifunction lever controls the “0”) will also deactivate the rear fog operation of the turn signals, lights. headlight beam selection, overtaking A dedicated telltale in the instrument lights and windshield wiper and cluster illuminates when the rear fog washer. lights are turned on. The multifunction lever is fitted on the left side of the steering column. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever all the way up or down until the stop triggers.
111 Understanding the Vehicle
High Beams and Flashing You can signal another vehicle with To switch on the high beams with the your headlights by lightly pulling the light switch in headlamp or multifunction lever toward you. This “AUTO” position, shift the will turn on the high beams headlights multifunction lever onward. until the lever is released. The blue telltale will illuminate on the tachometer.
3 To activate lane change function, tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent. The turn signals (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. This function is useful when Flashing occurs also with lights off overtaking or changing lanes. (lights switch in position “0”) if the NOTE: By pulling the lever backward (toward ignition switch is RUN position. • If either light remains on and does the steering wheel) you switch off the not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, high beams and switch on the low CAUTION! beams. check for a defective outside light. If The high beams can only be switched an indicator on the instrument on manually by pushing the cluster fails while moving the lever, multifunction lever forward. then the turn indicator is probably defective. • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instrument cluster and WARNING! a continuous chime will sound if the If the high beams are activated, they vehicle is driven more than 1 mile will turn on automatically every time (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. the low beams are switched on either manually or automatically. We
112 Understanding the Vehicle recommend therefore that you switch The function is enabled only if the NOTE: them off when they are no longer brightness sensor detects the right Broken, muddy, or obstructed necessary and every time the twilight lighting conditions. headlights and taillights of vehicles in sensor deactivates the external lights. To activate this function: the field of view will cause headlights • Shift the multifunction lever onward to remain on longer (closer to the Automatic High Beams (if equipped) . vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other The Automatic High Beam headlight • Put the headlight switch in “AUTO” obstructions on the windshield or control system provides increased position. camera lens will cause the system to forward lighting at night by function improperly. • Enable the “Automatic High Beam” automating high beam control 3 function on MTC+. through the use of the forward digital If the windshield or Automatic High After these steps, the green indicator camera mounted behind the rearview Beam headlight control mirror is on the upper right side of the TFT mirror, which is the same one used replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed display comes on. also by the Lane Departure Warning to ensure proper performance. See (LDW) system. This camera detects your local Authorized Maserati Dealer. vehicle specific light and automatically Interior Lights switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is The interior and exterior approach out of view. Furthermore, the digital lights turn on and off when camera is able to detect the urban entering/exiting the vehicle (see areas and the inhabited centers and to “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section turn off the high beams when driving "Before Starting" for further near of one of them. information). The high beam can be turned back on The brightness of the lights can be if there are all the necessary manually adjusted with the regulator conditions and if the vehicle speed positioned beside the light switch. exceed 21.7 mph (35 km/h). To protect the battery, the interior The “Auto Dim High Beam” feature lights will turn off automatically 10 can be turned on or off using the minutes after the ignition switch has MTC+ System. Refer to “MTC+ been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the Settings” in section "Dashboard interior lights were turned on Instruments and Controls" for further manually or by opening of a door. The information. glove box light, share the same
113 Understanding the Vehicle
characteristics excepting the trunk Interior Lights Regulator downward performing stable and light. (only with Bi-Xenon Headlights) dimmable positions. To adjust interior lights, either turn the NOTE: This regulator switch has 4 different ignition switch out of OFF or rotate • The left regulator operates only with positions: the multifunction lever out of “0” park lights or low beams lights on. Stable position: lower level of position. 0 • The right regulator adjusts the the internal and night (OFF) Courtesy Dimmable Lights headlights leveling: see “Headlights lighting. The following dimmable courtesy Leveling” in this chapter. 1st Dimmable position: allows 3 lights, can be set with the regulation minimum to maximum device: brightness tuning of the • instrument cluster dials and display; instrument cluster dials, • dome light (front/rear); display, control switches and MTC’s backlight, including all • inside door handle LED; displayed messages and night • doors and steering wheel backlight lighting. controls LED; 2nd Stable position: allows • front footrest light; maximum brightness set. • front seats night lighting. 3rd Stable position: allows to switch on the main and The regulation device rotates from reading lights of the front position “0” upward and back dome light.
114 Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Lights Regulators rd Headlights Leveling (only with Full-LED Headlights) 3 Stable position: allows to switch on the main and (only with Bi-Xenon reading lights of the front Headlights) dome light. A correct headlights leveling is crucial for the safety of the vehicle’s NOTE: occupants and of people in the street. Moreover it is included in the road The left regulator operates only with regulation law. park lights or low beams lights on. In order to obtain the best visibility 3 conditions while driving with The right regulator has 2 different headlights on, the headlight beam positions: must be properly leveled. 0 Stable position: night Headlights leveling must be adjusted The regulation devices rotate from (OFF) lighting off. at every change of the weight and position “0” upward and back 1st Dimmable position: allows position of the passengers and/or of downward performing stable and minimum to maximum the load carried. dimmable positions. brightness tuning of the A heavy load will weigh the vehicle The left regulator switch has 4 front dome light LED and the down and, as a consequence, the light different positions: night lighting. beam will be raised. In this case it is important to adjust the beam to a 0 Stable position: lower level correct level using the right regulator (OFF) of the internal lighting. NOTE: located on the side of the light switch. 1st Dimmable position: allows The right regulator is only active if the minimum to maximum switch is in “AUTO” or in low beam brightness tuning of the mode . instrument cluster dials, display, control switches and MTC’s backlight, including all displayed messages and night lighting. 2nd Stable position: allows maximum brightness set.
115 Understanding the Vehicle
switched on manually by pressing the The regulator has 3 different central button. positions: The reading lights are controlled by 0 One or two people on the front the respective side buttons. seats. If they are turned on by pressing the 1 Four or five people in the button, both central and reading lights vehicle. will stay on for about 10 minutes after 2 Four or five people + load in turning the engine off, and will then the trunk. turn off gradually. 3 When the exterior lights are switched During the regulation, the different on, the two night LEDs fitted on the If one or more doors are opened, the positions (0, 1 and 2) are visualized on side of the power buttons on the front and rear dome lights will turn on the TFT display. overhead console will light up to for 27 seconds. If the door is closed facilitate the use of the transmission before this time, the lights will dim lever and the central console. and subsequently switch off after about 3 seconds. NOTE: The dome lights will also turn on by pressing the or button for centralized doors unlock and lock on the key fob RKE transmitter. See “Illuminated Entry/Exit” section “Before Starting” for further Dome Lights information. The front and rear part of the dome, In the event of a collision causing include each a central and two reading automatic interruption of fuel supply, lights. the dome lights switch on The central light automatically turns automatically and remain lit for on when one of the doors is opened approx. 15 minutes. and turns off when the door is closed (timed switching off). The light may be
116 Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: independent of the ignition device on the hazard warning flashers will The controls of the sunroof, of the position. also activate these LEDs. HomeLink and the button to switch Press the button again to turn them off Park Assist system can be found on off. the front dome console. When these lights are on, the direction indicators, the related arrow Cargo Lights indicator on the instrument cluster and the button itself will flash. To illuminate the cargo area there are two lights inside the trunk 3 compartment, one on each side. These lights turn on when trunk lid is opened and turn off when it is closed. The external mirrors are equipped also with approach and courtesy LEDs, lighting up when the vehicle entry/exit lights are activated.
NOTE: When the hazard warning lights are activated, the direction indicator controls are disabled. If trunk lid is left open for a long time, lights will turn off after 30 minutes to Integrated External Rearview save battery charge. Mirror Lights External mirrors are supplied with LED Hazard Warning Flashers turn signals integrated on the support. Press the indicated button on the The LED turn signal indicators flash central console to turn on the hazard simultaneously with the warning flashers. The operation is corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning
117 Understanding the Vehicle Windshield Wipers and setting (see “Rain Sensing Wipers” paragraph in this chapter). Washers CAUTION! • For low speed wiper operation The multifunction lever operates the (stable position "LO"): rotate the end • Turn the windshield wipers off when wipers and washers acting on the of the multifunction control lever driving through an automatic car windshield when the ignition switch is forward to the first trigger after the wash. The windshield wipers may be placed in RUN or ACC position. The intermittent setting. damaged if the wiper control is left multifunction lever is located on the • Rotate to the second trigger after in any position other than “OFF”. 3 left side of the steering column. the intermittent setting for • In cold weather, always turn off the A low fluid level of windshield washers high-speed (stable position HI) wiper wiper switch and allow the wipers to is indicated by the indicator light operation. return to the park position before and by the message on the • Rotate the end of the lever turning off the engine. If the wiper instrument cluster. downward to the “MIST” position to switch is left on and the wipers activate a single wipe cycle. freeze to the windshield, the wiper • The wipers will continue to operate motor may be damaged when the until you release the multifunction vehicle is restarted. lever. • Always remove any buildup of snow • To turn the wipers off rotate the that prevents the windshield wiper lever to “OFF”. blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, the wiper motor may be damaged. To refill the fluid, see “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance Rain Sensing Wipers and Care”. This feature detects moisture on the Windshield Wipers windshield through an internal rearview mirror integrated sensor, • Rotate the end of the multifunction which automatically activates the lever to one of the four settings to relative wipers. activate the automatic intermittent
118 Understanding the Vehicle
Rotate forward the end of the The rain sensing system has protective light switch is placed in “AUTO” multifunction lever to one of four features for the wiper blades and position. In addition, the headlights settings to adjust the detection arms. It will not operate under the switch off when the wipers are turned system. following conditions: off (position “OFF”) if they were First wiper delay position is the least • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit: the previously turned by using this sensitive, and fourth wiper delay rain sensing feature will not operate function. Powering on Headlights with position is the most sensitive. Third when the ignition is in RUN position, wipers can be activated and position should be used for normal the vehicle is stationary and the deactivated with the MTC+ System, rain conditions. see “MTC+ Settings” in section outside temperature is below 32°F 3 The rain sense wipers will (0°C). To resume, set the automatic “Dashboard Instruments and automatically change between an feature on the multifunction lever, Controls” for further information. intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a start the engine and drive or wait Wiper Blade Maintenance fast wipe depending on the amount until the outside temperature rises of detected moisture sensed by a above freezing. When the wiper arms acting on the particular area of the windshield. windshield are in the rest position it is • Wipe Inhibit with Transmission in Place the wiper switch in the “OFF” not possible to check or replace the Neutral Position: the rain sensing position when you do not want to use blades (Service position) as they are feature will not operate when the the automatic intermittent system. folded under the hood. To service the ignition is placed in the RUN The rain sensing feature can be turned blades (see paragraph “Wiper position, the transmission shift lever on and off using the MTC+ System, see Maintenance and Blades is in the N (Neutral) position and the “MTC+ Settings” in section Replacement” in chapter vehicle speed is less than 5 mph “Dashboard Instruments and “Maintenance Procedures” of section (8 km/h). To resume, set the Controls” for further information. “Maintenance and Care”) it is multifunction lever to the automatic necessary to shift the multifunction function or move the shift lever out lever to “OFF” and the ignition switch of N (Neutral). CAUTION! to OFF position. • The rain sensing feature may not Headlights On with Windshield Shift the control lever within 15 function properly by ice or dried salt Wipers seconds to the “MIST” position water on the windshield. (forward rotation of the end of the When activating this function, the • Use on the windshield of RainX® or multifunction control lever) and headlights will light up approximately release. The blades are brought in a products containing wax or silicone 10 seconds after the wipers acting on may reduce rain sensor performance. position enabling to open the wiper the windshield are turned on if the arms and change the blades.
119 Understanding the Vehicle
Windshield Washers during the cold months until the windshield has warmed up. If it has To use the washer on the windshield, not warmed up, the liquid could push the end of the multifunction freeze on the glass and block your lever inward (toward the steering view. column) and hold it as long as washer spray is desired. • Sudden loss of visibility through the If you activate the washer while the windshield could lead to a collision. windshield wiper control is in the You might not see other vehicles or 3 automatic intermittent range, the other obstacles. To avoid sudden wipers will operate for two wipe cycles icing of the windshield during It is possible to use the “MIST” position after releasing the lever and then freezing weather, warm the for a maximum of 3 times within two resume the previously selected windshield with the defroster before minutes, corresponding to different intermittent interval. and during windshield washer use. three blades positions on the If you activate the washer while the windshield. When completed, bring windshield wiper is turned off (“OFF” the ignition switch in RUN: the arms position) the wipers will operate for WARNING! will reposition. If necessary move the three wipe cycles and then turn off. multifunction lever to other required California Proposition 65 operating positions. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon WARNING! monoxide, phthalates and lead, that Operate or service the windshield which are know to the State of wiper blades without deactivating the California to cause cancer and birth wipers (“OFF” position), leaving the defects or other reproductive harm. To ignition switch in RUN can be minimize exposure, avoid breathing dangerous for the operator since the exhaust, do not idle the engine except rain sensor may suddenly activate the as necessary, service your vehicle in a wipers. Always use “Service” position well-ventilated area and wear gloves for any intervention on the windshield or wash your hands frequently when wiper blades. WARNING! • Do not start the windshield washer servicing your vehicle. For more
120 Understanding the Vehicle information go to: Interior Features any other object in the power www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- outlets as this will damage the outlet vehicle Electric Power Outlets and blow the fuse. Damages caused by improper use of the power outlet Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles The vehicle is equipped with four 12 are not covered by the New Vehicle (for version/markets, where provided) Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, Limited Warranty. two available for the front seat To avoid fluid freezing inside at low passengers, one for rear seat external temperatures, the fluid passengers and one fitted in the trunk supply nozzles can be heated by compartment. internal resistors. WARNING! 3 In vehicles equipped with “Smoking To avoid serious injury or death: Kit” the electric power outlet inside • Only devices designed for use in this the cupholder is replaced with a type of outlet should be inserted cigarette lighter. into any 12 Volt outlet. All power outlets are supplied only when the engine is started or the • Replacing the fuses that protect ignition device set to ACC or RUN. power outlets with others of higher Power outlets are protected by a fuse. amperage, there is the risk of fire. Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug • Do not touch with wet hands. into the power outlets to ensure • Close the lids when the plug is not proper operation. Otherwise, check used and while driving the vehicle. the matching fuse integrity, see “Fuse Replacement” in section • If this outlet is mishandled, it may “Maintenance and Care” for further cause an electric shock and failure. information. Power Outlet inside the Cupholder To access the power outlet is inside the CAUTION! cupholder beside the transmission • Do not plug in accessories that lever, press the cover as indicated to exceed the maximum power of 160 open it completely. This operation is Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. not necessary on versions without access cover. Remove the cigarette • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
121 Understanding the Vehicle
lighter (if equipped) and use its socket upon request for rear seat passengers as power outlet. (see “Rear Seats” in this section).
WARNING! High power consumption items plugged into this outlet for long periods may discharge the battery 3 and/or prevent the engine from starting. Version without cover Power Outlets inside the Central Console Power Outlet inside the Trunk To access the power outlet located The power outlet is positioned on the inside the glove box of the central right side of the trunk compartment. console you need to open the half-lids as indicated in the following paragraph.
Cupholders The vehicle is equipped with several Rear Power Outlets cupholders. A 12 V power outlet inside the armrest between the rear seats is available
122 Understanding the Vehicle
CAUTION! • Use light and shatterproof containers. • Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cupholders to prevent damage to the containers. • Do not store hot drinks. 3 Cupholders for Front Passengers The storage and passenger compartment share the same air The front cupholders are located conditioning even though you may beside the transmission lever and exclude the air conditioning of the within the central console. cupholder compartment by moving To access the cupholder, push the the indicated button. cover (if equipped) as shown in the picture and it will open completely.
Version without cover By pressing the indicated button on the central console, the half-lids will rise completely enabling access to the inner compartment where the two cupholders are located. To close one or both of the half-lids, push them down to the locking position.
123 Understanding the Vehicle
Cupholders for Rear Passengers • Before closing the compartment Two cupholders are available in the door, ensure that the drawer is fully front side of the rear seats central back in its seat. armrest.
3 Multimedia Ports and Phone Housing Compartment Multimedia ports and the sliding drawer for the phone are located Versions with cupholder visible inside the dashboard compartment On versions with access covers, press below the climate control panel. To the button as shown in the picture to access this compartment check that access them. cupholder cover (if equipped) is closed, then push the door as indicated in picture: it will open completely. If needed, gently pull out the drawer until it stops at the very first position. In case of emergency pull out the drawer completely.
NOTE: The AUX auxiliary port features: • To prevent damage to the sliding • typical input impedance between mechanism, do not force the drawer AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm; into the extracted position. • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at 1 kHz; • input compatible only with 3.5 mm jack connectors (not included).
124 Understanding the Vehicle
Any player with these characteristics the visor laterally, lower and release it and analogue audio output (headset from its catch as indicated. output type) can be served by the MTC+ System. The system can recognise the connection to a player outlet autonomously, by enabling access to the audio functions connected to this source. This USB input can be used for data exchange and charge of the 3 connected source (refer to the MTC+ iPod® Connection guide for further details). Through this USB input is possible to An iPod® can be connected to the recharge the connected device for system via USB and AUX ports by about an hour from when the ignition means of a special cable (optional). device is turned OFF (“Active The MTC+ will then control the Charging” feature). When this feature following functions: play, pause, fast is enabled, the USB port will be forward, rewind, next track, previous backlight. track, random or repeat mode, In the dashboard compartment of the selection and navigation of central console there is also a SD playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast. memory card input. Once inserted into the slot, to extract it press lightly on the card. CAUTION! ® By lowering the visor you can access Another USB port can be present for Do not leave your USB device, iPod the courtesy mirror with incorporated rear seat passengers, inside the or an external audio source in the light illuminating automatically (with armrest between the rear seats. vehicle for extended periods of time: the ignition switch in RUN) by raising To access the USB port, open the extreme temperatures and humidity the mirror protective cover. outside cover. This USB port allow can occur in the vehicle. Before raising the visor, close the charging the connected source. Sun Visors mirror cover. A paper holder is fitted inside each Sun visors can be folded to the front sun visor. and to the side of the vehicle. To move
125 Understanding the Vehicle
and stops the heating: from this time the cigarette lighter is ready for use.
CAUTION! After use, always make sure that the cigarette lighter is switched off.
3 WARNING! Smoking Kit (optional) • The cigarette lighter reaches high The kit includes a lighter and a temperatures. Handle it carefully and removable ashtray with cover. do not allow children to use it so as The Smoking kit for front seats to avoid risk of fire and injury! passengers is located inside the box • The cigarette lighter may not be beside the transmission lever and can used as a power outlet. be accessed by pressing the cover as indicated. This operation is not Handholds and Cloth Hooks necessary on versions without access cover. Handholds are fitted above the passenger doors. Once grabbed, they Version without cover will lower until the block position. The rear seat passengers can use the When released, a return spring will removable ashtray by inserting it into bring them back to the original the rear doors pocket, while the position. lighter can be inserted into the power outlet (if equipped) inside the armrest between the rear seats. Press the central button to activate the cigarette lighter. After about 20 seconds the button returns automatically to the initial position
126 Understanding the Vehicle
3 Cloth hook is present on each rear The mesh pockets can hold small Wi-fi Connection (optional) handhold. items, maps and magazines. The control unit with router function allows you to access a wi-fi high speed CAUTION! internet connection on board. This Do not put heavy or sharp objects in enables web navigation and the the mesh pockets. possibility to connect several devices at the same time. iPad Holder (Genuine Accessories) WARNING! The Authorized Maserati Dealer can Mobile internet connection is provide you with all information intended for passenger use only. Use Mesh Pockets about the “Maserati iPad Holder” of handheld electronic devices while mounted on the rear of the front Front seats are fitted with mesh driving can cause an accident due to seatbacks, available in the “Genuine distraction, resulting in death or pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, Accessories” range. and accessible by rear passengers. injury. In order to activate the wi-fi control unit, please contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer. As part of the activation process, you’ll need to create a new account by
127 Understanding the Vehicle
accessing the following website of the searching the available wireless new owner will not be able to register manufacturer of the system that Networks from the “Setting” menu. the device if it still appears registered Maserati has chosen for its models: Select the wireless Network linked to in the prior owner's name. If you are a https://signup.autonetmobile.com/. your vehicle and select “Connect” to subsequent owner, the unit could be start the connection. improperly monitored (usage and If the auto-search is active for wireless location), if it is still registered to a CAUTION! Networks, every time the device will prior owner. Refer to an Authorized Maserati be used inside the vehicle or close to it, Dealer to activate the wi-fi control it will connect to the set connection. 3 unit. NOTE: Wi-fi connectivity range is • For futher information about the approximately 100 ft (30 m). In order pairing procedure, refer to the to avoid intrusions, the router is instructions given with your mobile supplied with WEP or WPA2 device. cryptography. • For further information about wi-fi During activation, to be performed by connectivity and the control unit, your dealer, it is recommended to please contact Client Service at enable the security options available 1-800-977.2107 or write to: by selecting the cryptographic version [email protected]. (WPA2 is recommended) and inserting the password. In order to connect to the wi-fi control unit, it will be necessary to insert this password on CAUTION! each device you intend to use. When selling the vehicle, you should After that, complete the contact the above mentioned Client authentication process and enable Service to have your device removed Wireless Security to avoid that from the list of activated devices unauthorized users access the wi-fi. To registered in your name. Do not simply navigate the internet it is now give your control unit password to a necessary to pair the device you intend new owner. To avoid improper to use in the vehicle to the active wi-fi internet access in your name and allow connection; you can do that by new owner registration you must de-register with the service provider. A
128 Understanding the Vehicle Cargo Area Do not exceed the specified Gross The trunk is the most suitable place to Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the load bulky and heavy objects onboard Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), the vehicle. The maximum allowable both front and rear. load on the floor of the trunk is 440 lb WARNING! The GVWR is the total allowable (200 kg). To help protect against personal weight of your vehicle. This includes To load your vehicle properly, store injury, passengers must not be seated driver, passengers, and cargo. heavier items below and be sure you in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo The total load must be limited so that distribute their weight as evenly as space is intended for load carrying you do not exceed the GVWR possible. purposes only, not for passengers, indicated on the label. Stow all loose items securely before 3 who should sit in seats and use seat start driving as they could move belts. Vehicle Loading during the trip. Light objects can be stored in the net Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity pocket on the right side of the trunk WARNING! compartment. The load carrying capacity of your • After loading the vehicle, before To fasten heavy and bulky luggage vehicle is shown on the vehicle driving, adjust the headlight beam inside the compartment a luggage net emission control label positioned on leveling using the specific regulator with hooks anchored to the floor is the rear driver door's ledge. (if available) as described in chapter available upon request. The hooking “Lights” in this section. eyelets of the net are positioned on • Improper weight distribution can the floor and on the rear wall of the have an adverse effect on the way trunk compartment. the vehicle steers, handles and the way the brakes operate. • Never drive with the trunk lid open. Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher The information indicated on the label than the top of the seatback. This concerns passengers and luggage could impair visibility or become loading operations. dangerous in a sudden stop or collision.
129 Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: • Tilt forward the short seatback side. Both seat backs can be reclined • Secure the rear hook of the bag to independently. the eyelet located on the rear wall of the trunk compartment. Folding the Short (40) Seatback Side • Wrap the belt around the seat back The short (40) seatback side fold down of the folded seat and fasten the belt easily by pulling tab between the buckle. seatback and the side bolster. • Tighten the belt as much as necessary 3 to prevent the bag from moving. NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the available “Genuine Accessories” for the trunk compartment.
Loading with Rear Seatbacks Folded Down The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the rear seat provides cargo-carrying Folding the Long (60) Seatback Side versatility. • Press the red button located on the The seatback folded down provides a front of the buckle using the free continuous nearly-flat extension of the latch plate (step 1) and unlatch the load floor able to accommodate large plate from the left-side buckle (step sized equipment and objects (such as 2). the “Maserati Ski and Snowboard Bag”) that may not fit within the normal dimensions of the trunk.
Ski and Snowboard Bag Housing To safely store the Ski and Snowboard Bag:
130 Understanding the Vehicle
avoided that the fully reclined seat back touches the edge of the central console.
3 • Allow the belt to retract completely When the short or both seatbacks are into the retractor seat behind the folded to the upright position, make seatback. sure they are latched by strongly • Unlatch the long (60) seatback side • Accommodate the head restraint in pulling on the top of the seatback by pulling tab between the seatback a safe location. above the seat strap. and the side bolster. NOTE: When the seatback is folded to the WARNING! upright position, reassemble the head Do not leave free the head restraint of restraint of the center seat make sure the center seat in the passenger the seatbelt of the rear central compartment: in the event of an position is in the proper condition for accident it could be dangerous for use. passengers.
• Fully fold down the long seatback. WARNING! • Partially fold down the long • Make sure that the seatback is seatback side and remove the head securely locked into position. If the restraint of the center seat, by seatback is not securely locked into pressing at the same time the push position, the seat will not provide buttons located at the foot of the the proper stability for child seats head restraint. In this way it is (Continued)
131 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) Power Sunroof with and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious Sunshade injury. The sunroof is power controlled and • The cargo area in the rear of the can only be operated with the ignition vehicle with the rear seatbacks in switch in RUN position. the folded down position should not It can slide lengthways and be raised be used as a play area by children at the rear (tilting). when the vehicle is in motion. They By opening the sunroof a front flap 3 could be seriously injured in a rises automatically in order to deviate collision. Children should be seated the air flow. The sunshade can be opened manually. and use proper restraint system. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
WARNING! • Improper use of the sunroof can be dangerous, even if it features a finger-trap prevention system. The power sunroof controls are Before and during the sunroof located between the sun visors on the operation, always make sure that overhead console. passengers are not exposed to the The right two buttons controls the risk of injuries caused by the moving sunroof movement, whereas the left sunroof or by personal objects button controls the lifting of the dragged or hit by the moving sunroof for venting. sunroof. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key fob RKE transmitter in the passenger compartment.
132 Understanding the Vehicle
• In a collision, there is a greater risk • Full or partial manual opening Pinch Protect Override of being thrown from the vehicle if To open the sunroof manually press If any obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) the sunroof is open. Always fasten the right rear button for less than prevents closing the sunroof, press the your seat belt properly and make half second to move step by step right front button and hold for two sure all passengers are properly the sunroof panel. seconds after the reversal occurs. This secured too. allows the sunroof to move toward • Do not allow small children to Venting Sunroof the closed position. operate the sunroof. Never insert Press and release the left button, and NOTE: fingers, other body parts, or any the sunroof will open to the vent object through the roof opening. position. This is called “Express Vent”, Pinch protection is disabled while 3 and will occur regardless of sunroof pressing the right front button. position. During this opening CAUTION! operation, any movement of the Wind Buffeting button will stop the sunroof. • In the event of rain, always close the Wind buffeting can be described as sunroof to prevent water Pinch Protect Feature the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle infiltrations from staining the This feature will detect an obstruction fabric/leather upholstery. may exhibit wind buffeting with the in the opening of the sunroof during windows down, or the sunroof in • Do not open the sunroof if there is express close operation. If an certain open or partially open ice on it: risk of damage. obstruction is detected, the sunroof positions. This is a normal occurrence will automatically retract. If this and can be minimised. If the buffeting Slide Opening Sunroof occurs, remove the obstruction then occurs with the rear windows open, press the right front button and • Full automatic express opening then open the front and rear windows release to express close. Press the right rear button for more together to minimise the buffeting. If than half second and the sunroof NOTE: the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening will open automatically regardless If three consecutive attempts to close to minimise the buffeting. of any previous position. The in express mode the sunroof result in sunroof will open fully and stop pinch protect reversals, the fourth Ignition Off Operation automatically. During this attempt will be manual, with pinch The power sunroof controls will operation, if any sunroof button is protect feature disabled. pressed, the sunroof will stop. remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
133 Understanding the Vehicle in OFF position. Opening either front HomeLink® (optional) door will cancel this feature. The ignition system timing can be set using HomeLink® replaces up to three WARNING! the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” hand-held transmitters operating the • Your motorized door or gate will in section “Dashboard Instruments and automatic devices that open garage open and close while you are Controls”). doors and gates, enable/disable the programming the universal lighting or security systems. The transceiver. Do not program the Sunroof Maintenance HomeLink® unit is powered by your transceiver if people, pets or other Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a vehicle's 12 Volt battery. The objects are in the path of the door or ® 3 soft cloth to clean the glass panel. HomeLink buttons that are located in gate. Only use this transceiver with a the overhead console designate the garage door opener that has a “stop three different HomeLink® channels. and reverse” feature as required by The HomeLink® indicator light is Federal safety standards. This located behind the buttons. includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury NOTE: or death. HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see General Information “Vehicle security alarm” in section “Before Starting”). This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210 (NZLSAHL5C). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
134 Understanding the Vehicle
• This device may not cause harmful exhaust, do not idle the engine except • release the buttons. interference. as necessary, service your vehicle in a NOTE: well-ventilated area and wear gloves • This device must accept any • Erasing the standard codes should or wash your hands frequently when interference that may be received only be performed when servicing your vehicle. For more including interference that may programming HomeLink® for the information go to: cause undesired operation. first time. Do not perform this www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- operation to program additional NOTE: vehicle • The transmitter has been tested and buttons. it complies with FCC and IC rules. Before You Start Programming • If you have any problems, or require 3 Changes or modifications not ® assistance, please call toll-free expressly approved by the party HomeLink 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet responsible for compliance could Be sure that your vehicle is parked at www.HomeLink.com for void the user’s authority to operate outside of the garage before you information or assistance. the device. begin programming. • The term IC before the For more efficient programming and certification/registration number accurate transmission of the only signifies that Industry Canada radio-frequency signal it is technical specifications were met. recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. WARNING! Before starting programming it is California Proposition 65 necessary to erase the standard codes Operating, servicing and maintaining memorized on the HomeLink® device during the production phase. To erase a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle System with Devices Provided can expose you to chemicals including such codes: with Rolling Codes such as, engine exhaust, carbon • place the ignition device in the RUN monoxide, phthalates and lead, that position without starting the engine; Programming the Hand-held which are know to the State of Transmitters • press and hold the two outside California to cause cancer and birth HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until Programming garage door/gate defects or other reproductive harm. To the indicator light starts flashing openers that were manufactured after minimize exposure, avoid breathing (after approximately 20 seconds); 1995.
135 Understanding the Vehicle
These devices can be identified by the NOTE: • Return to the vehicle and press the ® “LEARN” or “TRAIN” setting button The distance necessary between the programmed HomeLink button for located where the hanging antenna is portable hand-held transmitter and two seconds and then release it. attached to the garage door/gate the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends • Repeat this operation a second time. opener. It is NOT the button that is on the system you wish to program. If the garage door opening device normally used to open and close the Probably it will be necessary to try activates, the programming/ door. several times. Upon every attempt, synchronization phase is complete. The name and color of the button may keep the setting position for at least vary by manufacturer. NOTE: 3 15 seconds before trying again. • Place the ignition device to the RUN If the garage door opening device position without starting the engine. Synchronizing the Rolling Codes does not activate, press the button a third time for two seconds and then • Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to At the end of the previously-described release it to complete the 3 inches (5 - 30 cm) away from the programming, if the HomeLink® has programming/synchronization phase. HomeLink® button you wish to been programmed for a rolling code system, it will be necessary to program. • To program the remaining two ® synchronize it to ensure its correct • Simultaneously press the Homelink HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step operation. button you want to program and the for each remaining button. DO NOT hand-held transmitter button. • Locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” erase the channels. ® setting button of the opening motor. • Release immediately the Homelink Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Firmly press it and then release it. On button you want to program. Button • Continue holding the hand-held some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been transmitter button until the indicator there may be a light that blinks previously trained, follow these steps: light starts flashing quickly; then when the garage door opener/device release the button. is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. • Place the ignition device to the RUN The quick flashing light indicates that NOTE: position without starting the engine. the channel with the new frequency • Press and hold the desired You have 30 seconds to initiate the has been acquired and programmed HomeLink® button. next step after the setting button has correctly by the HomeLink® system. been pressed. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps.
136 Understanding the Vehicle
System with Devices Without • Press and hold the programmed Security HomeLink® button. Rolling Code It is advisable to erase all channels If the garage door opener/device Programming the Hand-held before you sell or turn in your vehicle. activates, programming is complete. Transmitters To erase the channels press and hold To program the remaining two the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I Programming garage door openers HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step and III) until the indicator light starts manufactured before 1995. for each remaining button. Do not flashing (after approximately 20 • Turn the ignition device to the RUN erase the channels. seconds). position without starting the engine. ® Reprogramming a Single HomeLink The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 3 • Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to Button is disabled when the vehicle security 3 inches (5 to 30 cm) away from the To reprogram a channel that has been alarm is active (see “Vehicle security HomeLink® button you wish to previously trained, follow these steps: alarm” in section “Before Starting”). program. • Simultaneously press and hold both • Place the ignition device to the RUN Troubleshooting Tips position without starting the engine. buttons until the indicator light If you are having trouble while starts flashing quickly; then release • Press and hold the desired ® ® programming HomeLink , here are both buttons. HomeLink button. some of the most common solutions: The quick flashing light indicates that • Without releasing the button • Replace the battery in the original the channel with the new frequency proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitter. has been acquired and programmed hand-held transmitters” from second correctly by the HomeLink® system. step and follow all remaining steps. • Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the ® NOTE: Using HomeLink training for a rolling code. The distance necessary between the To operate, press and release the • Did you unplug the device for portable hand-held transmitter and programmed HomeLink® button. programming and forgot to plug it ® the HomeLink in the vehicle depends Activation will now occur for the back in? on the system you wish to program. programmed device (i.e., garage door If you have any problems, or require Probably it will be necessary to try opener, gate operator, security system, assistance, please call toll-free several times. Upon every attempt, entry door lock, home/office lighting, 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at keep the setting position for at least etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the www.HomeLink.com for information 15 seconds before trying again. device may also be used at any time. or assistance.
137 Understanding the Vehicle Air Conditioning Distribution
3
138 Understanding the Vehicle
Adjustable and fixed air vents allow • The fixed vents under the dashboard compartment. There are also passengers to achieve the optimal and below the front seats aim to adjustable vents placed at the rear comfort conditions. ventilate the lower part of the end of the central console. These passenger compartment. vents can be adjusted in vertical and Fixed Air Vents horizontal direction, by operating on • The fixed vents, positioned on the the central handle 1, indicated in the upper part of the dashboard, following pictures. The rotor 2, beneath the windshield and above located near each vent, allows to the front part of the front door control the air flow. panels are meant to guarantee the 3 demisting and defrosting of the windshield and the side windows.
Adjustable Air Vents • The adjustable vents are located at the center of the dashboard, to both sides of the MTC+ display, and at the side ends of the dashboard. They have the purpose of ventilating the upper part of the passenger
139 Understanding the Vehicle
3 NOTE: In order not to obstruct the air conditioning inlet, the defrosting or the demisting function of the glass surfaces, avoid covering vents with clothing or other items.
140 4 – Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster ...... 142 Infotainment System ...... 165 Audio Controls ...... 172 Audio System ...... 173 MTC+ “Controls” Screen ...... 174 MTC+ Settings ...... 178 Dashboard Compartment ...... 189 Analog Clock ...... 192 Air Conditioning Controls ...... 193 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel ...... 199
141 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster ensure that the odometer is properly Warning and Indicator Lights reset. on Analog Instruments The instrument cluster is divided into Speedometer and Rev Counter display three main areas displaying the main warning lights (see “Warning Telltales on Speedometer information, signs and text and/or icon and Indicator Lights on Analog The following telltales are displayed messages. Instruments” in this chapter). on the speedometer, and related A Analog speedometer. It indicates The other warning and indicator lights messages are visible for 5 seconds on the vehicle speed. are displayed on the TFT display the central sector of the display, unless together with mode and drive otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display” B Rev Counter. function indicators (see “TFT Display: paragraph in this chapter). C TFT display. In this area the Warning/Indicator Lights of Set odometer display shows the Modes/Functions” in this chapter). total distance covered by the 4 vehicle. NOTE: The image shows the instrument U.S. Federal Regulations requires that cluster before starting the engine. upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. This repair should be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The odometer setting should be maintained following the repair or service. Keep a record of the odometer mileage before any repair or service to
142 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The indicator light will flash at the same frequency of the turn signals The Malfunction Indicator CAUTION! Light (MIL) is part of an and is controlled by the stalk switch onboard diagnostic system • When the ignition switch is in the lever. that monitors engine and RUN position and if the indicator If the vehicle electronics sense that the automatic transmission control light does not switch on or if it vehicle drives for more than 1 mile systems. switches on while driving, contact an (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a Under normal conditions, this Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon continuous sound will alert the driver indicator light should switch on when as possible. to turn the signal off. the ignition switch is in RUN position • Prolonged driving with the MIL on If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate, and switch off soon after the engine is could cause damage to the engine check for a defective exterior light started (the MIL does not shut off control system. It also could affect bulb. immediately). fuel economy and drivability. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light 4 This is a sign of the indicator light MIL is flashing, severe catalytic This warning light is working properly. If the indicator converter damage and power loss connected to the Tire Pressure remains lit or switches on while will soon occur. Immediate service is Monitoring System (TPMS). driving, there is a failure in the fuel required. In addition, the OBDII Under normal conditions, the supply/ignition and emission control system incorporates a diagnostic warning light should illuminate when systems. connector that can be interfaced the ignition switch is in RUN and The failure could cause high exhaust using diagnostic equipment. This should go off once the engine is emissions, loss of performance, poor makes it possible to read the error started. vehicle handling and high codes stored in the control unit, If the warning light remains lit or consumption levels. together with a set of specific illuminates while driving, the pressure Should this occur, proceed with parameters for the engine operation of one or more tires is too low and a caution to your Authorized Maserati diagnostic cycle, for compliance with message will be displayed. Dealer without heavy throttle CARB & EPA OBDII regulations. The TPMS malfunction warning light is application or driving at high speeds. connected to the low tire pressure Obey all applicable local traffic Left Turn Signal Indicator Light monitoring light. regulations. The indicator lights up when When the system detects a The indicator light will go out if the the left turn signals or the malfunction, the monitoring light and problem is no longer present. hazard flashers are turned on. the related message will flash for The error will be registered by the system in any case.
143 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
approximately one minute and then Dealer as soon as possible to restore and the road conditions that caused remain lit. the Anti-Lock brake function. the ESC activation no longer persist. This sequence will continue upon Electronic Stability Control (ESC) subsequent vehicle startups as long as Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF the malfunction lasts. Indicator Light The ESC activation/malfunction When the malfunction warning lights This indicator notifies that the indicator light on the up, the system may not be able to Electronic Stability Control instrument cluster will display detect or signal low tire pressure (ESC) is disabled; the linked when the ignition switch is in correctly. message will be displayed. RUN position. Please refer to “Tire Pressure It should switch off by starting the Telltales on Tachometer Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section engine. “Driving” for further information. Following telltales are displayed on If the light stays on with the engine the tachometer and related messages Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) Light 4 running, there is a malfunction in the are visible for 5 seconds on the central This light, and its related ESC system. sector of the display, unless otherwise message, indicate possible If the light still stays on after several indicated (see “TFT Display” in this malfunctions of the Anti-Lock ignition cycles, and the vehicle has chapter). Brake System (ABS). been driven for several miles at more The light will turn on when the than 30 mph (48 km/h) speed, visit an ignition switch is in RUN position and Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS possible to have the problem light remains lit or turns on while diagnosed and serviced. driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the NOTE: brake system is not functioning and requires service. However, the Each time the ignition switch is in RUN: conventional brake system will • The ESC OFF indicator light and continue to operate normally if the the ESC activation/malfunction warning light is switched off. If indicator light illuminates the ABS light turns on while driving, or temporarily. Start&Stop Active Indicator if it does not switch on when the • When the ESC is functioning, the This telltale indicates that the ignition switch is in RUN position, system will make buzzing or clicking engine has been switched off please visit an Authorized Maserati sounds. This is normal. The sounds automatically by the will stop once ESC becomes inactive Start&Stop system.
144 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
When the engine starts again, the system (ABS) reservoir may have the brake indicator light and the ABS telltale will switch off. occurred. light illuminate. If the telltale during an automatic In all the above situations, a related Immediate repair of the ABS system is engine shutdown (AutoStop) phase message will be displayed. required. starts flashing, it will be necessary to If the light still illuminates when the Functioning of the brake indicator restart the engine normally with the parking brake has been disengaged, light can be checked by turning the ignition device while holding down and the fluid level is at the full mark ignition switch from OFF to RUN the brake pedal. on the master cylinder reservoir, there position. See chapter “Normal Starting of the could be a brake hydraulic system The light should illuminate for Engine” in section “Driving” for malfunction or a problem with the approximately 2 seconds. further information. brake booster detected by the The light should switch off unless the Rear Fog Light Indicator ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light parking brake is engaged or a brake will remain lit until the problem has fault is detected. If the light does not This indicator lights up when been solved. illuminate, have the light system 4 the rear fog lights are If the problem concerns the brake repaired by an Authorized Maserati switched on. booster, the ABS master cylinder will Dealer. High Beam Indicator run when engaging the brake and a The light will also switch on when the This indicator lights up when brake pedal pulsation may be felt parking brake is engaged with the the high beams are switched during each stop of the vehicle. ignition switch in RUN position. on or when blinking. Inefficiency of one of the dual brake This light only indicates the brake is system cycles is indicated by the brake engaged but not the clamping force Brake Indicator Light indicator light, which will turn on of the parking brake to the wheels. This light monitors various when the brake fluid level in the brake functions, including master cylinder has dropped below a brake fluid level, brake pads certain level. WARNING! wear and parking brake The light will remain lit until the Driving a vehicle with the red brake engagement. problem has been solved. light on can be very dangerous and is If the brake light illuminates the If a brake failure occurs, visit an not recommended. Part of the brake parking brake may be engaged, the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as system may have failed, resulting in brake pads have reached wear limit, possible in order to check up the increased braking distances and the the brake fluid level may be low or a brake system. risk of an accident. Have the vehicle problem with the anti-lock brake In the event of an Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both
145 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
(Continued) After the bulb check or while driving, checked as soon as possible at an if a seat belt is unbuckled, together Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! with the acoustic signal the seat belt If the warning light remains ON or if it reminder light will light up and a Air Bag Indicator Light does not illuminate or illuminates message will indicate which belt is not This light will illuminate for a while driving, contact your Authorized fastened. few seconds for a bulb check Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. when the ignition switch is in Right Turn Signal Indicator RUN. If the light does not WARNING! illuminate while starting the engine, This indicator lights up when Maserati urges you to use the seat stays lit, or switches on while driving, the right turn signals or the belts correctly fastened and adjusted have the system checked at an hazard flashers are switched at all times. Correct use of the seat 4 Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as on. belts can help reduce the risk of possible. The indicator will flash at the same serious injury in the event of an In the latter case, the message will frequency of the turn signals and is accident. Do not pass seat belts over remain displayed: to hide it, press the controlled by the turn signal lever. sharp edges: they could tear. Do not ◄ button on the steering wheel right If the vehicle electronics sense that the pin anything to the seat belts. This side. vehicle drives for more than 1 mile could reduce their initial strength and (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a cause them to tear in the event of a continuous sound will advise the driver crash. to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a fast rate, Refer to “Occupants Restraint check for a defective outside indicator Systems” in section “Before Starting” light bulb. for further information. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is in RUN, the seat belt reminder light will light up for a few See “Supplemental Restraint System seconds as a bulb check. (SRS) – Air bags” in section “Before During the bulb check, you will hear Starting” for further information. an acoustic signal if one or both front seat belts are unbuckled.
146 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
TFT Display: Menus and 3 Main menu titles with scroll 15 Low beam headlights/position Settings arrows (the number and the lights. When operating, the TFT Display is main menu title is always visible 16 Speed Warning indicator divided into sectors including menus while scrolling the menu, and for (dynamic text). and sub-menus, running data, the next five seconds). 17 NORMAL, SPORT and I.C.E. warning/indicator lights and messages. 4 Submenu Titles. modes indicator light. The different sectors of the display 5 Position within the submenus layout are rendered in the following 18* Combined telltale of ACC, LKA and scroll arrows (example: 1 of picture. and HAS status. They are 5). There can be maximum 9 displayed in the cluster when displayable submenu positions. one (or more) of these systems is When the number of submenu enabled and a different menu points exceeds 9, the points are from “Drive Assist” is displayed 4 replaced by a numerical value in the main area. within the scroll arrows. 19* CC and ACC status function. 6 Menu Instruction (hideable). 20* Traffic Sign Assist icons: 7 Shift lever positions (P, R, N, D, conditioned and unconditioned M, 1, 2, 3...) and driving modes. speed limit and/or 8 Gear shift indicator light and supplementary signs (time paddles (if equipped). restriction, etc..). See "Traffic 1 Main area. 9 Hard/Soft suspension indicator Sign Assist - TSA" in section 2 Selectable information (data, light. "Driving" for further details. time, outside temperature, 10 Complete Odometer. 21 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) compass, etc.). When setting the failure warning light. 11 Fuel Gauge. “Automatic High Beam Assist” (*) See “TFT Display: Warning/ 12 Engine Temperature Gauge. feature, in the right portion of Indicator Lights of Set Modes/ this area is displayed the 13* Reconfigurable quadrant for red Functions” in this chapter. respective green indicator. telltales. 14* Reconfigurable quadrant for The display background may change amber telltales. according to the type of message displayed.
147 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The screen area in sector 1 (Main Area) sector 20, only the main menu number will be updated and the selected title and the scroll arrows remain displayed will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu in sector 3, left side. Title). Press and release the multifunction switch (►) to enter the information screens or a submenu. Keep the switch (►) depressed for 2 seconds to restore the selected/visualized functions. The selected sub-menu title selected • Blue color: normal conditions. will be displayed in sector 4 (Submenu Title). • Yellow color: low-critical warning. 4 • Red color: high-critical warning. Main and Submenu Within a submenu, press and release the switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow Operate the controls on the right side directions to scroll the menu. of the steering wheel to scroll, modify Press the ◄ button to return to the and program the Main and Submenu. main menu from an item of interest or from an information screen.
When the driver selects a main menu page and the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) feature on "Controls" page of MTC+ is set off (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section), main menu title, its number and the scroll arrows will disappear after two seconds. Press and release the multifunction When driver selects a main menu, if switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow the TSA feature is set on and a sign directions to scroll upwards and and/or a speed limit icon is displayed in downwards the main menu titles.
148 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Main Menu & Submenu Content • Trip B: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed Messages on Main Display Area Overview time, Distance The main display area also displays 1. MAIN MENU 7. START&STOP "pop up" messages. These pop up • View speed in mph or km/h • Messages relating to the Start&Stop messages fall into several categories: 2. VEHICLE INFO function • Five-Second Stored Messages • Tire Pressure 8. AUDIO When the appropriate conditions • Transmission Temperature • Information concerning audio status occur, this type of message appears • Oil Temperature according to current media source, on the main display area for five track and station. seconds and then returns to the • Oil Pressure 9. STORED MESSAGES previous screen. Most of the • Battery Voltage messages of this type are then 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS • Maintenance stored (as long as the condition that • Speed Warning: enables, disables or activated them remains active) and 4 3. DRIVE MODE sets the speed limit represented in can be reviewed from the "Stored • Drive Mode - Torque Distribution (on the dynamic icon on the TFT display AWD version only) - Powertrain Messages" main menu item. • Auto apply Off/On of the Electric status - ESC status - Suspension Example of this message type is the Parking Brake stiffness status one shown in the picture. • Screen Setup 4. Driver Assist (if equipped) – Upper Left • Shows the status of any active driver – Upper Right assist systems: CC, ACC, LKA and – Main Menu: Line 1 HAS. Graphics in the main area of – Main Menu: Line 2 TFT display only refer to ACC, LKA – Main Menu: Line 3 and HAS systems – MPH km/h Display On/Off • LKA (LaneSense) status – Main Menu Navigation 5. FUEL ECONOMY – Outline Coloring • Average, Range, Current gage – Key-On Display – Key-Off Display 6. TRIP • Unstored Messages – Defaults • Trip A: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed This message type is displayed until time, Distance the condition that activated the
149 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
message is cleared (see example in this type of message appears on the the ones referred to the distance yet picture). main display area for five seconds to be traveled will remain on. then returns to the previous screen. NOTE: • Five-Second-displayed Navigation • Popup boxes might take up the space Messages normally used to display main menu When the navigation menu is items and relevant submenus. enabled on the MTC+, information • The distance indicated under the pop-ups will be displayed for 5 road name is expressed in the unit of seconds while changing direction or measure set by the user. approaching a turning point. On highway, the first pop up will be 1. MAIN MENU displayed at 2 miles (3.2 km) from Press and release the multifunction 4 • Unstored Messages with Ignition the turn, on roadway, at 1 mile switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions Switch in RUN (1.6 km). While approaching the turn, further until this menu item is displayed. This message type is displayed until Pressing and releasing the switch (►) the ignition switch is in RUN pop ups will be displayed starting at 437 yd (400 m) from the turning will toggle the unit of measure position. An example of this between mph or km/h. message type is the one shown in point and the countdown to 0 miles. picture.
While getting closer to a turn, the Further to speed, the main area can indicate three lines that can be set to • Five-Second Unstored Messages sections referred to the distance already traveled will switch off while the same options and in the top right When appropriate conditions occur, or top left area. When these three
150 Dashboard Instruments and Controls lines are present and turn-by-turn navigation is on, main menu area will automatically show navigation information. For further details, please refer to MTC+ guide. 2. VEHICLE INFO Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch (►)to access the submenus. • Transmission Temperature NOTE: Press and release the switch in the ▲ Displays the current transmission This strategy is also applicable in the or ▼ arrow directions to scroll temperature level. Transmission Temperature and Oil 4 through the following information • Oil Temperature Pressure information screen. displays pressing and releasing the Displays the current engine oil switch (►) to display the selected temperature level. • Oil Pressure information. Displays the current engine oil • Tire Pressure pressure level. Indicates the pressure of each single • Battery Voltage tire (see example below). Please Displays the current battery voltage. refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring • Maintenance (service) System (TPMS)” in section “Driving” Displays mileage and days for further information. remaining to the execution of scheduled maintenance service.
The gauge fill and telltale (if applicable) are highlighted in red to emphasize that the parameter is at a critical level.
151 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
For any color-coded components, color NOTE: depends on settings of: To set drive parameters according to • ESC: identified by wheel color. own needs and path, refer to chapter • PowerTrain: identified by engine + “Drive Mode” in section “Driving”. transmission unit color. Press and release the ◄ button to • Suspension : identified by the return to the main menu. color of the four shock absorbers. 4. Driver Assist (if equipped) Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until this menu Press and release the ◄ button to item is displayed. return to the main menu. • Active Driver Assist System 4 3. DRIVE MODE The screen graphically shows current Press and release the switch in the ▲ status of driver assist systems: the or ▼ arrow directions until this menu figure shows an example with ACC item is displayed. The screen engaged and HAS set. graphically shows the Drive Mode (Normal, Sport, and I.C.E.) set by the For every drive mode, function (ESC, user through the relevant controls. PowerTrain and Suspension) and color The display main area will show of the components shown are matched vehicle image with parameters and as follows: color-coded components affected by the selected drive mode. The image will show the following parameters: • selected drive mode (in the example shown: I.C.E.); • LKA (LaneSense) Status • torque distribution percentage Vehicle is delivered with LKA in off indicated under the arrow in front of state set on MTC+ system, page the wheels (on AWD version only). "Controls". You can enable LKA in the ”Visual”
152 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
only or “Visual & Haptic” mode by • Current Fuel Economy in mpg (US), continue from the last fuel average turning on the function via MTC+ mpg (UK) or l/100km reading before the reset. system soft-key and by changing Shows the instantaneous fuel your selection in the dedicated economy. During AutoStop stage submenu. The setting chosen will performed by the Start&Stop system latch over key cycles. (see “Normal Starting of the Engine” in section “Driving”), a dash will be displayed instead of the value. • Range in miles or km Shows the range since the last fuel average reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the Press and release the ◄ button to 4 display will read “Reset” or show return to the main menu. dashes for two seconds. 6. TRIP Then, the history information will ▲ NOTE: Press and release the switch in the be erased, and the averaging will or ▼ arrow directions until this menu To set these systems, see chapters continue from the last fuel average item is displayed. “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC”, reading before the reset. "Highway Assist - HAS" and “Lane • Fuel Economy Average in mpg (US), Keeping Assist - LKA” in section mpg (UK) or l/100km “Driving”. Shows the average fuel economy Press and release the ◄ button to since the last reset. return to the main menu. Press the multifunction switch (►) 5. FUEL ECONOMY for 1 second and release it to reset the “Fuel Economy Average”. Press and release the switch in the ▲ When the fuel economy is reset, the or ▼ arrow directions until this menu display will read “Reset” or show item is displayed. dashes for two seconds. The screen will display the following: For each of the “Trip A” and “Trip B” Then, the history information will sub-menus the screen will display the be erased, and the averaging will following:
153 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• “Distance” traveled in miles or km. function, please see paragraph lines of 15 alphanumeric characters. Shows the total covered distance “Automatic Start&Stop System” in Displays Audio Statuses are: since the last reset. “Normal Starting of the Engine” of • AM: Station Number, provided with • “Average” consumption in mpg (US), section “Driving”. one line of info (frequency); mpg (UK) or l/100km. • FM: Frequency, provided with 2 info Shows the average fuel lines; consumption since the last reset. • SXM (SiriusXM Satellite radio): • “Average” speed in MPH or km/h. number and station name, artist, Shows the average speed since the song; last reset. • BTSA Bluetooth: folder, album, artist, • “Elapsed Time” song; 4 Shows the total time of travel since • USB (Audio): USB, album, artist, the last reset in “hours:minutes: current track or, if available, previous seconds.” Elapsed Time will track, current track and next track; 8. AUDIO increment when the ignition switch • USB: folder, previous track, current ▲ is in the RUN or START position. Press and release the switch in the track and next track; or ▼ arrow directions until this menu Press the multifunction switch (►) for • SD Card (Audio): album, artist, item is displayed. 1 second and release to reset “Trip A” previous track, current track and next or “Trip B”. track; “Trip B” is reset after each key on/key • SD Card: folder, previous track, off cycle. current track and next track; Press and release the ◄ button to • AUX: name of source, “Device return to the main menu. Connected” text; 7. START & STOP • No Signal: “No Signal Available” Press and release the switch in the ▲ text; or ▼ arrow directions until this menu • Mute: symbol “Mute”, the lines item is displayed. remain those displayed before the With the ignition device in RUN command “Mute”. The display will show the audio status position, the screen will display the The different reception modes are (source and current audio track) as set status of the function (see example in identified by symbols, shown on the picture). To change the status of the on the MTC+. It is possible to display 5
154 Dashboard Instruments and Controls display above the info lines. The chart indicates their meaning.
BTSA
AM App
FM Press and release the switch in the ▲ Audio mute or ▼ arrow directions to scroll the Press and release the ◄ button to stored messages. 4 AUX return to the main menu. When the number of messages exceeds 9, the submenu points will be 9. STORED MESSAGES replaced by a numerical value Press and release the central switch in indicating the message number. Press SD the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until this and release the switch (►) to view the menu item is displayed. selected message (see example in the The system will either display the picture). number of the stored messages (if any SXM Satellite Radio available) or “No Stored Messages” as shown in picture.
USB
• Many signals • Signal not available Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu.
155 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
10. VEHICLE SETTINGS Press and release the switch (►)to Press and release the switch (►)to With ignition switch in RUN position select “Speed Warning”. select the option. A check mark will and vehicle stopped, press and release remain next to the previously-selected the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow item until a new selection is made. directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch (►)to access the submenus. Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to view the selectable items: • Speed Warning 4 • Electric Parking Brake Press and release the switch (►) once • Screen Setup again to view the related options: “Off” is the default status. A setting saved notification appears as NOTE: a popup for 2 seconds and a white In order to modify the status of electric telltale indicating the set speed limit parking brake, please see chapter will appear on display. “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”. Example: How to modify the “Speed Warning” status NOTE: When the vehicle is in motion (above 5 mph – 8 km/h) this function is available and displayed in the list of Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ “Vehicle Settings” menu. arrow directions to view the selectable Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ options. arrow directions to view the selectable Speed values are in loop, keeping the Then the display will show the last ▲ ▼ items. switch pressed in the or arrow modified item. directions will increase scroll speed.
156 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
When the set speed is exceeded, the main screen shows possible options in • Time driver is alerted by an acoustic signal grey (not activable). • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) and the telltale indicating the speed Operate this function with the vehicle • Range to Empty limit becomes amber. stopped and transmission in P (Park) • Average MPG (or l/100km or km/l) A pop-up message indicating that the position. limit has been exceeded will appear In order to enter a function, press the • Current MPG (or l/100km or km/l) on display. switch (►) as shown in the picture. • Trip A Distance The following directory shows the • Trip B Distance items available in the "Screen Setup" submenu: Upper Left • None • Compass 4 • Outside Temperature (default: Upper Right) • Date • Time The pop-up message and the telltale • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) will be displayed for 5 seconds then Main Menu: Line 1 system will return to the previous • Range to Empty (only displays in Main Menu) screen. • Average MPG (or l/100km or km/l) • None (default status) SCREEN SETUP • Current MPG (or l/100km or km/l) • Compass After having entered the “Vehicle • Trip A Distance • Outside Temperature Settings” menu, press and release the • Trip B Distance • Date switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions Upper Right • Time until this menu item is displayed. (example in picture) • Time/Date Press and release the switch (►)to • None • Range to Empty access the available items for this • Compass submenu. • Average MPG (or l/100km or km/l) • Outside Temperature (default: Upper If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), • Current MPG (or l/100km or km/l) Right) this feature is unavailable and the • Trip A Distance • Date
157 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Trip B Distance Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ Press and release the ◄ button to • Audio arrow directions to view the selectable return to the “Screen Setup” submenu. items (in the example “Time” is “Screen Setup” submenu parameters Main Menu: Line 2 selected). A check mark will remain set by the user as the ones to be (only displays in Main Menu) next to the previously-selected item displayed are also indicated in the top • Same configurable options as Line 1 until a new selection is made. part of the MTC+ (see example in the Main Menu: Line 3 figures). (only displays in Main Menu) • Same configurable options as Line 1 MPH km/h Display (instruction line) •On 4 •Off Main Menu Navigation •On •Off ► Outline Coloring Press and release the switch ( )to •On select an item. The notification of setting saved appears as a popup for 2 •Off seconds, then the display will show the Key-On Display last-modified item. •On •Off Key-Off Display • On: Trip Summary • Off: screen with Maserati logo and trident Defaults As for the instruction line “MPH km/h • Restore Display”, you can either select to • Cancel display it in sector 6 or not (“Off” option). In the latter case, the function
158 Dashboard Instruments and Controls of changing units remains in any case “Key-On Display” and “Key-Off The “Defaults” item of “Screen Setup” active. Display” items allow user to set display submenu allows restoring Maserati If the “Main Navigation Menu” is set during vehicle key-on and off. factory settings. to “On”, navigation information will “Key-On Display” is normally set to be displayed in the main area of the “On”. When entering the vehicle, TFT Display: Warning/Indicator display only if a destination has been after the welcome screen, the display Lights of Set Modes/Functions set on the navigator of the MTC+. If will show the information concerning Display sections indicated in the figure function is set to "Off", the navigation engine starting sequence. While if it is show warning/indicator lights information will not be displayed. set to “Off” (example shown in concerning all selected driving If the “Outline Coloring” is set to figure), the display will show the functions and all set functions/systems. “On”, the TFT side edge of engine information displayed before last The relevant messages will be temperature and fuel gauge indicators vehicle key-off. indicated within the main area for five will change color depending on the seconds, unless otherwise specified. 4 selected Drive Mode: Fault messages will be stored under “Stored messages”. • Sport: green (example shown in picture); Charging System Warning Light • I.C.E.: light blue. This warning light shows the If it is set to "Off", the color/Drive status of the electrical Mode combination is not active and charging system. If the light the edges will remain "Normal" Drive stays on or comes on while Mode color. driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or When engine is started and ignition increase engine speed (if at idle). If device is pressed to stop it, it is the charging system warning light possible to set “Key-Off Display” to remains on, it means that the vehicle obtain the following display settings: is experiencing a problem with the • On: Trip Summary screen (Trip B is charging system. IMMEDIATELY reset after each key-on/key-off contact an Authorized Maserati cycle); Dealer to have the vehicle serviced. • Off: screen with Maserati logo and If jump starting is required, refer to trident. “Jump Start Procedures” in section “In an Emergency”.
159 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Transmission Temperature Warning switches off. If the problem persists, Engine Temperature Warning Light Light contact an Authorized Maserati This warning light notifies This warning light and the Dealer. when the engine is related message indicate that overheated. If the the transmission fluid temperature reaches critical CAUTION! temperature is rising. levels and the gauge displayed in Continuous driving with the If this warning light turns on, safely sector 12 turns red, this warning light transmission temperature warning pull over and stop the vehicle. under the engine temperature gauge light illuminated will eventually cause Then, shift the transmission into P indicator will illuminate in red color severe transmission damage or failure. (Park) and run the engine at idle until combined with the related message on the temperature drops and the light display. When the temperature is reaching the set threshold an acoustic 4 signal will be heard. If the warning light switches on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into N (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature does not return to normal, immediately turn the engine off and contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Check “Engine Overheating” in section “In an Emergency” for more information. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Under normal conditions, the warning light illuminates when the ignition device is turned to RUN and goes off as soon as the engine is started.
160 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
If the warning light stays or turns on The engine oil level must be checked while driving, the engine oil pressure with the dipstick fitted under the is too low. The warning light is hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” WARNING! combined with a displayed message in section “Maintenance and Care”). • If the warning light is accompanied by the message “Catalyst Temp and an acoustic signal that will last 4 Electric Power Steering Failure Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the minutes. In this case, turn the engine Warning Light off immediately and carry out the temperature of the catalytic This warning light, and the necessary checks. converters is too high. The driver related message, illuminate Do not operate the vehicle until the must slow down immediately until when the electric power problem has been corrected. This light the warning light turns off. steering is not operating and does not indicate the oil level. The • If the message “Catalyst Temp Hot needs service. engine oil level must be checked with Stop Safely Wait To Cool” appears If the warning light is on, steering the dipstick located under the hood after decelerating: the temperature assistance may be not available. 4 (see “Maintenance Procedures” in in the catalytic converters has section “Maintenance and Care”). reached a dangerous level and the If the problem persists, contact an catalytic converters could be Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! damaged. Drive slowly to the After battery disconnection event, the Engine Oil Temperature Warning Light nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer. warning light may be on. In this case, • Maserati declines all responsibility This light indicates that the start the engine and perform a for whatever damage deriving from engine oil is overheated. The steering wheel stroke end to end. warning light is combined non-compliance with the above with the related displayed If the problem persists, contact an mentioned warnings. message. In this case, drive carefully Authorized Maserati Dealer. Door Ajar Indicator until the temperature drops back to Catalyst Over Temperature Warning normal level and the light warning Light This indicator illuminates when one or more doors are light turns off. This warning light, and the ajar. The indicator will show If the problem persists, contact an related message, light up if which door is ajar. When one Authorized Maserati Dealer. the engine runs irregularly or more doors are open, a related Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light with consequent high message will be displayed if the temperature in the exhaust system. This warning light and the vehicle is running at a speed of 5 mph related displayed message, (8 km/h) or faster. indicate a low engine oil level.
161 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Trunk Lid and Hood Ajar Indicators or engine stall and your vehicle may Please contact an Authorized Maserati These light indicators will require towing. Dealer to check the system. illuminate to indicate that the Low Fuel Indicator Automatic High Beam Failure Warning Light trunk lid and/or the hood are When the fuel level reaches ajar. approximately 4.2 Gallons (16 This warning light and the When the trunk lid or the litres) this light under the fuel related message illuminate to hood is open, a related gauge indicator will turn on, report a failure of the message will be displayed and remain on until fuel is added automatic high beam besides the light if the vehicle is together with the related message. In headlights. running at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) this condition the color indicating the Contact an Authorized Maserati or faster. quantity of fuel in the tank, inside the Dealer as soon as possible. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator on display, will go from Suspensions Failure Warning Light 4 Indicator white to amber. This warning light and the Refer to “Refueling” in section This indicator light indicates a related message turn on while “Driving” for fuel filling. failure of the Electronic driving if there is a failure of Throttle Control (ETC) system. Windshield Washer Low Fluid the suspension system (only If the indicator turns on while Indicator with optional Skyhook active driving (a torque decrease is possible), This indicator will illuminate suspension). have the system checked by an for 5 seconds to indicate a low Please contact an Authorized Maserati Authorized Maserati Dealer. level of the windshield washer Dealer to check the system. When detecting a failure, the light fluid. A related message will Ice Hazard Indicator indicator will illuminate while the be displayed. When the external engine is running. See “Maintenance Procedures” in temperature falls below 38°F If the indicator remains lit with the section “Maintenance and Care” for (3°C), the temperature value engine running, you can still drive your fluid filling. vehicle. However, contact an blinks for a few seconds, the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as Headlight Aiming System Failure indicator light turns on, a message is possible. Warning Light displayed and an acoustic signal is If the indicator is flashing while the This warning light and the triggered to warn the driver of the risk engine is running, immediate service is related message indicate a of icy roadbed. required. You may experience reduced failure of the automatic Under such conditions, we recommend performance, an elevated/rough idle headlight aiming system. using the I.C.E. drive mode (see
162 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
“Automatic Transmission” in section “Automatic Start&Stop System” in ADAS Status Indicators (if equipped) “Driving”) drive carefully and slow chapter “Normal Starting of the When you are not viewing the down as the grip of the tires may be Engine” of section “Driving” for “Drive Assist” page, the significantly reduced. further information. indicators at the top left-hand The indicator light flashes for 5 Start&Stop Failure Warning Light side of the display indicate seconds and switches off when the status of individual ADAS system or This warning light illuminates temperature reaches 43°F (6°C) or the combination of them (see when there is a failure in the higher. examples). Start&Stop system. Switch the For further details, refer to Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning engine on or off using the Light “Adaptive Cruise Control - normal procedure with the ignition ACC”, “Lane Keeping Assist - This warning light and related device START/STOP and have the LKA” and “Highway Assist - HAS” in message illuminate when vehicle checked at an Authorized section “Driving”. there is an EPB system failure. Maserati Dealer. 4 The failure could also Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Scheduled Maintenance (Service) completely or partially block the (If equipped) Indicator vehicle because the parking brake This warning light informs the This indicator illuminates and could remain on even after it has been driver that Forward Collision a message flashes on the automatically or manually disengaged Warning (FCW) is disabled. If display for approximately 5 though its controls. this light occurs together with seconds after an acoustic If it is still possible to use the vehicle other specific messages, take your signal to indicate that the next (parking brake not engaged) drive to vehicle to an Authorized Maserati scheduled maintenance is due or is the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer for service. This warning light already overdue. Dealer and remember to performing will light even when the activation of Unless reset, the message will each operation/command that the another driver assistance feature or continue to display each time you electric parking brake is not drive mode (such as “ -ESC OFF”) cycle the ignition to the RUN position. functioning. disables the FCW. To turn off the message temporarily, Start&Stop Disable Indicator press and release the ◄ button on the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) This indicator illuminates steering wheel. To reset the service Fault (If equipped) when Start&Stop is turned off indicator system, please visit an This warning light informs through the controls located Authorized Maserati Dealer. that FCW is in fault state. If on the right side of the this occurred together with steering wheel. See paragraph other specific messages, could
163 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
mean that a system fault requiring details, refer to “Drive Mode” in Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Fault servicing at an Authorized Maserati section “Driving”. This warning light on indicates Dealer. It is nevertheless possible to Set Drive Mode Indicator that the LKA system is in fault. drive the vehicle without using this If the warning light and the Drive mode set by the driver function (for further details, refer to relevant message do not go through the controls on “Forward Collision Warning - FCW” in off after a few manoeuvres and central console is displayed section “Driving”). eventually a key cycle, contact an above the transmission lever AWD Failure Warning Light (on AWD Authorized Maserati Dealer. indicator. version only) For further details, refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready This warning light turns on to “Drive Mode” in section or Canceled indicate a fault of the AWD “Driving”. This white warning light system. Contact an Authorized indicates that the ACC is ready 4 Maserati Dealer as soon as Cruise Control (CC) Ready or Canceled to be set (with 3 dashes below) possible, and avoid using the vehicle in and, once it sets, when it is heavy duty conditions. This white light indicator will illuminate when the CC is temporarily canceled (set speed in Set Passive Speed Limit ready to be set (with 3 dashes white below). For further details, refer This indicator light indicates below) and, once it sets, when to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in the passive speed limit set via it is temporarily canceled (set speed in section “Driving”. the controls on the RH side of white below). Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set the steering wheel (for further For further information, check This green warning light with details, refer to “TFT Display: Menus “Electronic Cruise Control” in section below the set speed turns on and Settings” in this chapter). “Driving”. when the ACC is set (for Passive Speed Limit Exceeded Cruise Control (CC) Set further details, refer to This indicator light informs the This green light indicator will “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in driver that the speed limit that illuminate with the set speed section “Driving”) and vehicle will was set has been exceeded. when the CC is set and in keep set speed. driver override. For further Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault (if Stiff Suspension Setting Indicator information, check “Electronic Cruise equipped) This indicator light indicates Control” in section “Driving”. This warning light turns on that the stiff suspensions when ACC is not operating or program (S) is on. For further needs servicing, For further
164 Dashboard Instruments and Controls details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Gear Shift Indicator Light Infotainment System Control - ACC” in section “Driving”. This indicator lights up to The vehicle is equipped with the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) Failure indicate gear shift change in Warning Light order to optimize fuel infotainment Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+) System, an advanced user This warning light and related consumption. See “Drive Mode” in section interface which combines innovative message light on to report a and exclusive technical features failure of the BSA system. “Driving” for further information. integrating entertainment, user As consequence, on vehicles settings, air conditioning, navigation, equipped with ABSA also this latter Service AWD System Message (AWD communication and information will be not working or version only) features within a single system. malfunctioning. The message and the warning light on The MTC+ System features an audio Contact an Authorized Maserati the TFT display will illuminate when system which is acoustically optimized Dealer as soon as possible avoiding to all-wheel drive feature requires for this specific vehicle. 4 use this system. service. For further information refer Headlight On Indicator to “All-Wheel Drive” in section This indicator will illuminate “Driving”. WARNING! when the position lights or The navigation system assists the headlights are turned on. driver while driving, providing advice For further details, see and suggestions, by voice guidance “Lights” in section “Understanding and graphic information, for the best the Vehicle”. route to reach the set destination. The Automatic High Beam On Indicator suggestions provided by the navigation system do not relieve the This indicator turns on when driver from full responsibility for the the “Automatic High Beam” manoeuvres made through traffic feature is set on MTC+ (see while driving, or from compliance “MTC+ Settings” in this with road regulations and other section). provisions regarding road traffic. The person driving the vehicle is always and in any case responsible for safe driving on the road.
165 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The vehicle is provided with a specific After connecting the device, by using add to the owner’s manual, describing the MTC+ display softkeys, knobs on the MTC+ System features and listing the central console and controls at the all warnings and precautions, which steering wheel, user can navigate are essential for a safe use of the through the content of the connected system. Maserati advises you to read device and set its playing mode. this add carefully and thoroughly. Multimedia Navigation Controls on The MTC+ display is positioned in the Central Console central part of the dashboard and the The manual controls located on the manual controls and devices for central console are a further interface connecting external sources are for the driver and nearby passenger, positioned on the central console. that adds to the MTC+ display 4 1 MTC+ touch display. softkeys. Using the manual controls, 2 Ports for SD card, AUX and USB the MTC+ display will work as a (for further details, refer to graphic display of the inputs from the “Interior features” in section controls. “Understanding the Vehicle”). Volume Control 3 “Browse” button . By working this knob in “Radio” or “Media” mode, user can adjust the 4 “Back” button . volume of the radio or audio files, 5 “Enter” button. Manual Controls and Devices from minimum to maximum and vice versa. Turn knob clockwise to increase SD, AUX and USB Ports 6 Volume control. the volume, counter-clockwise to 7 Tune/scroll control. When an SD card is inserted into its decrease it. The volume status will be 8 Slide phone drawer. housing, the MTC+ is able to read it indicated in the top part of the MTC+ and select multimedia files (music and display. 9 Door for access to multimedia images) from the device. ports and phone housing. By using the AUX and USB ports it is possible to connect external devices to the MTC+ (see chapter “Interior features” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”).
166 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
selected, or the favorites when the “Nav (Navigation)” menu is selected. Back button Press this button to go back to previous menu or previous screen. Press this button to shift the navigation one level backwards on MTC+ screen. If it is pressed and held for at least 2 seconds, it brings the cursor back in the lower bar of the Tune/Scroll Control main menus. Main menu bar is set up by Maserati: By working this knob in “Radio” or it can be customized according to Enter Button “Media” mode, user can go through personal requirements, as explained in 4 the radio stations or scroll the tracks To confirm the function or setting “Customizing the Main Menu Bar” in inside connected external devices and highlighted on MTC+ display. this chapter. confirm the selection by pressing enter When in “Radio” mode and the For further information refer to the button. ignition switch in RUN position, you dedicated booklet included in the In any other mode of the MTC+, use can save your preset stations. owner documentation. this knob to scroll the list of available Main Menu Bar on MTC+ 1. “Radio” softkey options or to manage the cursor Display Touch this softkey to enter the movement in the lower bar of the Radio mode. The different tuner main menus. Then press enter button The softkeys located on the lower part modes: FM, AM, SXM and “Aha” to confirm the function or setting of the MTC+ display represent the App (for countries where it is highlighted on MTC+ display. main menu modes/functions, which supported) can be selected by are briefly indicated below. Browse button touching the related softkeys in the After selecting a function, using the Radio mode. tune/scroll knob or softkeys on MTC+ 2. “Media” softkey (if connected) display, press this button to see the Touch this softkey to access media detail of the items/options of the sources such as: USB Device, AUX, selected function. This button is also Bluetooth and SD card as long as used as shortcut to display the phone the requested media is present. book, when the “Phone” menu is
167 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
3. “Controls” softkey Touch one of these soft-key to access Switch off the screen backlight by Touch this soft-key to access the the list of functions that users can set. touching “Screen OFF” softkey in the features of some driver assistance Touchscreen Display Warnings “Controls” screen of MTC+ display. system (ADAS) that can be set up (if equipped). Features can be selected and adjusted or turned on/off by CAUTION! touching the related soft-key (see • Do NOT attach any object to the "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this touchscreen, doing so can result in section). damage to the touchscreen. 4. softkey • Do not press the screen with any Touch this softkey to access hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, Applications / settings screen. jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the 4 touchscreen surface. 5. “Climate” softkey • Do not spray any liquid or caustic Without ADAS Touch this soft-key to access the air chemicals directly on the screen. Use conditioning settings. In this screen a clean and dry micro fiber lens the following controls are also cleaning cloth in order to clean the available: Heated Seats, Heated touchscreen. Steering Wheel and Ventilated • If necessary, use a lint-free cloth Seats. See “Air Conditioning dampened with a cleaning solution, Controls” in this section for further such as isopropyl alcohol, or an details. isopropyl alcohol and water solution 6. “Nav” softkey ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the Touch this softkey to access the solvent manufacturer’s precautions Navigation feature. Refer to the and directions. MTC+ instruction manual for further With ADAS details. Switch OFF Touchscreen Backlight Customizing the Main Menu 7. “Phone” softkey If the screen backlight becomes Bar Touch one of these softkey to access annoying when driving, it is possible to The softkeys for the main functions of the MTC+ Phone feature that can be switch it off. the MTC+ system, indicated at the set or monitored via MTC+. bottom of the MTC+ display, can be
168 Dashboard Instruments and Controls easily customized to suit user's be downloaded on your mobile possibility to make phone calls or send requirements, as follows: device. and receive messages without taking • press button to open your hands off the steering wheel. applications/settings screen; You can also request Google to make any type of research. Android Auto • hold depressed and drag the icon will give an easier access to corresponding to the selected applications and content from the function until it overlaps the one to MTC+ system display. be replaced on the bottom bar. The following tables show the “Screen” and “Audio” source (of projection device or of MTC+
System MTC+ ) when a smartphone is connected, a session is established and These applications use the MTC+ the device (Table A) or the MTC+ 4 display as projector of the functions System (Table B) is performing an available on the connected device. action. “Apple CarPlay” allows the best use of your iPhone® in the car and perfect integration with the MTC + display and with the controls of the car, Once it is set in the menu bar, the new including Siri voice control. You can connection will be immediately make phone calls, access music, send operational. and receive messages, get real-time Use the MTC+ Display as directions on traffic conditions, all Projection Device while staying focused on the road. The “Android Auto” app lets you If your smartphone is properly share information while driving and connected to the vehicle via the USB make it easier to access Google. The port, on the MTC+ screen in place of interface is equipped with Google “Phone” soft-key and in the source list Maps with voice guided navigation, of “Media” screen you can find the traffic information in real time, “Apple CarPlay” (example shown in on-demand access to millions of songs picture) or the “Android Auto” app in Google Play Music. It also offers the soft-key. “Android Auto” app needs to
169 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Table A: device is performing an action
MTC+ System MTC+ : Active Mode Action Radio Media Navigation Phone Voice Rec.
No App active Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: Start Media Player Audio: + Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Audio: MTC+ MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Screen: Screen: Popup to ask 4 Start Navigation Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ which Nav to use Audio: MTC+ + Audio priority + Audio priority + Audio priority
Screen: Start Phone Call
Audio: MTC+
Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: MTC+ Start VR Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio: MTC+
170 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Table B: MTC+ is performing an action
Device : Active Mode
Action MTC+ No App active Media Navigation Phone Voice Rec.
Screen: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Main Audio: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Start Radio Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ + mix Audio: Audio: prompt nav
Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Start Media Player Main Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio: + Audio priority 4
Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Main Popup to ask Start Navigation which Nav to use Audio: Audio: Audio: MTC+ Audio: + Audio priority + Audio priority + Audio priority
Screen: Start Phone Call Audio:
Screen: Screen: Screen: MTC+ Cannot start VR Screen: Start VR Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ during Call Audio: MTC+ Audio: + Audio priority + Audio priority
Start Rear Parking Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Camera Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio:
171 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio Controls By pressing the top of the rocker or turn the tune/scroll bottom knob to switch you can increase the volume tune station. The vehicle is equipped with audio and by pressing the bottom of the controls that allow both driver and rocker switch you can lower it. Press front passenger to operate the audio the center button to mute the volume. system. These controls can be used to The left-hand control functions adjust audio volume, change radio depend on the current source. To station or mode (FM, AM, USB, etc). change source, press the center button. Steering Wheel Audio Controls When in “Radio” mode, pressing the These audio controls are rocker-type top of the switch will “Seek” up for switches with a button in the center the previous listenable station and and are located on the rear side of the pressing the bottom of the switch will 4 steering wheel, right behind the front “Seek” down for the previous For further details, refer to switches. listenable station. “Infotainment System” in this section. When an external source is connected When in App/Settings mode, the to MTC+, a light press on the top of tune/scroll bottom knob and the the switch will play the next track on browse and enter buttons allow the device connected. you to scroll through the menus and Press the bottom of the switch once to change the user’s settings (see “MTC+ go to the beginning of the current Settings” in section “Dashboard track, or to the beginning of the Instruments and Controls”). previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three Press any button to display times, it will play the third one, etc. information on the radio station or track being listened to inside a pop-up Audio Controls on Central for 2 seconds on instrument cluster. Console The right-hand control manages the In “Radio” mode, turn the volume volume. upper knob to set the audio volume,
172 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio System • One 3.5 in (90 mm) diameter Midrange diameter, on the top of The vehicle is equipped with an audio the dashboard. system that offers superior sound • Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter quality, higher sound pressure levels Tweeters, two on the upper edges of and reduced energy consumption. the dashboard and one on each rear The system maximises the amplifier door. and speaker technology delivering • One 12.4 x 7.9 in (315 x 200 mm) substantially higher components and Subwoofer on the rear panel below system efficiency. the rear window. Basic System • 8- channel amplifier in the trunk. The basic sound system features 8 speakers and can develop a sound 4 output of 80 W. The basic system includes: • Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter Woofers, one on each door. • Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeters, two on the upper edges of the dashboard and one on each rear Basic System door. Premium System The vehicle can be equipped with a “Premium” sound system which features 10 speakers and can develop a sound output of 900 W. This system includes: • Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter Woofers, one on each door.
173 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
front door and two on the rear parcel shelf. • Five 1 in (25 mm) Tweeters: one on center dashboard, two on the upper edges of the dashboard and one on each rear door. • 12.4 x 7.9 in (315 x 200 mm) Racetrack Sub Dual VC on the rear parcel shelf. • 16 channel 1280 Watts Class-D amplifier in the trunk. 4
Premium System High Premium System High Premium System . The vehicle can be equipped with a “High Premium” audio system including 15 speakers and 1280 W of sound power, available upon request. The “High Premium” system includes: • Four 6.5 in (165 mm) Woofers: one on each door. • Five 4 in (100 mm) Midranges: one on center dashboard, one on each
174 Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC+ “Controls” Screen NOTE: • For further details refer also to the Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the “Maserati Touch Control Plus lower part of the MTC+ display to turn (MTC+)” guide. on/off some on-board devices and turn • All settings must be edited with on/off and adjust some driver assist ignition device set to RUN position. systems (ADAS). Once you enter the “Controls” screen, • Some of the Customer use the touch soft-keys or turn the programmable features are optional tune/scroll knob to scroll and change or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your feature settings and press the enter With ADAS upper button to confirm the selection. vehicle. Some features can be set only on or Some of these devices or systems are off touching the corresponding optional or for a specific Features Common to All 4 soft-key. The blue colour of the model/version and may not be soft-key outline will confirm the state Configurations available on your vehicle. change. • Glove Box The “Controls” screen is specific to the Other features can have one or more This feature allows you to enter a vehicles that are not equipped with instruction/setting pages that are 4-digit PIN code to lock and unlock driver assistance systems (Without accessed by touching the the glove box in the passenger side ADAS Systems) and for those that corresponding soft-key (example: of the dashboard. have them (With ADAS Systems). "Glove Box"). See "Dashboard Compartments" in The ADAS features have two soft-keys: this section for further details. the first soft-key changes the current • Rear Sunshade setting on or off, the second soft-key on the side shows the current setting. This feature allows you to open and By touching the second soft-key, you close the sunshade on the rear will enter the setting page in which all window. feature options are visible and See "Rear Window" in section adjustable. "Before Starting" for further details. • Start & Stop Off Without ADAS This feature allows you to disable
175 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
the Start & Stop when frequent activated in “Lights” mode, the stops and restarts of the engine may system will only show a warning become annoying. light in the outside mirrors. See "Normal Starting of the Engine" When “Lights + Chime” mode is in section "Driving" for further activated, the system will show a details. warning light in the outside mirrors • Auto High Beam Assist as well as give an audible alert when By selecting this feature, when the the turn signal is on. When “Off” is forward digital camera detect a selected, the system is deactivated. vehicle that precedes in the For description of this system, see direction of travel or in the opposite Without ADAS chapter “Blind Spot Assist - BSA” in direction, adjust the high beam in • Settings section “Driving”. 4 an automatic way not to dazzle. Touch this soft-key you enter the Features specific for Vehicles See "Lights" in section “Settings” page that displays all user with ADAS "Understanding the Vehicle" for - customizable features: see “MTC+ • Lane Keeping Assist further details. Settings” in this section. Activating this feature the LKA • Screen OFF Features Specific for Vehicle system will attempt to keep the This feature allows you to switch off without ADAS vehicle in lane and can apply direct the MTC+ screen backlight if it • Blind Spot Assist input to electric power steering becomes annoying when driving. system to change direction of Activating this feature the BSA and See "Infotainment System" in this vehicle. section for further details. RCP systems assist the driver when changing lanes, overtaking and The current system setting is shown • Outlet when parking, by detecting the in blue on the right side of the LKA Activating this feature an electrical arrival of other vehicles from a side soft-key. power converter allows you to use or rear blind spot. When this Touching this soft-key the set page the 115V AC-150W power outlet happens, a light signal appears in of LKA system will be displayed (see that may be present on some the external rear-view mirror. picture). versions, inside the compartment When Blind Spot Assist (BSA) is between the backrests of the rear selected, the feature can be set to seats. “Off”, “Lights” or “Lights + Chime” (default mode). When this feature is
176 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
soft-key the set page of ABSA driver and may perform braking system will be displayed (see maneuvers. picture). The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the FCW soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of FCW system will be displayed (see picture).
Driver warnings can be only "Visual" or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). 4 System response can be set to Driver warnings can be only "Early", "Medium" (default mode) "Visual", "Visual & Acoustic" and "Late". (default mode) or "Visual & Haptic". System reaction force can be set to System response can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) "Early", "Medium" (default mode) and "High". and "Late". FCW is always active: it is possible to See "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" in System reaction force can be set to set the sensitivity and the aid of the section "Driving" for more details. "Low", "Medium" (default mode) active braking. • Active Blind Spot Assist and "High". FCW sensitivity can be set to Activating this feature the system See "Active Blind Spot Assist - “Near”, to “Medium” or to “Far”. will try to prevent collision between ABSA" in section "Driving" for more The default status of FCW is the host vehicle and potential blind details. “Medium” setting. Setting it to spot collision hazard. System applies • Forward Collision Warning (with “Far” means the system will warn direct input to electric power active braking) you of a possible collision with the steering system to change direction The FCW feature primarily uses the vehicle in front of you when you are of vehicle to avoid collision. front radar and forward looking farther away. This gives you the best The current system setting is shown camera for sensing vehicles ahead, reaction time, though could lead to in blue on the right side of the and will provide warnings to the some more unwanted warnings. ABSA soft-key. Touching this “Medium” gives instead a little less
177 Dashboard Instruments and Controls time for reacting compared to (12 km/h), at which point it will MTC+ Settings “Far”, but at the same time should immediately cancel and return to lead to less not desired warning. the last-viewed screen. Customer Programmable To change the setting for more The feature can be set to “On” or Features dynamic driving, select the “Near” “Off”. See “Surround View Camera The MTC+ System uses a combination setting. This warns you of a possible System (optional)” in section of keys able to access and change the collision when you are much closer “Understanding the Vehicle” for customer programmable features to the vehicle in front of you. further details. present in the “Settings” and FCW with active braking can be set • Traffic Sign Assist “Controls” page (see also “MTC+ to "On" or "Off". By activating this feature, the “Controls” Screen” in this section). • Surround View Camera forward-facing digital camera, with Access programmable features By activating this feature the system the aid of maps on the navigation touching “Settings” soft-key in the 4 uses four cameras to monitor the system, is able to detect certain signs “Controls” screen page, or using area around the vehicle when and speed limits. Those are manual controls on central console transmission lever is shifted to P displayed by the TSA system on the (refer to “Infotainment System” in this (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) instrument cluster display together section). position. with a possible alert when the Turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll When activation occurs by pressing vehicle exceeds the speed limit. through menus and change settings on the “Surround View” button in the MTC+ display, touch the enter upper “Controls” screen or moving the button to confirm the selection. shift lever in R (Reverse) position, the initial view will be the default view (associated with current gear state). Image will be displayed with active guidelines while in that gear as long as vehicle speed remains lower than 8 mph (12 km/h). When vehicle is shifted into a different gear, the image will See "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in remain displayed for 10 seconds, or section "Driving" for further details. vehicle is shifted in P (Park), or until Without ADAS vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
178 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
To make a selection, and enter the desired function, touch the corresponding softkey on the menu (the picture shown is “Engine Off Options”).
With ADAS In this mode the MTC+ System allows NOTE: you to access the following • For further details refer also to the programmable features (some of them 4 “Maserati Touch Control Plus are optional or for a specific (MTC+)” guide. model/version and may not be available on your vehicle): Display, • All settings must be edited with To scroll through the functions, move Units, Voice Commands, Clock, Safety ignition device set to RUN position. the cursor up or down, or touch the & Driving Assistant, Lights, Doors & arrow ▼ or ▲. Once the desired mode Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote To display the programmable features is entered, press and release the Start, Engine Off Options, Audio, menu on MTC+, you can also touch touchscreen area of the setting that Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, soft-key to view all available you wish to modify. The new setting Restore Settings and Clear Personal applications and then select will be highlighted with one or more Data. “Settings”. boxes to indicate status or possible NOTE: variants of the function status. A • Only one touchscreen area/softkey check mark in a box indicates the may be selected at a time. current status of the function. Touch • Menu navigation indications refer to the check mark to cancel, or the the use of softkeys on MTC+ display: empty box to insert the check mark, the same operations can be and change the status of the function. performed using the manual controls on central console.
179 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Display (if equipped). The available languages are specific to the target After pressing the “Display” soft-key markets. the following mode settings will be available. • Touchscreen Beep • Display Mode When in this display, you can turn on or shut off the sound activated When in this display you can select by pressure of a touchscreen one of the auto display settings. To soft-key. change mode status, checkmarked "Night", “Day” or “Auto” cell. • Controls Screen Time-Out Once the procedure is completed (for • Display Brightness with Headlights When this mode is selected, the example, Display mode) touch the On (Night) “Controls” screen will remain displayed for 5 seconds. If this mode 4 back arrow softkey to return to the When in this display, you can select is not selected, the screen will previous menu or touch the upper the brightness with the headlights remain displayed until closed right “X” softkey, to close the settings on. Adjust the brightness from level ▲ ▼ manually. screen. Touching the or softkeys 0 to 10 with the “+” and “–” setting and the cursor on the right side of the soft-keys or by selecting any point screen will allow you to scroll up or on the scale between the “+” and down through the available settings. “–” soft-keys. • Display Brightness with Headlights Off (Day) When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness as previously explained for "Night" setting. • Nav Next Turn Pop-ups in Cluster • Set Language By selecting this feature, the next When in this display, you can select turn direction will appear on the one language for all display instrument cluster along a descriptions, including the trip programmed route until the desired functions and the navigation system destination is reached (see picture).
180 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
selectable units of measure are listed response length, touch the “Brief” below: or “Detailed” softkey. • Distance unit: • Show Command List select from: “mi” or “km”. When this feature is selected, it is • Speed unit: possible to select options during a select from: “mph” or “km/h”. voice control session. Options for available controls are: “Always”, • Consumption unit: “w/Help” or “Never”. select from: “mpg” (US), “mpg” (UK), “l/100km” or “km/l”. Clock • AutoShow Smartphone Display • Capacity unit: Time is always visible on the Upon Connection select from: “gal” (US), “gal” (UK) dashboard analog clock (see “Analog This feature allows to use the MTC+ or “l”. Clock” in this section) and in digital 4 display as a projection device • Pressure unit: format on the instrument cluster and connected via USB port in order to select from: “psi”, “kPa” or “bar”. on the MTC+ display. browse the Apple CarPlay and Android Auto apps. By setting this • Temperature unit: feature, automatic switch from select from: “°F” or “°C”. native screen to projection device • Power unit: will happen every time you connect select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK) or your smartphone. For further details “kW”. refer to the “Maserati Touch • Torque unit: Control Plus (MTC+)” guide. select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm”. Units Voice Commands After pressing the “Units” and then “Custom” softkey on the touchscreen After pressing “Voice” softkey the you may select between “Imperial” following modes will be available. units and “Metric” of measure. Each • Voice Response Length unit of measure can be independently When in this display, you can displayed in the TFT Display and in the change the voice response length navigation system. The following settings. To change the voice
181 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
you can set the hours manually from 1 to 24. To select, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to adjust the hours. • Set Time Minutes With “Sync Time with GPS” feature unchecked and this mode selected, you can set the minutes manually from 0 to 59. To select, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys as done for the hours. With this feature it is possible to view Safety & Driving Assistant • Time Format and set the following modes. Touch this soft-key to set the following 4 When in this mode, you can select • Sync Time with GPS the time format display. To change modes. Time is normally automatically the current setting, touch and • ParkSense (Park Assist) synchronised with the radio signal. It release the “12 Hrs” or “24 Hrs” The park assist system will scan for is also possible to set automatic soft-key. objects behind and in front of the synchronisation mode using GPS • Show Time In Status Bar vehicle when the transmission shift signal instead. This feature will allow you to turn lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle on or shut off the digital clock in the speed is less than 7.5 mph (12 km/h). status bar. The system can be enabled with “Sound” only, “Sound+Display”, or • Set Date in Cluster turned “Off”. See “Park Assist When in this mode, you can set the (optional)” in section “Before date manually in the status bar of Starting” for further information. the MTC+ and on the instrument cluster display. Touch the “+” or “-” • Front Sensors Active in Drive soft-keys to adjust “Day”, “Month” If this feature is active, when driver and “Year”. takes shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking • Set Time Hours sensors are activated. If this feature With “Sync Time with GPS” feature is not active, when driver takes shift unchecked and this mode selected, lever from P (park) or N (Neutral) to
182 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
D (Driver), front parking sensors are • Auto Folding Side Mirrors will automatically activate the NOT activated. By selecting this feature the power windshield wipers if it senses • Front ParkSense Volume external mirrors will automatically moisture on the windshield. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. When this feature is selected, the fold alfter a lock door request, chime volume of front park assist performed by key fob RKE • Hill Start Assist sensors can be set to “Low”, transmitter or by the “Passive This feature allows you to disable “Medium” or “High” level. Entry” system. the HSA system. The feature can be “Medium” is the default setting. Power external mirrors will set to “On” or “Off”. See “Brake The system will retain its last known automatically unfold once the and Stability Control System” in configuration state through ignition ignition device is in ACC or RUN section “Driving” for further details. cycles. position, only if the last fold movement has been automatic. Lights • Rear ParkSense Volume If the mirrors were manually folded Press the “Lights” soft-key to set the 4 When this feature is selected, the by the switch on the driver's door following modes. chime volume of rear park assist panel, before a lock action, they will sensors can be set to “Low”, • Headlight Off Delay need to be manually unfold to “Medium” or “High” level. reactivate the automatic behave. By selecting this feature, the driver “Medium” is the default setting. can choose to have the headlight The system will retain its last known • ParkView Backup Camera Delay off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds configuration state through ignition By selecting this feature, when the when the engine is shut off. To cycles. shift lever is moved out of R change the current headlight off • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Reverse), the rear view image with delay status, touch and release the dynamic grid lines will be displayed “0”, “30”, “60” or “90” soft-key to By selecting this feature the outside for up to 10 seconds after shifting select the desired time range. side-view mirrors will tilt downward unless the forward vehicle speed when the ignition is in RUN position exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), or the and the transmission shift lever is in transmission is shifted into P (Park) R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will or the ignition device is switched to move back to their previous the OFF position. The feature can be position when the transmission is set to “On” or “Off”. shifted out of R (Reverse). The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers By selecting this feature, the system
183 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
“Understanding the Vehicle” for further information. • Headlight Dip - Traffic Changeover (if equipped) By selecting this feature, the headlights will change their light distribution when a left-hand-drive vehicle enter a Country with right-hand-drive system and vice versa. The feature can be set to • Headlight Illumination on Approach “On” or “Off”. • Auto Unlock on Exit By selecting this feature, the driver • Daytime Running Lights (DRL) By selecting this feature, all doors 4 can choose to have the headlight off will unlock when the vehicle is By selecting and check-mark this or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when stopped, the transmission is in P feature, the DRL lights will turn on the doors are unlocked with the key (Park) or N (Neutral) position and whenever the engine running. The fob RKE transmitter. the driver's door is open. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Headlights with Wipers feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Adaptive Front Light (if equipped) By selecting this feature, while the • Flash Lights with Lock By selecting this feature, the system headlight lever is in “AUTO” By selecting this feature, the turn off the beam shaping and position, the headlight will turn on headlights will flash when the doors bending. See “Lights” in section approximately 10 seconds after the are locked or unlocked with the key “Understanding the Vehicle” for wipers are activated. The headlight fob RKE transmitter or when using further details. will also turn off when the wipers the Passive Entry feature. deactivate if they were activated in Doors & Locks • Sound Horn with Lock the current mode. The feature can When this feature is selected, the be set to “On” or “Off”. Press the “Doors & Locks” soft-key to set the following modes. horn will sound when the doors are • Auto High Beams Assist locked with the key fob RKE • Auto Door Locks By selecting this feature, the high transmitter. You can choose from beam headlight will deactivate When this feature is selected, all the following options: “Off” (no automatically under certain doors will automatically lock when sound), “1st Press” (sound on the conditions. See “Lights” in section the vehicle is in motion. The feature first press of the button) and can be set to “On” or “Off”.
184 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
“2nd Press” (sound on the second • with “Passive Entry”, touching the • Power Trunk Lid Alert press of the button). handle more than once will only When this feature is selected, • Sound Horn with Remote Start result in the driver’s door opening. further to turn indicators flashing, When this feature is selected, the If driver door first is selected, once an acoustic warning will also be horn will sound when you use the the driver door is opened, the triggered when opening and closing key fob RKE transmitter to start the interior door lock/unlock switch can the trunk lid. The feature can be set engine. The feature can be set to be used to unlock all doors (or use to “On” or “Off”. “On” or “Off”. See “Remote Start key fob RKE transmitter). • Hands Free Power Trunk Lid System” in section “Before Starting” • Passive Entry To prevent the accidental opening for further details. This feature allows you to lock and of the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free • Remote Unlock Sequence unlock the vehicle door(s) without (optional) with the movement of having to push the key fob RKE the foot, it is possible to disable the By selecting this feature you may set 4 up only the driver's door or all transmitter or buttons. By “Hands Free” function. The feature doors mode will unlock on the first selecting this feature, “Passive can be set to “On” or “Off”. This press of the key fob RKE transmitter Entry” may be set to “On” or “Off”. operation is recommended when button. When “Driver Door” is The default status is “On”. With you have to wash the car (for selected, you must press the key fob “Passive Entry” deactivated, also the further information, refer to RKE transmitter button twice to “Pre-Short Drop” function is “Power Trunk Lid Operation” in unlock also the passenger's doors. disabled (for further information, section “Before Starting”). When unlocking “All Doors” by first refer to “Bodywork Maintenance and Care” in section “Maintenance Auto-On Comfort & Remote press selection mode, all doors will Start unlock on the first press of the key and Care”). fob RKE transmitter button. • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob • Auto-on Driver Comfort System If the vehicle is programmed on “1st This selected mode enables to This feature allows to activate the Press of Key Fob Unlocks”: combine the key fob to personal comfort of the driving seat when starting the engine. • all doors will unlock no matter driver’s position settings. These which “Passive Entry” equipped settings will be implemented when If equipped, the driver’s door handle is grasped; pressing the button on the key heated/vented seat and/or heated • only the driver’s door will unlock fob RKE transmitter with ignition steering wheel will automatically when the driver’s door is grasped; device in RUN position. activate by temperatures below 40°F (4°C). When temperatures are
185 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
above 80°F (26°C) the driver vented cancelled (0 seconds) or reduced to seat will turn on. 60 or 30 seconds. Audio This feature enables to view and set the available audio modes depending on the type of audio system supplied on the car. The following modes refer to the “High Premium” audio system. • Engine Off Power Delay (Power • Balance/Fade duration after engine shutdown) Use this screen to adjust the balance 4 • Remote Start By selecting this feature, the power and fade settings. Touch and drag You can choose from the following window switches, radio, MTC+ the speaker icon, use the arrows to options: “Off”, “Remote Start” Phone System, power sunroof (if adjust, or tap the “C” icon to (activation of this function when equipped), and power outlets will readjust to the centre. you use the key fob RKE transmitter remain active for up to 10 minutes to start the engine) and “All Starts” after turning off the engine. (activation of this function when Opening of one front doors will you start the engine in all modes). cancel this feature. The switch-off delay can be Engine Off Options cancelled (0 seconds) you can choose This feature allows you to set some from 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 functions after turning off the engine. minutes. • Easy Exit Seat • Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected, the By selecting this feature the driver's seat will automatically move headlight will stay lit for up to 90 • Equalizer rearward once the engine is shut off seconds after turning off the Use this screen is used to adjust the for easy exit of the vehicle. The engine. “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. The switch-off delay can be Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting soft-keys or scroll and
186 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
touch the slider in any point on the surround sound mode. Available scale between the “+” and “–” settings: “On” and “Off”. soft-keys.
Phone/Bluetooth Press this soft-key to select and • Clari-Fi connect phones and audio sources. 4 • Speed Adjusted Volume This function improves the audio • Do Not Disturb This feature increases or decreases quality by enhancing digitally Settings available for this feature: volume combined to vehicle speed. compressed source files such as MP3 To change the speed adjusted and AAC files and certain music • Auto Reply volume touch the “Off”, “1”, “2” or tracks played by radio stations. In To change the mode status, touch “3” soft-key. case of high-definition source files the “Text”, “Call” or “Both” like the ones on a CD, Clari-Fi shall soft-key. apply no enhancement. Clari-Fi • Auto Reply Message intervention is completely To change the mode status, touch automatic. The feature can be set the “Custom” or “Default” “On” or “Off”. soft-key. • Customize Auto Reply Message • Auto Play This feature allows you to When a portable device is customise the “Auto Reply connected via USB port to MTC+ Message”. Text messages are system, it plays automatically the limited to 160 characters (key pad songs if this feature is set to "On". is not available while vehicle is it • Surround Sound motion). This feature provides simulated
187 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through an Authorized Maserati Dealer you may consult the list of telephones that are compatible with the MTC+, and their level of compatibility.
SiriusXM Setup After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” • Paired Phones • Paired Audio Sources soft-key the following settings will be By selecting this feature you will be By selecting this feature you will be available. 4 notified which phones are combined notified which audio source are to the Phone/Bluetooth system. combined to the Phone/Bluetooth • Tune Start For each option, you can also add system. “Tune Start” begins playing the one or more devices: for further For each option, you can also add a current song from the beginning information, see the MTC+ guide. device and change the PIN code of when you tune to a music channel, the device you wish to connect. For so you can enjoy the complete song. further information, see the MTC+ “Tune Start” works in the guide. background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will • Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster miss the experience of joining your When this mode is selected a pop-up favorite song with only a few message will appear in case of seconds left to play. incoming call. Information • Channel Skip associated to call in progress are available by entering to the “Audio” SiriusXM can be programmed to menu using the buttons on the designate a group of channels that steering wheel RH side. are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the channels you
188 Dashboard Instruments and Controls would like to skip followed by Restore Settings Dashboard Compartment pressing the arrow ◄ soft-key. When this feature is selected, it will • Subscription Information There are two glove box reset the “Display”, “Clock”, “Audio”, compartments on the dashboard sides SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires a and “Radio Settings” to their default to store small items or documents. user-paid subscription to access settings. In the compartment below the climate these stations. Run this feature and a pop-up will control panel, on the slider drawer It will be necessary to access the appear asking user to confirm default support can be housed the phone, information on the Subscription settings resetting. Select “Yes” to cards or small items. In this Information Screen in order to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the compartment there are also the subscribe. settings are restored, a pop-up multimedia ports (see “Interior Touch the Subscription Info soft key appears confirming that settings have Features” in section “Understanding to access your receiver ID number. been reset to default. the Vehicle” for further information). 4 Write down the SiriusXM ID Clear Personal Data numbers for your radio. To activate SiriusXM service, either call the When this feature is selected, it will WARNING! number listed on the screen or visit remove personal data concerning Do not operate the vehicle with a SiriusXM online at settings and/or options that have been glove compartment lid in the open www.siriusxm.com/subscriptions or modified compared to factory settings position. Cellular phones, music call the number listed. and will also remove from system memory Bluetooth devices and players, and other handheld electronic presets. devices should be stowed while To remove personal information, driving. Use of these devices while select this feature and a pop-up will driving could cause an accident due to appear asking confirmation to delete distraction. all personal data. Select “OK” to clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data have been cleared, a pop up appears CAUTION! confirming that personal data have Do not place objects weighing over been cleared. 22 lb (10 kg) in the glove box compartment.
189 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Glove Box Driver Side Glove Box Passenger Side compartment is closed) moreover, the compartment is also air-conditioned To open the glove box on the driver To open the glove box on the like the rest of the interior. side, pull the handle as indicated. passenger side, pull the handle as The air outlet inside the compartment shown in the picture. is located on the lower right side: it can be opened/closed by turning counterclockwise/clockwise a ring nut placed in correspondence.
4 The compartment is ca. 10-12 in (25-30 cm) deep and is lit by two courtesy The compartment is divided into two lights when open (the light parts: in the lower part you can find automatically switches off when the the Owner’s documentation, while in compartment is closed). the upper part you can fit small items. Lock Feature of Passenger Side Glove Box The glove box in the passenger side is equipped with an opening/closing electric actuator that can be locked and unlocked via a feature of the MTC+, by entering a 4-digit PIN code. It is important to memorize and take note of the PIN. If it is lost, you must contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer that will reset this feature. The compartment is illuminated by a courtesy light when open (the light will automatically switch off when the
190 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE: “Glove Box” lock feature must be activated when the glove box is already closed. If you activated the “Glove Box” lock feature when the glove box is opened, the glove box will not close properly and will not lock
Glove Box Lock • Open “Controls” screen and touch With ADAS NOTE: “Glove Box” soft-key. • To open the screen required to enter • If you do not enter all PIN digits, a the PIN, answer “Yes” to the prompt. prompt will indicate that you should 4 do so. • In case of an incoming call while entering the PIN, the MTC+ system will temporarily stop the release function. As soon as the call is over, the keypad screen will be displayed again so that you can enter the PIN.
• When the next page shown in figure appears, touch “OK”. Without ADAS • Using the keypad, enter the four digits of the PIN and press “OK”. The system prompts you re-enter the PIN code to confirm it.
191 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Analog Clock To adjust the analog clock located on the center of the dashboard above the MTC+ display, use the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section).
Glove box is now locked and the MTC+ Unlock glove box by entering the lock will go back to “Controls” page. code as previously specified. 4 Glove Box Unlock Glove Box Manual Unlock To unlock the glove box which was If battery is dead, it is necessery to locked with the PIN code, touch manually unlock the actuator on the “Controls” soft-key on the status bar LH side of the glove box in order to and then “Glove Box” soft-key to open the glove box that has been The time can be displayed also on the enter this feature. The MTC+ screen locked using the PIN code. MTC+ status bar and on the will display the page on which a To perform this operation you need to instrument cluster display (see “MTC+ message will indicate that system remove the lower dashboard moulding Settings” in this section). operation is reduced and that only to access the actuator unlocking cable. Clock lighting works in the same way “Climate”, “Controls” and “Settings” Considering the complexity of this as instrument and controls features are active. operation, we recommend you to backlighting (refer to “Lights” in contact an Authorized Maserati section “Understanding the Vehicle”). Dealer.
192 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Air Conditioning Controls Dual Zone Climate Controls The vehicle is equipped with an This system can be operated by using automatic dual-zone air conditioning the controls of the automatic climate system that allows to adjust separately control panel on the dashboard, or the air temperature in the left and in the softkeys on the MTC+ display the right zone of the passenger when “Climate” mode is selected. compartment, according to the In the "Climate" screen of the MTC+, requests of the driver and the front the front seats and steering wheel passenger. comfort setting soft-keys may be A humidity sensor, positioned on the present (optional equipments). The “OFF” state of the front seats and When the MTC+ System is in any mode inner surface of the windshield, over other than “Climate” (“Radio”, the rear view mirror, allows the A/C steering wheel comfort setting is shown on their soft-key. “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the driver 4 system to prevent/eliminate fogging and passenger temperature settings of the windshield and side windows. will be indicated on the upper part of The best efficacy in preventing the display. fogging is obtained by selecting the AUTO function, described later. Description of Controls A dual zone solar sensor, positioned All described functions can be set and on the center of the dashboard upper modified using the climate control surface, helps to achieve the best panel or the MTC+ display. comfort in presence of solar radiation.
CAUTION! Front seats and steering wheel To ensure proper functioning of the comfort setting soft-keys are present solar sensor, do not apply adhesive even when the A/C is off (see "Front parking stickers, etc. in the checking Seats" and/or "Steering Wheel area between the solar sensor and the Adjustment" in section windshield. Therefore, keep the "Understanding the Vehicle" for windshield and the solar sensor clean further details). to prevent accumulation of dust or other impurities.
193 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The “OFF” soft-key will illuminate NOTE: when the A/C is on. In “SYNC” mode, this button will also NOTE: automatically and simultaneously adjust the passenger temperature. The Air Conditioning System will not function during Remote Start 4. Passenger temperature control operation if the climate control is left Provides the passenger with in “OFF”. independent temperature control. Push the ▼ softkey for cooler 2. A/C temperature. Push the ▲ softkey for Press to change the current air warmer temperature. The passenger's To adjust driver and passenger side conditioning (A/C) setting; the temperature setting will be displayed temperature and blower speed, indicator illuminates when the “A/C” is on the MTC+ screen between the 4 climate control panel features on. Operating this function will cause softkeys ▲ and ▼. two-function controls that can be the automatic feature to switch into pushed up to increase temperature/ manual mode and the “AUTO” LED on NOTE: speed, or down to decrease them. the button/MTC+ softkey will turn off. Pressing the 4 button while in “SYNC” 1. Climate control on/off 3. Driver temperature control mode will automatically exit “SYNC”. Once you enter the screen “Climate”, Provides the driver with independent press the “ON” soft-key to switch the temperature control. Push the blue ▼ 5. Recirculation climate control on/off. softkey for cooler temperature. Push Press to change the current setting, the red ▲ softkey for warmer the LED indicator on the button/the temperature. The driver's temperature relevant softkey illuminates to indicate setting will be displayed on the MTC+ which recirculation function is between the softkey ▲ and ▼. The activated. For further details, see MTC+ display can also be used to paragraph “Dual zone Climate Control adjust the temperature by pressing Functions” in this chapter. and sliding the bar towards softkey ▲, 6. Blower control to increase temperature, or towards Blower control is used to regulate the softkeys ▼ to decrease it. amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower
194 Dashboard Instruments and Controls will cause automatic mode to switch 8. FAST defrosting/defogging rear windows defroster: to manual. Press the button/MTC+ softkey to • Use care when washing the inside of On the climate control panel, push the switch the airflow setting to the the rear window. Do not use rocker switch up to increase blower windshield and the front side abrasive window cleaners on the speed. Push the rocker switch down to windows to get a quick defrosting/ interior surface of the window. Use a decrease blower speed. Pushing down defogging. The LED on the soft cloth and a mild washing the rocker switch when set blower is button/MTC+ softkey illuminates solution, wiping parallel to the at the first speed, causes the A/C when this feature is activated. heating elements. Labels can be system shutdown (OFF condition). Operating this function will cause the peeled off after soaking with warm On the MTC+ display, touch the small ATC to switch into manual mode: so water. icon of the blower to decrease the the “AUTO” LED/MTC+ softkey will • Do not use scrapers, sharp speed, or the big icon to increase it. turn off; the fifth blower speed will be instruments, or abrasive window Between the two icons, bars will automatically selected, unless the cleaners on the interior surface of appear to show the number of the blower is already set to a higher 4 the window. corresponding selected speed. speed. If this function is turned off the The blower can also be activated/ climate system will return to the • Keep all objects inside the vehicle at regulated by touching the bars previous setting. a safe distance from the window. between the two blower icons. 9. REAR defrosting/defogging 10. Air flow distribution modes 7. AUTO Press the button/MTC+ softkey to The airflow distribution mode can be This function automatically controls turn on the rear window defroster adjusted so air comes from the the interior temperature by adjusting and the heated outside mirrors. A LED dashboard vents, floor vents, the air flow rate and the air indicator/MTC+ softkey will illuminate defog/defrost vents. distribution. Press “AUTO” to switch when the rear window defroster and The display contains the relevant the ATC between manual and the heated outside mirrors are on. softkeys used to set these modes. The automatic mode. The LED on the The rear window defroster and the climate control panel features a button/the “AUTO” softkey heated outside mirrors automatically button : press it several times to illuminates when the “AUTO” turn off after 10 minutes. select and set the required airflow function is activated. See “Automatic distribution mode. Temperature Control (ATC)” in this chapter for more information. CAUTION! Available settings are as follows: Failure to observe the following • “Dashboard” mode cautions may cause damage to the Air flows in from the four adjustable vents of the dashboard
195 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
and the two positioned at the rear climates, to improve comfort and When the “A/C” and “AUTO” are of the central console. Each of these prevent fogging. switched off it is not possible to have vents can be singly adjusted. The air 11. “SYNC” mode air at a lower temperature than the grids or vanes of the vents can be Press the “SYNC” softkey on the MTC+ outside. moved to adjust air flow direction. A to switch the Sync feature on/off. The Recirculation and Air Quality setting wheel, placed near each “SYNC” indicator illuminates when this Sensor (AQS) vent, allows to regulate or close the feature is selected. This function is When outside air contains smoke, air flow. used to synchronize the passenger odours, or high humidity, or if rapid • “Bi-Level” mode temperature setting with the driver cooling is desired, you may wish to Air comes from the dashboard vents, temperature setting. recirculate interior air by pressing the the central console adjustable vents Changing the passenger temperature recirculation control button to activate and the fixed floor vents. A small setting while in “SYNC” will the two different functionalities. 4 portion of the airflow is directed automatically exit this feature. The recirculation function, that allows through the defrost/defog vents. 12. MAX A/C to open/close the A/C air inlet by operating the relevant button on the NOTE: By pressing the “MAX A/C” button/MTC+ softkey, the system climate control panel/MTC+ softkey, is Bi-Level mode is designed to have automatically switches to get the integrated with the Air Quality Sensor. more fresh air out of the dashboard maximum cold air flow. This sensor, positioned upstream of the vents and rear part of the central A/C filter, in front of the air intake of console vents and warmer air from the Dual Zone Climate Control the A/C system, detects the presence of floor vents. Functions polluting substances and submits an electric signal to the A/C control unit, Air Conditioning (A/C) • “Floor” mode that closes the intake of the external The “A/C” button allows to manually Air comes from the floor vents. A air by activating the air recirculation. activate or deactivate the air small portion of the airflow is The recirculation button/MTC+ softkey conditioning system. When the air directed through the defrost/defog can therefore enable three operating conditioning system is turned on, cool vents. modes, switchable in sequence. dehumidified air will flow through the Starting from the outside air • “Mix” mode vents into the cabin. For improved fuel condition, in which the external air is Air comes from the defrost/defog economy, press the “A/C” button to aspirated by the A/C system and vents and from the floor vents. This turn off the air conditioning and treated to be introduced into the mode is recommended for cold manually adjust the blower and passenger compartment, subsequent airflow mode settings.
196 Dashboard Instruments and Controls actuations of the button/MTC+ softkey maximum blower speed and the air change the state as follows. distribution are also selected. • First press: the A/C system activates The blower speed can be adjusted and the recirculation, the LED on the the air distribution can be modified button/MTC+ softkey lights up. The without exiting “MAX A/C”. To exit A/C system will stay this way up to a “MAX A/C” press the relevant softkey new actuation, or until the increased or exit A/C or recirculation. Selecting humidity could lead to windshield , “AUTO”, or “OFF”, will also exit fogging: in this case the recirculation “MAX A/C”. automatically switches to external Automatic Temperature air. Control (ATC) • Second press: the A/C system activates the automatic recirculation Automatic operation 4 control by using the signal • Press the “AUTO” softkey on the A/C transmitted from the AQS. The panel or the softkey button on the symbol ‘’A’’ on the recirculation MTC+ screen. button/MTC+ softkey lights up. • Set the desired temperature • Third press: the A/C system switches adjusting the driver and/or back to external air. passenger temperature hard or soft The next press of the recirculation control buttons. Once the desired button/MTC+ softkey restars the NOTE: temperature is displayed, the system operating cycle just described. • In cold weather, use of recirculation will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. NOTE: mode may lead to window fogging. In this case select the MIX mode • When the system is set up for your To avoid the risk of fogging, the AQS and increase the blower speed comfort level, it is not necessary to is disabled when the external to prevent fogging. change the settings anymore, simply temperature falls below 35 °F (2 °C). allow the system to function MAX A/C automatically. When activating this function, the system switches to exit “AUTO”, enter “A/C” and recirculation. The minimum temperature (LO) in both zones, the
197 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
control. In this case the blower will temperature and humidity, when the operate at a fixed speed until any A/C compressor is switched on (A/C speed change is selected. This allows softkey illuminated on MTC+ display the front occupants to control the or LED on climate control panel A/C volume of air circulated in the vehicle button ON) there may be some cold and cancel the “AUTO” mode. steam at ventilation port outlet: this The user can also select the direction situation is normal and does not of the airflow by selecting one of the indicate air conditioning system available mode settings. A/C operation malfunction. and recirculation control can also be • Automatic Temperature Controls manually selected. (ATC) will automatically adjust the Operating Tips climate control settings to prevent or 4 eliminate window fogging on the • Continuous use of the air front windshield. recirculation in winter, in rainy weather or humid climate is not • Make sure the A/C system air intake recommended because it may cause grille, located under the bonnet window fogging. directly in front of the windshield, is • Interior fogging on the windshield free of obstructions such as leaves or can be quickly removed by fast other objects. Leaves collected in the defrosting/defogging. The “Mix” air intake may reduce airflow, and if • To provide you with maximum mode can be used to maintain a clear they enter the plenum, they could comfort in the Automatic mode, windshield and provide sufficient plug the water drains. In winter during cold start-ups the blower heating. If side window fogging make sure the air intake is clear of speed will remain low until the becomes a problem increase blower ice, slush, and snow. engine warms up. speed. • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the Manual operation NOTE: “Units” customer programmable The system allows manual selection of • Recirculation mode without A/C blower speed, air distribution mode, feature. See “MTC+ Settings” in this should not be used for long periods section. A/C status and recirculation control. of time, as fogging may occur. The blower fan speed can be set to any • Any time you store your vehicle or • If inside the passenger compartment fixed speed by using the blower keep it stationary (i.e., during there are conditions of high
198 Dashboard Instruments and Controls vacation) for two weeks or more, Phone and Voice Controls The voice command communication run the air conditioning system at system is fully integrated with the idle for about five minutes in the on Steering Wheel vehicle's audio system. fresh air by high blower setting. This The commands on the right side of the The volume can be adjusted from the will ensure adequate system steering wheel activate/deactivate the upper knob on the central console lubrication and minimize the phone mode ( ) and the Voice (see “Infotainment System” in this possibility of compressor damage Recognition ( ) controls functions. section or from the steering wheel when the system is started again. radio controls (see “Audio Controls” in this section). A/C Filter The system will automatically mute The climate control system filters the radio when using the phone outside air containing dust, pollen and mode. some odors. Strong odors cannot be When activating the phone mode totally removed by A/C filter at the using voice commands with 4 entrance of the air climate system. See speakerphone, you should talk quietly “Maintenance Procedures” in section in a normal conversational tone by “Maintenance and Care” for filter keeping the driving position and replacement instructions. turning to the microphone of the These functions are only available voice command system located inside when one or more Bluetooth® of the internal rear-view mirror. compatible mobile phones are paired The ability of the system voice control with the MTC+ System connection: to to recognize the user's voice pair a phone and to learn all available commands can be invalidated when functions refer to the MTC+ guide. speaking too quickly or too loudly. NOTE: On the Maserati website, at WARNING! www.maserati.com, or through an Authorized Maserati Dealer you may Any voice-controlled system should be consult the list of telephones that are used only in safe driving conditions compatible with the MTC+, and their following all applicable regulations. level of compatibility. Full attention should be kept on driving.
199 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Phone Mode Voice Commands By using the phone button on the By using voice commands, after steering wheel it is possible to: activate pressing the VR button on the the phone mode, start a call, show steering wheel, it is possible to control recent incoming and outgoing calls, the AM, FM radio, SiriusXM satellite show contacts list, etc. radio and all devices connected and managed by the “Media” mode (i.e SD card, USB/iPod player). When pressing the VR button an acoustic signal will invite to give a When pressing the phone button voice command. an audible sound will invite you to NOTE: 4 impart a command. Information on incoming call is For further details refer to the Maserati indicated in a pop-up on instrument Touch Control Plus (MTC+) guide. cluster display main area if this feature Siri Smart Personal Assistant is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Said When a compatible iPhone or iPad that information will stay displayed until a supports Siri voice recognition is paired control is executed (e.g.: answer, to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, a long reject, etc.) for the incoming call. press of the VR button activates the The screen will only display the phone Siri Smart Personal Assistant. number or name of caller (if available) When you use MTC+ display as as long as this complies with system projection device (mirroring function) specifications in terms of font and a short press is sufficient. number of characters. Siri requires mobile internet access and Call details can be displayed at any its functionality might change time through “Audio” submenu item. depending on the geographical area. All these functions can also be reached “Phone: call details” using the buttons Through simple voice commands, by using the touchscreen commands on steering wheel RH side. On display, without taking your eyes off the road, on the MTC+ display in “Phone” mode. said details shall temporarily replace it may be possible to send messages, the ones on media source in use. make phone calls, create notes and reminders, etc.
200 5 – Driving
Normal Starting of the Engine ...... 202 Automatic Transmission ...... 207 All-Wheel Drive (AWD version only) ...... 213 Drive Mode ...... 213 Parking Brake ...... 224 Parking ...... 227 Brake and Stability Control System ...... 229 Using the Brakes ...... 232 Use of the Engine ...... 233 Electronic Cruise Control ...... 235 Adaptive Cruise Control – ACC (optional) ...... 239 Forward Collision Warning – FCW (optional, with ACC only) ...... 249 Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) ...... 253 Blind Spot Assist (without ACC) ...... 257 Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA (optional, with ACC only) ...... 262 Highway Assist – HAS (optional, with ACC only) ...... 266 Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (optional) ...... 272 Tires - General Information ...... 274 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 280 Fuel Requirements ...... 285 Refueling ...... 287 Driving Conditions ...... 289
201 Driving Normal Starting of the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle Engine CAUTION! When doors are opened, the • Before starting the engine, switch off instrument cluster displays the the electrical devices with a high WARNING! Maserati Logo in the center and the power consumption (air-conditioning It is dangerous to run the engine in an complete odometer plus the open and heating system, heated rear enclosed area. The engine consumes doors indicator in the lower part of window, headlights, etc.). the cluster. oxygen and discharges carbon • Do not start the engine if the fuel dioxide, carbon monoxide and other level in the tank is low. toxic gases in the atmosphere. The keyless ignition allows the driver to operate the ignition switch by pushing the center button, as long as WARNING! the key fob RKE transmitter is within California Proposition 65 the passenger compartment (check 5 Operating, servicing and maintaining “Keys” in section “Before Starting” for a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle further information). can expose you to chemicals including By pressing the brake pedal and such as, engine exhaust, carbon pushing the START/STOP button the Before starting the engine, close the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that engine starts. Instrument cluster doors, adjust your seat, the inside and which are know to the State of displays the initial sequence with outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt California to cause cancer and birth indicator light and analog instruments and instruct all other occupants to defects or other reproductive harm. To test routine and switch-on of the buckle their seat belts. minimize exposure, avoid breathing engine temperature indicators and The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N exhaust, do not idle the engine except fuel level. This happens if option “On” (Neutral) position before you can start as necessary, service your vehicle in a was set in screen settings for display the engine. Apply the brakes before well-ventilated area and wear gloves switch-on (see chapter “Instrument shifting into any driving gear (see or wash your hands frequently when cluster” in section “Dashboard “Automatic Transmission” in this servicing your vehicle. For more Instruments and Controls”). section). information go to:
202 Driving
NOTE: NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a If the ignition switch is left in the ACC warm engine is obtained without or RUN (engine not running) position pumping or pressing the accelerator and the transmission is in P (Park), the pedal. system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the If the driver only pushes the ignition will switch to the OFF START/STOP button but does not press position. the brake pedal, the ignition switch cycles to the ACC position (see “Keys” After starting the engine, the idle in section “Before Starting”) and the speed is controlled automatically and The current display subsequently sets instrument cluster displays the latest will decrease as the engine warms up. up with the latest screenshot. screenshot. At the second press of the Engine Start Failure START/STOP button, the ignition device switches to RUN position (see “Keys” in section “Before Starting”) WARNING! 5 and the instrument cluster displays the • Do not attempt to push or tow your latest screenshot. vehicle to get it started. Vehicles At the third press of the START/STOP equipped with an automatic button the ignition switch returns to transmission cannot be started this OFF position and the display powers way. down. • If the vehicle battery is dead, If the engine fails to start, the starter At the fourth press of the START/STOP booster cables may be used to will disengage automatically after 10 button the screen will display the obtain a start from a booster battery seconds. If you wish to stop the message that invites you to press the or the battery in another vehicle. cranking of the engine prior to brake pedal and push the START/STOP This type of start can be dangerous starting it, press the button again. button to start the engine. if done improperly. See “Auxiliary Jump Start Procedure” in section “In an Emergency” for further information.
203 Driving
Starting with a Cold Engine NOTE: Automatic Start&Stop System Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden If the ignition switch is left in the ACC The Maserati Start&Stop system allows acceleration and rev the engine up at or RUN (engine not running) position the engine to automatically switch off low medium speeds. High- and the transmission is in P (Park), the when the vehicle stops and to restart performance driving should be system will automatically time out when the driver intends to drive. This avoided until the engine temperature after 30 minutes of inactivity and the feature helps reduce fuel reaches 149-158°F (65-70°C). ignition will switch to OFF position. consumption. During the “Stop Engine Turn-Off (AutoStop)” phase the ignition is still Engine Turn Off when in Automatic on and all security features are • With the shift lever in P (Park), D Start&Stop available. (Drive) or R (Reverse) positions (see When the engine has been turned off In order for the Start&Stop to activate, “Automatic Transmission” in this by the Start&Stop system, press and the vehicle must be stationary and the section) and vehicle standstill, press release the START/STOP button. The brake pedal adequately pressed. and release the START/STOP button ignition switch will return to the OFF to switch off the engine. A burst on position and the vehicle is off. NOTE: the accelerator pedal before turning “Panic Stop” Strategy If the brake pedal is not sufficiently 5 off the engine has no purpose and pressed the Start&Stop may not increases fuel consumption. In panic conditions, if driver stops function even if the vehicle is stopped. • If the shift lever is in N (Neutral) and engine in any non-standard manner the START/STOP button is pressed while driving at a speed over 2 mph When the Start&Stop switches off the once, the instrument cluster will (3 km/h), the “Panic Stop” strategy can engine, the related light display a “Vehicle Not in Park” manage the situation by checking illuminates on the instrument message and the engine will remain gearchange condition upon engine cluster. running. cutting, driver’s action on brakes, road As soon as the brake pedal is released, condition (flat or slope) so as to set the engine turns on. gearchange to the most suitable While the vehicle is stopped, the shift lever can be placed in P (Park). WARNING! condition. The “Panic Stop” strategy considers In this case it is possible to release the Never leave a vehicle out of the P that the driver should stop the engine brake pedal and the vehicle will (Park) position, as it could move. by pressing the ignition switch at least remain in “AutoStop” with engine off. 3 times or holding it depressed for at Pressing the brake pedal and shifting least 2 seconds. gear into D (Drive) or R (Reverse) will
204 Driving deactivate the “AutoStop” condition Start&Stop Not Active • When the front and rear “defroster” and restart the engine. For keeping driving safety, interior function is activated. comfort and a correct functioning of • When the engine coolant and the engine and vehicle, the Start&Stop engine oil temperature are not on function does not activate under the proper functioning level. following conditions: • When the external temperature is • When the driver’s seat belt is too cold. unbuckled (see example). • When the battery charge is below safety value. • When the previous stop had just happened (few seconds) and the minimum speed has not yet been Start&Stop Deactivated achieved. Start&Stop function is deactivated • Shortly after R (Reverse) has been set under the following conditions: or when driving under a certain • When SPORT drive mode is activated. speed level. 5 • When (ESC OFF) drive mode is • When the hood is open. activated. • The sensors managing the • If it has been disabled through the • When the driver door is open. Start&Stop have been damaged. main menu item “Start & Stop” via • When the fuel level is too low. • Start&Stop system faults are present. the controls on the right side of the • When the vehicle is stopped on a • When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) steering wheel (see chapter very steep road. and/or Highway Assist (HAS) system “Instrument cluster” in section • When the vehicle is stopped with are engaged. “Dashboard Instruments and steered wheels (over 135° of steering Automatic Restarting of the Engine Controls”) or via the MTC+ in the wheel angle for each part). “Controls” page (see “MTC+ The engine may automatically restart, • When the vehicle is manoeuvring: before the brake pedal has been "Controls" Screen” in section shift lever in R (Reverse). “Dashboard Instruments and released, when one of the following • When the temperature conditions Controls”). conditions occurs: inside the vehicle do not correspond • The SPORT drive mode or drive to the air conditioning setting. mode is being activated.
205 Driving
• If the Start&Stop function has been • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt and the vehicle’s surrounding area. disabled through the main menu and releases the brake pedal. Never leave the vehicle unattended voice “Vehicle Settings” (see chapter • The driver opens the door and with the engine running; doing so “Instrument cluster” in section releases the brake pedal. poses a risk of danger. It is a good “Dashboard Instruments and • The driver unbuckles the seat belt practice to always ensure to set the Controls”). and opens the door. parking brake and place the transmission gear selector lever into • If shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). • The driver opens the hood. the P (Park) position, thereby • If the steering wheel is moved to All the above-mentioned conditions ensuring the vehicle will not move, steer the wheels. deactivate the Start&Stop function when performing any vehicle checks, • When the temperature conditions (the “AutoStart” is deactivated and maintenance and/or service inside the vehicle do not correspond the engine remains off) and the shift procedures on the vehicle. to the air conditioning setting. lever moves automatically in P (Park). • When changing the temperature The telltale will flash to indicate Start&Stop Function Disabling setting on the air conditioning. the Start&Stop function disabling. To restart the engine it is necessary to Under certain driving conditions, when • When the defroster function is being frequent stops and restarts of the activated. press the brake pedal and push the 5 START/STOP button. engine may become annoying, it is • When the battery charge is below Move the shift lever to D (Drive) to possible to disable the Start & Stop safety value. drive away. function. • When the accelerator pedal is being Use the controls located on the right pressed (together with the brake side of the steering wheel (see pedal). instructions in chapter “Instrument WARNING! • If a long time has passed since the Cluster” in section “Dashboard • Even when the vehicle is stopped in last automatic stop of the engine. Instruments and Controls”) and select the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, the “Start & Stop” main menu item which Occupants Safety Function driver is responsible for the vehicle displays the status of the function: To enhance occupants safety, the and the occupants and shall take Start & Stop enabled is the default Start&Stop system monitors if the care of what happens inside and status. driver is present and does not allow outside the vehicle. Hold the switch (►) to change the automatic restarting of the engine if • Even when the vehicle is stopped status of the function. one of the following maneuvers is within the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, When the Start&Stop function is being performed while in “AutoStop” the vehicle driver is responsible for disabled, in addition to the related condition: the vehicle, the vehicle’s occupants message the amber indicator
206 Driving indicated in the picture will turn Automatic Transmission on. The electronic shift lever replaces the conventional mechanical lever and has no mechanical connection to the transmission. The transmission is operated by electrical actuators on the hydraulic system and all commands to the control system are transmitted by the CAN network. The lever itself With ADAS represents a mere user interface. Gear positions are simulated by solenoids • Touch a second time the same inside the lever body, which are soft-key to re-enable the function. Another way to disable the Start & computer-controlled and enable or Stop is via the MTC+. NOTE: disable certain positions of the lever. • Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the The highlighted soft-key indicates the The solenoids inside the shift lever lower part of MTC+ display. disabled status of Start & Stop system prevent the movement of the lever 5 • Touch the “Start & Stop Off” and vice versa. towards invalid positions. soft-key to disable the function. The electronically-controlled Start&Stop System Failure transmission provides a precise shift schedule. When the indicator light and the related message illuminate on the TFT display (see chapter “Instrument CAUTION! Cluster” in section “Dashboard In order to properly use the automatic Instruments and Controls”) there is a transmission, it is essential that you malfunction in the Start&Stop system read through the whole chapter, so and the engine cannot be switched off that you can understand right from and restarted automatically. To switch the start what the correct and off or restart the engine it is necessary permitted operations are. to push the START/STOP. Have the Without ADAS Damage to the transmission may occur vehicle checked at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. (Continued)
207 Driving
(Continued) is running. Before exiting a vehicle, • N (Neutral); if the following precautions are not always apply the electronic parking • D (Drive) automatic forward speed (8 observed: brake, shift the transmission into P speeds); (Park), and turn the engine off. • Shift into P (Park) only after the • -/+ to downshift or upshift when vehicle has come to a complete stop. • When leaving the vehicle, always manual mode in D (Drive) status, or This is the default position of the remove the key fob and lock your set to M (Manual) mode (see “Drive lever and should be used every time vehicle. Mode” in this section). the ignition switch is cycled to OFF. • Do not leave the key fob in or near • Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only the vehicle. after the vehicle has come to a This vehicle is equipped with a feature complete stop and the engine is at which requires the shift lever to be idle speed. placed in P (Park) before the engine • Do not shift between P (Park), R can be turned off. This prevents the (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) driver from inadvertently leaving the when the engine is above idle speed vehicle without having placed the 5 • To effect any change from vehicle transmission in P (Park). This system stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or also locks the shift lever in P (Park) 2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the whenever the ignition switch is in the Transmission status is visible on the brake pedal fully depressed. OFF position. lever and on the lower part of the Instrument cluster display. Automatic Transmission Lever Automatic transmission is operated by WARNING! a selection lever with unlock button • It is dangerous to move the shift located on the central console. lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if By using the selection lever it is the engine speed is higher than idle possible to select the following speed. Only shift into gear when the positions, indicated on the top of the engine is idling normally and when lever: the selected position will your foot is firmly pressing on the illuminate in white light. brake pedal. • P (Park); • As with all vehicles, you should • R (Reverse); never exit a vehicle while the engine
208 Driving
By pressing the release button on the position is indicated beside the lever You must also press the brake pedal to lever, the gear position field is status, on the lower part of the shift the transmission out of P (Park) displayed: if you release the button display. position. without moving the lever, the field Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R disappears after 2 seconds. By (Reverse) should be done only after operating instead the lever, the new the accelerator pedal is released and range will be indicated in the field the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep and in the lower part of the display. your foot pressed on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range. Automatic Transmission Range P (Park) Use this position to park the vehicle. 5 The transmission can be shifted from P (Park) position only with the brake pedal pressed. To move the shift lever from P (Park) position to any other position, the engine must be switched on. The engine can be regularly started in P (Park) range. Never In normal conditions, the shift lever is attempt to use P (Park) while the always unlocked. When in D (Drive) vehicle is in motion. When parking on mode it is possible to upshift or a level surface, you may place the shift downshift the changing gears by lever in the P (Park) position first, and automatically temporarily setting in M then apply the electronic parking If the vehicle is temporarily in the (Manual) mode. brake by pulling the trigger upwards. manual drive mode, D (Drive) status, or in M (Manual) drive mode, the gear
209 Driving
R (Reverse) This range is used to move the vehicle WARNING! backward. • Never use the P (Park) position as a We recommend to shift into R substitute for the electronic parking (Reverse) only after the vehicle has brake. Always apply the parking come to a complete stop. brake fully when parked to prevent vehicle movement and possible • Vehicle halted: switching between P injury or damage. (Park), R (Reverse) and D (Drive) requires pressing the unlock button • Make sure the transmission is in P on the lever and brake pedal: N (Park) before leaving the vehicle. The Instrument cluster will display the (Neutral) is reached only by pressing related indicator light and the the unlock button on the lever. message for 5 seconds. • Vehicle moving: the driver can switch CAUTION! from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral), or • DO NOT race the engine when vice versa, by pressing the unlock shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) button on the shift lever. 5 into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. N (Neutral) • The following indicators should be • Vehicle halted and engine started: used to ensure that you have switching from N (Neutral) to R engaged the shift lever into the P (Reverse), P (Park) and/or D (Drive) (Park) position: requires brake pedal and unlock – when shifting into P (Park), press button pressed. the unlock button on the shift • Vehicle moving: switching from N When parking on a hill, apply the lever and push the lever all the (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D parking brake before placing the shift way forward until it stops. (Drive) requires pressing the unlock lever in P (Park). – with the brake pedal released, button. Switching to R (Reverse) For enhanced security, turn the front verify that P (Park) position is starting from N (Neutral) is only wheels toward the kerb on a downhill illuminated on the shift lever. possible if the vehicle is moving and away from the kerb on an uphill backwards, while switching to D grade. (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is
210 Driving
only possible if the vehicle is moving driving characteristics under all normal the system to enter a temporary forwards. operating conditions of the vehicle. function and enable the manual Set the parking brake and shift the • Vehicle stationary: switching from D shift mode. This range is indicated transmission into P (Park) if you must (Drive) to R (Reverse) and/or to P with the symbols “-/+” on the left leave the vehicle. (Park) requires brake pedal and and right sides of the “D” letter on unlock button pressed: reaching N the gear range field of the display. (Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is The system will then switch back to WARNING! allowed by only pressing the unlock automatic mode according to time Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or button on the shift lever. elapsed in “temporary” mode and driving conditions. never turn off the ignition to coast • To enable special operations while At extremely cold temperatures downhill. These are unsafe practices the car is moving at a low speed, (-23°F/-30°C or below), transmission that limit driver’s response to such as getting out of marsh or may be affected by the low changing traffic or road conditions. snow, it is possible to run quickly temperature of the engine and from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and transmission. Normal operation will vice versa, by pressing the reset resume once the transmission CAUTION! button on the gear shift lever. temperature has risen to a normal 5 Towing the vehicle, coasting, or • Vehicle moving: switching to N level. driving for any other reason with the (Neutral) from D (Drive) requires the transmission in N (Neutral) can result unlock button on the shift lever Transmission Malfunction and in transmission damage. Refer to pressed. Overheating Conditions “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in section • From D (Drive) selected mode it is Transmission Emergency Control 6 for further information. always possible to switch to M Transmission function is electronically (Manual), by pressing the M monitored to detect abnormal D (Drive) (Manual) button: the Led indicator conditions. If a condition that could This range should be used for most beside the button will light up; to result in transmission damage is city and highway driving. It provides return to D (Drive) position, the detected, Transmission Limp Home the smoothest upshifts and downshifts same action should be performed as Mode will be activated. In this and the best fuel economy. The the LED will turn off. situation, the transmission may transmission automatically shifts up • When in D (Drive) mode, moving the operate only in certain gears, or may and down through all gears. The D shift lever forward or backwards to not shift at all. In some situations, the (Drive) position provides optimum the next step without pressing the transmission system may not unlock button on the lever will cause
211 Driving
re-engage if the engine is turned off driving without demanding high NOTE: and restarted. engine performance. If the red Even if the transmission can be reset, A message in the instrument cluster warning light and the related we recommend that you visit an will inform the driver about the more message turns on again, it is advisable Authorized Maserati Dealer at your serious transmission conditions, and to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine earliest possible convenience, which indicate what actions may be and wait for the engine/transmission has diagnostic equipment to necessary. assembly to fully cool down. determine if the problem could recur. Transmission Oil Overtemperature If the instrument cluster message If the transmission oil temperature indicates that the transmission may Transmission Manual Release of exceeds the operating limit, the red not re-engage after engine shutdown, P (Park) Position warning light illuminates on the perform the following procedure See chapter “Transmission Manual instrument cluster. preferably at an Authorized Maserati Release of P (Park) Position” in section Dealer. “In an Emergency”. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the 5 following steps. • Stop the vehicle. • Shift the transmission into P (Park), if possible. • Turn the engine off. • Wait approximately 30 seconds. In this case, slow down until • Restart the engine. temperature returns to normal level • Shift the transmission into D (Drive) (the light will turn off). and then into the desired gear If this is not sufficient, we recommend range. If the problem is no longer to stop the vehicle, shift the lever to detected, the transmission will return position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and to normal operation. keep the engine idle until the temperature red warning light turns off and the message disappears from the display. Resume
212 Driving All-Wheel Drive (AWD version only) WARNING! There may be a slight delay for AWD The active on-demand All-Wheel Drive engagement after a wheel slip (AWD) system provides available condition occurs. optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary. To maximise fuel economy, the AWD . system automatically disangages torque distribution on front axle when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require 5 increased levels of road traction, the NOTE: AWD system automatically distributes If the AWD system service warning the torque between front and rear light and message appears after axle in order to grant the best driving engine start up, or during driving, it experience. Torque distribution is means that the AWD system is not displayed on the TFT in the “Drive functioning properly. If the warning Mode” main menu. Refer to light and message are often activated, paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and it is recommended to have the vehicle Settings” in chapter “Instrument serviced at an Authorized Maserati Cluster” of section “Dashboard Dealer. Instruments and Controls” for further information.
213 Driving Drive Mode • I.C.E: to activate/deactivate the drive “On” (see example in the figure). mode to ensure increased control on Refer to chapter “Instrument Cluster” Controls Preview slippery surfaces as well as higher in section “Dashboard Instruments and energy efficiency. Controls” for further information. Drive modes can be set using the buttons on central console. • SPORT: to activate/deactivate a sportier drive mode. In this mode, the vehicle has a faster throttle CAUTION! response and ESC sport calibration “Normal” is the default drive mode, (not recommended on wet/slippery optimized for the best balance surfaces). Activating this drive mode, between performance, fuel will also change the EPS setting. consumption and emissions in the • (Suspension): to switch between standard conditions use of the car. the two Sport suspensions setting modes: Sport-Normal (S, LED light off) and Sport-Firm (H, LED light on) Setting the Drive Mode (for versions/markets where 5 provided). Activating this drive Drive modes can be set using the mode, will also change the EPS buttons on central console. setting. Keys (buttons) only have two statuses: By selecting one of these drive modes, OFF and ON. The OFF status (button the LED beside the button illuminates released) is the standard function and the vehicle configuration obtained mode. The ON status is activated by is graphically displayed on instrument pressing the button, the dedicated LED cluster. The same screen is also will illuminate. It is necessary to press obtained when selecting the “Drive the (ESC OFF) button for at least 3 Buttons on the central console have mode” menu using the buttons on seconds. following functions: steering wheel. • (ESC OFF): to disable/reactivate When changing the drive mode the ESC system. between NORMAL, I.C.E., SPORT and • M (Manual): to switch from (Suspensions), engine temperature automatic to manual drive mode. and fuel level indicators inner edge will change color if “Outline Coloring” of submenu “Screen Setup” is set to
214 Driving
The table shows the different drive The tables below summarise the modes according to the status of the adjustment of transmission and buttons. engine parameters according to set drive mode/s. (ESC OFF) is the only Button OFF – Button released ON – Button pressed (LED ON) mode that does not depend on the Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC activation or deactivation of the other activated. partially deactivated. modes. The tables show the two configurations with: M Autoshift Mode (Auto). Manual shift mode (Manual) ON. • (ESC OFF) button NOT pressed; I.C.E. Increased Control and Increased Control and Efficiency Efficiency mode OFF. mode ON (**). • (ESC OFF) button pressed. SPORT Normal drive mode (NORMAL) Sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON. ON. Sport-Normal suspensions Sport-Firm suspension setting (S). (*) setting. (*) Only with optional Skyhook active suspensions. (**) I.C.E. (Increased Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order 5 to reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampening vehicle reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low-grip surfaces.
215 Driving
(ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed
Button pressed: LED ON M M M M M Button not pressed: LED I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. OFF SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT
Setup Normal + Normal + Auto + I.C.E. + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto + Manual + Soft Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Hard suspensions suspensions Stability control Active Active Active Active-Sport (*) Active-Sport (*) Electric Power Normal Normal Normal Sport Sport 5 Steering (EPS) Suspensions Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm setup Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Low (Rev. Low (Rev. Exhaust sound Low Always High Always High Threshold) Threshold) Gear shifting Normal - Comfort Performance Performance point Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Upshift rev. Yes (No, when in Yes (No, when in Yes Yes Yes limiter M) M)
216 Driving
Button pressed: LED ON M M M M M Button not pressed: LED I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. OFF SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT
Performance Performance Automatic Normal Anti - Stall Comfort (Anti - Stall, (Anti - Stall, downshift when in M) when in M) Sport (Rapid - Sport (Rapid - Shifting timing Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport, when in Sport, when in M) M)
(*) In low- and medium-grip 5 conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate Sport mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed).
217 Driving
(ESC OFF) Button pressed
Button pressed: LED ON M M M M M Button not pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT
Setup Normal + Normal + Auto + I.C.E. + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto + Manual + Soft Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Hard suspensions suspensions Stability control OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Electric Power Normal Normal Normal Sport Sport Steering (EPS) 5 Suspensions Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm setup Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Low (Rev. Low (Rev. Exhaust sound Low Always High Always High Threshold) Threshold) Gear Normal - Comfort Performance Performance shifting point Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Upshift rev. Yes (No, when in Yes (No, when in Yes Yes Yes limiter M) M) Performance Automatic Performance (Anti Normal Anti - Stall Comfort (Anti - Stall, downshift - Stall, when in M) when in M)
218 Driving
Button pressed: LED ON M M M M M Button not pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E.
SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT
Sport (Rapid - Sport (Rapid - Shifting timing Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport, when in Sport, when in M) M)
NOTE: A different drive mode can be set even with engine running and vehicle in motion. 5 To activate a drive mode, press briefly the corresponding button. The LED beside the button will light up and set drive mode screen will be displayed (example in the figure: I.C.E.) for 5 seconds.
219 Driving
Activate/Deactivate (ESC OFF) Drive Mode To activate (ESC OFF) drive mode press the corresponding button for at least 3 seconds.
To disable the drive mode activated, A Powertrain press the same button again: the LED will turn off. B ESC Monitoring Settings on Display C Suspension stiffness By gaining access to “Drive mode” D Torque distribution (AWD version only) 5 To deactivate the drive mode, press menu through the buttons on steering the same button again: the display will wheel right-hand side, it is possible to Press (Suspension) button, the show the message indicating that monitor the settings for driving. icon with "S" beside will light up on (ESC OFF) drive mode is off and ESC The list and figure show vehicle the upper right side of the TFT display. system is active. parameters referred to each drive Activate/Deactivate I.C.E., SPORT and mode. Driving mode and its (Suspension) Drive Mode parameters are identified by a different color (example in the figure: To activate one of this drive mode, I.C.E.). press the corresponding button once: the LED above the symbol will turn on.
The table below specifies the default setting for each drive mode.
220 Driving
Drive Mode Default Condition
ESC Normal
Normal
ESC I.C.E.
Normal 5
ESC Sport
Sport-Normal
221 Driving
Drive Mode Default Condition
ESC Sport
Sport-Firm
M (Manual) Drive Mode Using the shift paddles behind the In this mode, the transmission interacts steering wheel (if equipped), the with the driver in order to allow corresponding icon will be displayed manual shift and increase driver beside the “M” indication and current interaction. The current mode allows shifted gear. 5 the gear system to optimize the Pull the right shift paddle (+) towards engine brake action, remove undesired the steering wheel and release it to shifting into higher and lower gears engage the higher gear; do the same and improve the overall performance operation with the left shift paddle (-) of the vehicle. to engage the lower gear. This mode allows you to move the shift lever step by step forward (-) or backward (+) without pressing the unlock button. The current transmission gear is displayed on the instrument cluster beside “M”.
222 Driving
• If in SPORT mode, the transmission The indicator beside the displayed will remain in the selected gear even gear will light up just before reaching when maximum engine speed is the required speed to downshift or reached. The transmission will upshift (example in the figure). upshift only if enabled by the driver. Manual upshift or downshift will be maintained as long as SPORT mode is selected, even by full stroke pedal press. • If in M (Manual) or in SPORT mode, Manual mode can be activated at any the transmission will automatically time, with no need to release the downshift as the vehicle slows to brake pedal. halt (to prevent engine lagging) and Even if the release button is pressed the current gear will be displayed on and gear is shifted in R (Reverse), P the instrument cluster. Shifting the (Park) or N (Neutral), the selected shift lever backward (+) or moving manual mode will be maintained. the right shift paddle (+) towards 5 In Manual mode, the transmission will the steering wheel when stationary, shift up or down (+/-) if manually will cause the vehicle to start in selected by the driver by using the second gear. If the vehicle speed is shift lever, or shift paddles on the too low, the system will ignore steering wheel (if present). The further upshifts. Avoid using speed transmission remains in the engaged control when the M (Manual) mode gear until the driver shifts into is engaged. another higher or lower gear, except Gear Shift Indicator Light in the following cases. In order to improve fuel economy, we When the new gear is engaged, the • Lack of accelerator pedal activity will recommend that you shift gears when indicator turns off. If the shift runs cause the transmission to revert to the system prompts you to do so. This late or is not performed at all, the automatic operation. The will help reduce fuel consumption indicator remains lit for a few seconds transmission will also upshift without significantly affecting vehicle then turns off. As soon as new automatically once maximum engine performance. conditions requiring further gear speed is reached.
223 Driving change occur, the indicator light will Parking Brake Cluster” in section “Dashboard illuminate again. Instruments and Controls”). The vehicle is equipped with an NOTE: electric automatic parking brake, also The gearshift indicator will only work called EPB (Electric Parking Brake). when the transmission is set in M The EPB braking action on model with (Manual) mode. “Base” braking system (equipped with rear floating calliper) is ensured by a I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC power actuator directly working on To release the vehicle in low grip the brake pad inside each calliper of conditions (e.g.: heaps of snow, mud, the rear brake system. sand, etc), it is possible to shift the All other modes with “Dual Cast” transmission feature in the specific braking system are equipped with a mode as required for these situations, dedicated calliper which acts on each During engagement and by pressing the I.C.E. button and to rear brake disc. disengagement procedures, the exclude completely the yaw and It can be automatically engaged when warning light flashes until the 5 spinning control system, by pressing the engine is turned off and parking brake has reached its the button for two seconds (ESC disengaged with engine running, maximum activation force and is OFF). driver seatbelt latched and driver door respectively fully released. closed, while pressing the brake pedal In the above-mentioned conditions, and operating the shift lever. the automatic engagement function Furthermore, EPB can be automatically can be deactivated/activated by engaged above a slope threshold with selecting the menu item “Vehicle the gearshift in P (Park) to avoid settings” on the main menu (refer to damage to the vehicle. EPB can be paragraph “Deactivating Automatic disengaged before turning off the Operation” in this chapter). vehicle. Manual Engagement/ When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the Disengagement tachometer display and the related The parking brake can also be message is displayed on the instrument manually engaged or disengaged cluster for 5 seconds (see “Instrument when the engine is running or the ignition switch is in the RUN position,
224 Driving by pressing the brake pedal and • It is advisable to keep the "Auto raising the lever located behind the Apply" function always active (On) shift lever. CAUTION! so that the vehicle is properly When the parking brake is applied, The main function of the EPB is to secured with electric parking brake. the warning light lights up on allow safe parking of the vehicle, the tachometer and the related therefore it must only be applied Deactivating Automatic message will be displayed for 5 when the vehicle is already stationary. Operation seconds on the instrument cluster. If the EPB is used while the vehicle is If you attempt to engage/disengage moving and decelerating until a speed The automatic engagement function the parking brake without having lower of 3 mph (5 km/h) and, in can be deactivated/reactivated by pressed the brake pedal, a message particular, until complete stop selecting the menu item “Vehicle will be displayed, warning you to (typically in a sudden brake), it is settings” through the switch on the proceed. necessary to have the EPB system right side of the steering wheel (refer If the engine was turned off when the checked by an Authorized Maserati to “Instrument Cluster” in section automatic engagement device was Dealer. “Dashboard Instruments and deactivated (see “Deactivating Controls”.) Automatic Operation” in this chapter) Press and release the switch toward ► 5 it is possible to shift the parking brake the arrow ( ) to select “Electric Park simply by pulling the lever upward WARNING! Brake”. within 3 minutes after turning off. • Always hold the brake pedal pressed during engagement or disengagement of the parking brake. • The EPB command activation while running generates a deceleration of the vehicle with strong deceleration (Dynamic Braking). It is therefore recommended to use this feature only in case of emergency. The stability of the car is guaranteed by Press and release the switch once the action of the activated ESC again toward the arrow (►)to system. visualize the options connected to this function.
225 Driving
• Auto Apply On (recommended “Setting Saved” Selection notification on the TFT display, please contact an setting); appears as a popup for 2 seconds then Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Auto Apply Off. the display will show again the modified function. Failure Indication In the event of electric parking brake system failure, the warning light on the display will light up and the related message will show for 5 seconds.
WARNING! In the event of an EPB failure, take Scroll with the switch toward the your vehicle to the nearest Authorized arrow ▲ or ▼ through the In order to disable the automatic Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. operation follow the same procedures 5 programmable options. Press and release the switch toward and select the other option. the arrow (►) to set the selected option. A check mark will remain next CAUTION! to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. • Under certain conditions when the battery voltage is low, the electric automatic parking brake system may temporarily be deactivated for safety reasons. Therefore, typically upon starting the engine, when the battery voltage drops, a message Initialize the EPB System after may temporarily be displayed, Re-connecting the vehicle battery indicating that automatic operation After the detachment and the is temporarily disabled. subsequent connection of the battery, • In case of repetitive requests to reset the EPB through the messages shown
226 Driving on the instrument cluster display the Parking and away from the curb on an uphill warning light will be illuminated. grade. To initialize the EPB system, lift, Before leaving the vehicle, make sure Apply the parking brake before release and lift again the lever located that the parking brake is fully applied placing the shift lever in P (Park), behind the shift lever. and place the shift lever in the P (Park) otherwise the load on the position. Emergency Disengagement transmission locking mechanism may In case of brake lock with complete make it difficult to move the shift electrical system failure, it is necessary lever out of P (Park). to force the electric actuator on the WARNING! In certain conditions, it is however rear calipers (see “Emergency Release • Always check that the vehicle is advisable to disengage the parking of the Parking Brake” chapter in locked before leaving it. brake manually and slightly apply the service brake for starting off. This is section “In an Emergency”). • Never leave children unattended in advisable when there are obstacles the vehicle. EPB Operation with very close to the vehicle in the Overheated Brakes • Do not park the vehicle on paper, direction in which you intend to move. grass, dry leaves or other flammable Driving on mountain roads with steep materials. slopes or a sports use of the vehicle 5 could overheat the brake system • Do not leave the engine running components. In these conditions, the while the vehicle is unattended. parking brake must not be used since the push of the power actuator might not be sufficient to ensure vehicle CAUTION! braking, especially on a slope. When you need to park the vehicle on Drive normally without braking to a steep slope, both with the engine on allow the brakes to cool down a few or off, it is recommended not only to minutes before stopping. In this way, engage the parking brake, but also to the automatic or manual activation of shift the gearshift lever to P (Park) the parking brake will ensure vehicle before leaving the vehicle. braking. When parking on hill roads, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
227 Driving
“Drive Away Inhibit” strategy “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy alerts The table shows the vehicle condition the driver with messages on the and the action that the system runs to In order to avoid a dangerous instrument cluster display and exit the dangerous condition. condition resulting from leaving the sounding chimes, then puts the vehicle not “braked” with running transmission in P (Park). engine and without driver on board,
Vehicle condition Action of the driver • Engine running and speed lower than 1.8 mph (3 km/h). • Transmission in any position other P The driver releases the brake pedal to (Park). get out of the vehicle. • Driver safety belt unlocked. • Driver door opened. The system puts the • Brake pedal pressed. transmission in P (Park) position. Warnings Warnings 5 • Slow continuous chime. • Fast chime. • The condition of the vehicle not in P • A message which invites to engage (Park) position will be signaled by a the parking brake to prevent vehicle message on the display. movement will be displayed on the display.
228 Driving Brake and Stability the condition of the vehicle brakes of discrepancy between the required Control System and tires. trajectory and the current one, the • These systems cannot prevent ESC system brakes the appropriate The vehicle is equipped with an collisions, including those resulting wheel to counteract over or under Electronic Stability Control System from excessive speed in turns, steering. (ESC), which helps to maintain following another vehicle too • Oversteer - when the vehicle is directional control in the event of loss closely, or aquaplaning. turning more than appropriate for of grip of the tires. The system is able • The capabilities of a vehicle the steering wheel position. to detect potentially dangerous equipped with these systems must • Understeer - when the vehicle is situations for the stability of the never be exploited in a reckless or turning less than appropriate for the vehicle and automatically sets the dangerous manner that could steering wheel position. brakes on all four wheels in a jeopardise the driver’s and the The ESC system has two available differentiated manner, in order to passenger’s safety or the safety of operating modes: provide a torque settlement of the others. vehicle. ESC on This is the normal ESC operating ESC includes the following subsystems: Electronic Stability Control mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, 5 • ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); (ESC) the ESC system is set in this mode and • EBD (Electronic Brake-force This system enhances directional should be used for most driving Distribution); control and stability of the vehicle conditions. The ESC should only be • TCS (Traction Control System); under various driving conditions. The turned off for specific reasons as • BAS (Brake Assist System); ESC corrects over steering and under pointed out in the following paragraphs. • BTO (Brake Throttle Override); steering of the vehicle by applying the • HSA (Hill Start Assist). brake to the appropriate wheel. ESC off Engine power may also be reduced to The “ESC off” mode is aimed for a assist in counteracting the conditions more spirited driving experience but of instability and maintain the right also purposeful for driving in deep WARNING! direction. The system is also able to snow, sand, or gravel. The current • These systems cannot prevent the reduce the engine power. mode disables the TCS portion of the natural laws of physics from Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, ESC and raises the threshold for ESC affecting the vehicle, nor can they the ESC system detects the driver’s activation, allowing higher wheel spin increase traction, braking or steering chosen direction comparing it to the than normally granted by the ESC efficiency beyond that afforded by one maintained while running. In case system. The (ESC OFF) button is
229 Driving
fitted beside the gear shift lever: to situation requiring “ESC off” mode is NOTE: deactivate the system see “Drive overcome, turn the ESC on again by • When the vehicle's speed is higher Mode” in this section. pressing the (ESC OFF) button. This than 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear may also be performed while in a slight clicking sound as well as motion. other motor noises. The system is WARNING! performing a self-check cycle to In SPORT mode the ESC control Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ensure that the ABS is working thresholds are higher for maximum and Electronic Brake-force properly. performance on dry road surface. To Distribution (EBD) • This self-check occurs each time the ensure maximum security of the ESC, The Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) vehicle is started and accelerated it is recommended not to activate provides increased vehicle stability and past 7 mph (11 km/h). SPORT mode on surfaces with brake performance under most medium- and low-grip (e.g., wet, ABS is activated during braking under braking conditions. The system snow, dirt, etc..) with ESC system certain road or stopping conditions. automatically “pumps” the brakes active ( (ESC OFF) button not ABS-inducing conditions can include during severe braking to prevent pressed). ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad 5 wheel lock-up. tracks, loose debris. The Electronic Brake-force Distribution You may also experience the following NOTE: (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from when the brake system goes into Anti- • When in “ESC off” mode, the TCS over-braking and provides greater Lock: functionality of ESC is deactivated control of available braking forces • The ABS motor running (it may (except for the limited slip feature applied to the rear axle. described in the TCS paragraph of continue to run for a short time after this chapter). All other stability the vehicle stops). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. features of ESC function regularly. WARNING! • Brake pedal pulsations. • To improve the vehicle's traction The ABS helps prevent the wheels when driving with snow chains, or from locking, but it does not increase • A slight drop or fall away of the when starting off in deep snow, the physical grip limits between the brake pedal at the end of the stop. sand, or gravel, it may be desirable tires and the road. Therefore, always These are all normal characteristics of to switch to the “ESC off” mode by keep a safe distance from the vehicle ABS functioning. pressing the (ESC OFF) button and in front of yours and reduce your remain in this operational mode no speed when entering a curve. longer than needed. Once the
230 Driving
Activating under slip conditions the vehicle even when it is being different control systems: accelerated. If the brake pedal is WARNING! • if slippage affects both drive wheels, depressed together with the • The ABS contains sophisticated it reduces the power transmitted by accelerator, the system does not electronic equipment that may be the engine; consider as “conflict” the sequence susceptible to interference caused “brake-first-then-accelerator” of pedal • if slippage only affects one drive by improperly installed or high application and it will not engage the wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel output radio transmitting BTO. When the system recognizes the automatically. equipment. This interference can sequence “accelerator-first-then- cause possible loss of anti-lock Brake Assist System (BAS) brake-pressed” as “conflict” the braking capability. Installation of engine power should be automatically such equipment should be This system completes the ABS system reduced and, if the driver continues to performed by qualified Maserati by optimizing the vehicle braking depress the accelerator, the system can personnel. capacity during emergency brake make the vehicle to come to a maneuvers. The system detects an • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will complete stop. emergency braking situation by diminish their effectiveness. Additionally, if the brake pedal is sensing the rate and amount of brake Pumping brakes makes the stopping released when the accelerator is still application and then applies optimum 5 distance longer. Just press firmly on depressed, the corresponding engine pressure to the brakes in order to help your brake pedal when you need to torque increase gradually to a safe reduce braking distances. slow down or stop. Do not pump value. The quick brake coupling is optimal brakes. During this event, the ETC light for BAS performances. In order to fully indicator will illuminate. The system exploit the system, apply continuous Traction Control System (TCS) exits from this strategy when the brake pedal pressure during the entire accelerator pedal is completely The current device is an integral part vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce unstuck. of the ESC system. It operates brake pedal pressure earlier than automatically by reducing the power required. Once the brake pedal is Hill Start Assist (HSA) released, the BAS is deactivated. transmitted by the engine in case of The HSA system is designed to assist slipping, loss of grip on wet floor Brake Throttle Override (BTO) the driver when starting a vehicle (aquaplaning), acceleration on uphill. HSA will maintain the level of To complete the range of systems that slippery snow-covered or frozen brake pressure applied for a short assist braking, the vehicle is equipped surfaces, etc. period of time also after releasing the with BTO, which is designed to stop brake pedal.
231 Driving If the driver does not apply the Using the Brakes abnormally high brake temperatures, throttle during this short period of excessive lining wear, and possible time, the system will release brake brake damage. In an emergency full pressure and the vehicle will start CAUTION! braking capacity may be impaired. sloping down. The system will release To obtain a good performance by brake pressure proportionally to the brake pads and discs, avoid sudden Brake Pads and Brake Discs amount of throttle/torque applied as braking during the first 190 mi Wear on the brake pads and brake the vehicle starts to move in the (300 km). discs depends to a great extent on the chosen direction. driving style and the conditions of use HSA Activation Criteria The pad wear limit is indicated by the and therefore cannot be expressed in The following criteria must be met in illumination of the warning light actual miles driven on the road. order for HSA to activate: and by a message on the The brake system is designed for instrument cluster. optimal braking effect at all speeds • vehicle is stationary; In this event, please contact an and temperatures. • gear selection matches vehicle uphill Authorized Maserati Dealer. Certain speeds, braking forces and direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, 5 in forward gear; vehicle backing humidity and long outdoor stopping uphill is in reverse gear). periods) can therefore cause the HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all brakes to "squeal". This is normal and forward gears when the activation will cease after a few brakings. criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the gear New Brake Pads and/or Brake is placed in N (Neutral) or P (Park). Discs New brake pads have to be “broken in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction to the brake disc when the vehicle has covered several hundreds of miles. WARNING! During this break-in period, the Riding the brakes can lead to brake slightly reduced braking ability must failure and possibly an accident. be compensated for by pressing the Driving with your foot resting or brake pedal harder. This applies riding on the brake pedal can result in
232 Driving whenever the brake pads and/or brake Use of the Engine of the break-in and not interpreted as discs are replaced. an indication of malfunction. Brake Overheating Breaking-In Specific Requirements Today's most modern production Avoid exceeding 5000 rpm for the first Driving on mountain roads with steep methods are designed to provide 620 mi trip (1000 km). slopes or a sports use of the vehicle extremely precise construction and After starting the vehicle, do not could overheat the brake system assembly of components. However, exceed 4000 rpm until the engine has components. In these conditions, the moving parts do undergo a settling warmed up sufficiently (coolant parking brake must not be used since process, basically in the first hours of temperature: 149-158°F /65 70°). the push of the power actuator might vehicle operation. not be sufficient to ensure vehicle Do not drive keeping at a constant While Driving braking, especially on a slope. high speed rate for a prolonged time. Never travel with the tachometer Drive normally without braking to While cruising, brief full-throttle indicator approaching the peak rpm, allow the brakes to cool down a few acceleration within the limits of local not even downhill. When the minutes before stopping. The traffic laws contributes to a good tachometer indicator is approaching automatic or manual activation of the break-in. Wide-open throttle the peak rpm (red colored zone), take parking brake will ensure vehicle acceleration in low gear can be precautions to avoid exceeding that 5 braking. detrimental and should be avoided. limit. Brake overheating could also cause The engine oil installed in the engine “squeals”. at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, see “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles/kilometers of operation. This Ensure proper operation of different should be considered as a normal part devices checking their respective control telltales.
233 Driving
Authorized Maserati Dealer will use to will soon occur. Immediate service is service your vehicle. Although the required at an Authorized Maserati CAUTION! vehicle will still be driveable and not Dealer. • Under normal conditions, all red need towing, contact an Authorized • After the problem has been solved, warning lights on the instrument Maserati Dealer for service as soon as the Authorized Maserati Dealer cluster display should be off. When possible. personnel will perform specific tests they come on, this indicates a for a complete check of the system malfunction. Refer to “Instrument and, if necessary, road tests. Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. • Continuing to drive when a red warning light is on could cause serious damage to the vehicle and affect its performance.
Onboard Diagnostic System 5 Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system. This system monitors the CAUTION! performance of the emissions, engine, • Prolonged driving with the and automatic transmission control Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) systems. When these systems are on could cause further damage to operating properly, your vehicle will the emissions control system. It could provide excellent performance and also affect fuel economy and fuel economy, as well as engine drivability. The vehicle must be emissions well within current local serviced before any emissions tests regulations of various countries. can be performed. If any of these systems require service, •Ifthe Malfunction Indicator the system will turn on the Light (MIL) is flashing while the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). engine is running, severe catalytic It will also store diagnostic codes and converter damage and power loss other information, which your
234 Driving Electronic Cruise Control Controls The electronic Cruise Control controls The electronic Cruise Control (CC) are located on the left side of the enables the driver to maintain the steering wheel. desired vehicle speed without pressing Control configuration depends on the accelerator pedal, reducing driving which driver assist systems are fatigue on highways, especially long installed to the vehicle. trips, as the set speed is automatically In the standard configuration there is maintained. A firm press on the a specific button to enable and disable accelerator pedal or the braking pedal the CC. will temporarily deactivate the cruise Optional Configuration control function. Control buttons have the following functions: CAUTION! Standard Configuration The device can only be switched on at ON/OFF button to speeds exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h) engage/disengage CC and it switches off automatically when 5 system. the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal is pressed. Optional Configuration
Standard Configuration Press ACC Gap button and hold it down for 2 seconds In the optional configuration, there is WARNING! to enable the CC system. no specific button to enable and The Cruise Control function must only disable the CC, since the driver uses be activated when traffic and the Press ACC button to disable the ACC control buttons. route permit a constant speed to be the CC system. maintained safely for a sufficiently long distance.
235 Driving
Shared by All Configurations Displayed Information Multifunction switch: CC conditions are displayed on the • Press up (indication RES instrument cluster after selecting +): increase speed, set “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph current speed or resume “TFT Display: Menus and Settings" previously set speed under “Instrument Cluster” in section when system is in “Dashboard Instruments and “cancelled” status; Controls”). • Pushed (indication Displayed information depends on CANC): deletes the set system status: ready, disabled, speed; cancelled or set. To turn the system off, push the • Press down (indication Apart from the pop-up messages at ON/OFF button a second time or SET -): set speed/decrease the centre of the display, CC system the ACC button (in the Optional speed. status is represented by icons at the Configuration). The white light will top left. These icons remain displayed turn off. NOTE: even when you exit the "Driver Assist" 5 • The figures only show the Standard screen. Configuration. The CC screen can be displayed any time the driver changes system status • In order to ensure proper operation, or settings. After 5 seconds of CC the CC system has been designed to inactivity, the display goes back to last shut down if multiple systems are screen. operated at the same time (example: ACC and FCW). When conditions so Activation allow, the CC system can be To turn the system on, push the reactivated by pushing the CC ON/OFF button or the ACC Gap “ON/OFF” button or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in the Optional NOTE: button (in the Optional Configuration). The white light The CC system must be turned off Configuration) and resetting the with below 3 dashes on the instrument when not in use. desired vehicle set speed. cluster display will illuminate.
236 Driving
will be visualized below the green light. WARNING! To decrease speed, push downward Never leave the electronic Cruise the multifunction switch (SET -). Control system on when not in use. Keeping the switch pushed in the You could accidentally set the system downward position, the set speed will or cause it to go faster than you want. continue to decrease by 5 units at a Always leave the system off when time (5 mph or 5 km/h) until the you are not using it. switch is released. Release the switch when the desired speed is reached, Speed Range of Use Release the accelerator and the and the new set speed will be vehicle will operate at the selected visualized below the green light. Speed mph (km/h) speed. Pushing the multifunction switch Minimum 18 (30) upward (RES +) or downward (SET -) NOTE: once will enable to increase or Engaged/activated 18 (30) The vehicle should be traveling at a decrease the set speed by one unit Maximum 130 (210) steady speed and on level ground (1 mph or 1 km/h). 5 before pushing the switch downward. Each subsequent tap of the Setting Desired Speed multifunction switch will increase or Pressing the “ON/OFF” button or decrease the speed by 1 mph or Turn on the CC function. When the the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in 1 km/h. vehicle has reached the desired speed the Optional Configuration) or (in the example: 60 mph), push moving the ignition switch in OFF Temporary Deactivation downward the multifunction switch position erases the set speed memory. A soft tap on the brake pedal, (SET -) and release. pressing the multifunction switch The green light below the desired Changing Speed Setting (CANC), or normal brake pressure speed will illuminate on the When the CC is set, you can increase while slowing the vehicle will instrument cluster display. cruise speed by pushing upward the temporarily deactivate the CC without multifunction switch (RES +). Keeping erasing the set speed memory. The the switch pressed, the set speed will white light will appear on the continue to increase by 5 units at a display. time (5 mph or 5 km/h) until the switch is released. The new set speed
237 Driving
below the set speed with steady light traffic or on winding, icy, will be displayed. snow-covered or slippery roads. Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push upward the multifunction switch (RES +) and release. The green light with below the set speed will illuminate on the instrument cluster. Resume can be used at any speed above 18 mph Driver Override (30 km/h). If the driver presses the accelerator Using Electronic Cruise Control pedal while the CC is on, such as to on Hills overtake another vehicle, and exceeds The transmission may be downshifted the set speed limit, the system will on hills to maintain the vehicle set 5 temporarily deactivate the CC. During speed. The CC system maintains set the event, the speed indication below speed up and down hills. A slight the green light will be blinking. speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep slopes, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so we recommend to drive without CC.
WARNING! Electronic Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the When the accelerator pedal is conditions, and you could lose control released, the vehicle will return to the and have an accident. Do not use set speed and the green light with electronic Cruise Control in heavy
238 Driving Adaptive Cruise Control – on the front grille behind the trident, and the forward-facing camera behind ACC (optional) the internal rear-view mirror to detect WARNING! the presence of a vehicle ahead at a • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is ADAS Equipments close distance and moving in the same designed to increase vehicle driving The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is direction. comfort. It must not be considered part of ADAS equipments together as a means of replacing the required with: attention of the driver. The driver is always required to drive carefully. • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) The driver is always required to pay • Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) utmost attention to driving • Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) conditions (road, traffic, weather) • Highway Assist (HAS) and style (speed, distance from • Traffic Sign Assist (TSA). sensed vehicle ahead, brake use). Driver has the full responsibility of NOTE: the vehicle therefore his attention is FCW, LKA ABSA, HAS and TSA are crucial to keeping vehicle control, in 5 described in the relevant chapters of This vehicle, in this chapter, will be particular when approaching curves this section. indicated as "target vehicle" or and situations with heavy traffic. "vehicle ahead". Failure to follow these warnings can ACC Preview NOTE: result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • If the sensor detects no vehicle further increases the drive comfort ahead, the ACC system will maintain • In some driving scenarios, the ACC ensured by the Cruise Control when set steady speed. could have detection problems. In driving on highways and freeways. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle such cases, the ACC could kick in late Always consider that ACC is not a ahead, the ACC system automatically or unexpectedly. The driver must be safety system and is not designed to kicks in by slightly accelerating or careful since his/her intervention prevent accidents. braking (to avoid exceeding the could be necessary. The ACC allows driver to keep Cruise initially set speed) so that the vehicle • It is always the driver’s responsibility Control active in limited or moderate keeps present distance, trying to to obey speed limits and to keep traffic conditions with no need to adapt to the speed of the detected minimum legal distance to the constantly restore the Cruise Control. vehicle ahead. preceding vehicle. The ACC uses a radar sensor, located (Continued) 239 Driving
(Continued) similar complex situations such as (green); the white, grey or yellow lines • ACC system can decelerate only with highway construction zones. represent the LKA and HAS systems. limited braking, it cannot execute • When entering a junction lane or a The ACC screen can be displayed any emergency braking. slip road to leave the highway; when time driver changes system status or The ACC system: driving on narrow, icy, snowy, settings. After 5 seconds of ACC slippery roads, or on steep uphill and inactivity, the display goes back to last • Does not activate/react in the downhill roads. screen. presence of pedestrians, bicycles, incoming traffic from the opposite • When circumstances do not allow to ACC Controls and Activation direction and steady objects such as a drive safely at constant speed. Conditions vehicle stuck in a traffic jam. Displayed information The buttons on the RH side of the • Is meant for the use on highways and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) steering wheel control the ACC well-built roads, not for city traffic or condition, as well as the LKA and HAS operations and the other mountain roads. status, is displayed on instrument functions/driver assist systems installed • May not have enough time to react cluster after selecting “Driver Assist” to this vehicle. and/or decelerate sufficiently on menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: 5 vehicles when lane is changed too Menus and Settings" under quickly or the relative speed is too “Instrument Cluster” in section high. In such cases the driver has to “Dashboard Instruments and react appropriately and without any Controls”). acoustic/visual and warning. Displayed information depends on • Cannot consider road, traffic and system status: ready, set, temporarily weather conditions and might prove cancelled or override. limited when visibility is poor. Apart from the image at the center of • Does not always fully recognize the display, CC, ACC, LKA and HAS complex driving conditions and this systems status is represented by icons could cause an incorrect assessment at the top left and right. These icons of the required safety distance. remain displayed even when exiting It is recommended to disable the ACC the "Driver Assist" screen. system in the following instances: The vehicle(s) and horizontal bars represent the ACC status as ready • When driving in the fog, heavy rain, (white) or with sensed vehicle ahead heavy snow, slush, heavy traffic and
240 Driving
NOTE: as ACC and ABSA just to mention 1 Multifunction control shared by all some. driver assist functions/systems: Any change made to tire dimensions While activation of ACC and CC at the • Press up (indication “RES +”): affects performance of Adaptive same time is impossible. increase speed, set current speed Cruise Control and Front Collision or resume previously set speed Warning (FCW), if equipped. Speed Range of Use when system is in “cancelled” The ACC is not activated in the status. following conditions: Speed mph (km/h) • Pushed (indication “CANC”): Minimum 0 (0) cancel the function if it was in • When braking. Engaged/activated 18 (30) “set” status, going in a ready • When parking brake is activated. condition but remembering the • When automatic transmission is in P Maximum 130 (210) previous set speed. (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). • Press down (indication “SET -”): • When vehicle speed is out of preset Activation/Deactivation set speed/decrease speed. speed range NOTE: 2 Two functions button with ACC • When brakes are overheated. Pictures show status of ACC and LKA activated: • When driver door is open. 5 • ACC Gap: pressed and released; systems. • When the driver’s seat belt is set the distance to sensed unbuckled. vehicle ahead as horizontal bars Press and release ON/OFF button to (setting cycle starts to 3 bars). • When the road is particularly steep activate the ACC. The display will • CC On: pressed for 2 seconds (both uphill and downhill) at low show the white symbol with below activates the CC system. speed. 3 dashes will illuminate indicating that • Press it to switch from CC to • When drive mode (ESC OFF) is system is ready to be set. ACC. selected. 3 ACC ON/OFF button. If enabled, • When the door is opened at low pressing this button will disable speed. CC. • When there has been an ESC event 4 HAS ON/OFF button with ACC set in the last 5 seconds, or is still active. only. See "Highway Assist - HAS" • When there is an object too close in in this section for further details. front of the vehicle. It is possible that more than one system is active at the same time such
241 Driving
faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
Setting the Speed When the vehicle reaches the required speed, press down and release the multifunction control (SET -). The display will show set speed corresponding to vehicle current one. When in Driver Assist Page Push the ON/OFF button a second time Speed value will be indicated below and release to turn the system off. A the green symbol and above the pop-up message is displayed for 2 distance bars, in the center of the seconds to indicate that ACC was display. disabled. 5
Out of Driver Assist Page If a vehicle is detected as being too close, the display will show a message for 5 seconds and trigger a signal to Remove foot from accelerator pedal warn the driver that current conditions and vehicle will continue at set speed. do not allow enabling of the ACC. At any rate, system will remain in the WARNING! Driver Override ready status. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control If the driver accelerates beyond the set (ACC) system on when not in use is speed or faster than the car would do dangerous. You could accidentally with ACC engaged, the set speed activate the system or cause it to go below the green light will blink and
242 Driving the time gap bars will vanish to • The ACC system applies the brake the vehicle will temporarily deactivate indicate that in this condition the down to a full stop when following the ACC without erasing the set speed system cannot control the distance a target vehicle. If an ACC host memory. The white light will appear between vehicle and sensed vehicle vehicle follows a target vehicle to a on the display with below the set ahead. Vehicle speed will be standstill, after a two or three speed. determined only by the accelerator second delay, the system will not be pedal position. able to resume driving the car Conditions for Disabling and autonomously. At this point it is Deactivation Changing Speed Setting necessary for the driver to manually Besides the cases specified in the Once speed is set, driver can increase reengage the system by either using previous paragraph, the following or decrease it by respectively pressing the multifunction control (press SET- conditions will disable the system: multifunction control up (RES +) or or RES+) or by pressing the • Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) kicks in. down (SET -). Speed can be increased accelerator pedal (see “ACC or decreased in two ways: Operation Before and During Stop” • Transmission lever is not in D (Drive). • The Electronic Stability Control and • Pressing control once, set speed will in this chapter). the Traction Control System increase or decrease by one unit • The ACC system maintains set speed (ESC/TCS) activate. corresponding to 1 mph (1 km/h). when driving up hill and down hill. 5 • Vehicle parking brake is operated. • Hold the control to increase or However, a slight speed change on decrease set speed by 5 mph moderate hills is normal. In addition, • The driver safety belt is unbuckled at (10 km/h) at a time. downshifting may occur while low speed. climbing uphill or descending • The driver door is ajar at low speed. NOTE: downhill. This is normal operation • The driver disabled the ESC using the • When pressing the multifunction and necessary to maintain set speed. (ESC OFF) button on central control up (RES +) or down (SET -), When driving uphill and downhill, console. the new set speed will be the current the ACC system will cancel if the • The road is too steep both uphill and speed of the vehicle. braking temperature exceeds normal downhill at low speed. • When using (SET -) control to range. The system is deactivated and set decelerate, if the engine braking speed is deleted from system memory, power does not slow down the Temporary Deactivation if the ACC ON/OFF button is pressed or vehicle sufficiently to reach the set A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing if ignition device is turned to OFF. speed, the brake system will the multifunction control (CANC), or automatically slow down the vehicle. normal brake pressure while slowing
243 Driving
Resuming Speed If system does not detect the presence vehicle ahead, press and release the of any vehicles ahead, only the bars distance setting button. If a speed setting is stored in system referred to set distance will be memory, press the multifunction displayed. control (RES +) up and take foot off When system detects the presence of a the accelerator pedal. The last set vehicle ahead, it is displayed in front speed will be displayed. of the bars (see example in the figure).
WARNING! The resume function should be used only when road and traffic conditions allow it. Resuming a too high or too low speed for current traffic and road Each press and release of the button conditions could cause a harsh vehicle changes the gap starting from 3 bars acceleration or deceleration which (default distance) and moving in a sequential way towards the minimum 5 could increase the risk of collisions and death or serious injury. distance: 3→2→1→4→3→2→1→4 and so When in Driver Assist Page on. Setting the ACC Gap If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower The specified ACC gap can be set by moving vehicle is detected in the same varying the distance setting among the lane, the system displays the target four possible options identified by the vehicle icon before the bars. From that number of horizontal bars: moment, the system adjusts the vehicle • Maximum (longest) distance: 4 bars. speed automatically to maintain the • Long distance: 3 bars (default distance setting, regardless of the set distance). speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set • Medium distance: 2 bars. distance until: • Short distance: 1 bar. Out of Driver Assist Page Using this distance setting and the • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a To increase or decrease the number of speed above the set speed. vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets bars, corresponding to the gap from the gap to the vehicle ahead.
244 Driving
• The vehicle ahead moves out of the NOTE: determines that the vehicle has moved lane or view of the sensor. The displayed warning is a warning back to a location with left hand • The distance setting is changed. for the driver to take action and does drive. • The driver disables the system. not necessarily mean that the Forward ACC Operation Before and The maximum braking applied by ACC Collision Warning (FCW) system is During Stop is limited; however, the driver can applying the brakes autonomously. always apply the brakes manually, if If an ACC host vehicle follows a target necessary. Obviously, any time the ACC Overtake Aid vehicle to a standstill, after two or system automatically operates the three seconds the system will not be When driving with ACC engaged and brakes, the brake lights will turn on as able to resume driving the car following a target vehicle, the system if the driver was braking. autonomously. In this condition, TFT will provide an additional acceleration A Proximity Warning on display will displays an instruction message pop to assist in passing vehicles in front. alert the driver if ACC predicts that its up for 5 seconds. This additional acceleration is maximum braking level is not When the ACC system brings the triggered when the driver utilizes the sufficient to maintain the set distance. vehicle to a standstill while following left turn signal to start overtaking. In If this occurs, a visual alert will flash a target vehicle, the brakes are locations with left hand drive traffic, on the display and a chime will sound released after two or three seconds 5 overtake aid is active only when while ACC continues to apply its after the stop and at the same time passing on the left hand side of the maximum braking capacity. the system inserts the parking brake. target vehicle. When parking brake engages the ACC When a vehicle goes from a location deactivates going to ready state. with left hand drive traffic to a At this point the driver must reengage location with right hand drive traffic, the system acting on the multifunction the ACC system will automatically control (RES + or SET -) or alternatively detect traffic direction. In this on the accelerator pedal. While ACC condition, overtake aid is active only with Stop is holding your vehicle at a when passing on the right side of the standstill, if the driver unbuckles the target vehicle. This additional seatbelt or opens the door, the ESC acceleration is triggered when the system will activate the EPB. During driver utilizes the right turn signal to standstill, ACC system monitors the start overtaking. In this condition the occupant detection signals: if the ACC system will no longer provide driver's seatbelt becomes unbuckled, overtake aid on the left side until it
245 Driving
the ACC system shall be cancelled ACC and FCW systems will recover the condition that deactivated the when the EPB is applied. operation after the vehicle has left system is no longer present, the these areas. Under rare conditions, system will return to the “Adaptive when the radar is not tracking any Cruise Control Off” state and will WARNING! vehicles or objects in its path this resume function by simply When the ACC system is resumed, the warning may temporarily occur. reactivating it. If weather conditions are not a factor, driver must ensure that there are no NOTE: pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the the driver should examine the sensor. If the radar sensor wipe warning path of the vehicle. Failure to follow It may require cleaning or removal of message occurs frequently (e.g. more these warnings can result in a collision an obstruction. The sensor is located in than once on every trip) without any and death or serious personal injury. the center of the front grille, behind the Maserati trident. snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, To keep the ACC System operating have the radar sensor realigned at an Display Warnings and properly, it is important to note the Authorized Maserati Dealer. Maintenance of ACC and FCW following maintenance items: Systems Clean Front Windshield Warning • Always keep the sensor clean. This warning will display and a signal Wipe Front Radar Sensor Warning 5 Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a will indicate when conditions This warning will display and a signal soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage temporarily limit system performance will indicate when conditions it. due to failed signal reception. This temporarily limit system performance • Do not remove any screws from the most often occurs at times of poor due to sensor poor or failed signal sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain reception. This most often occurs at system malfunction or failure and and fog. The ACC and FCW systems times of poor visibility, such as in snow require a sensor realignment. may also become temporarily blinded or heavy rain. The ACC and FCW • If the sensor or front end of the due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, systems may also become temporarily vehicle is damaged due to a collision, or ice on the windshield and fog on blinded due to obstructions, such as see your authorized dealer for the inside of glass or when driving in mud, dirt or ice on the radar sensor. In service. bad weather. In these cases, the system these cases, the system will be will have degraded performance. disabled. • Do not attach or install any The ACC and FCW systems will recover This message can sometimes be accessories near the sensor, including operation after the vehicle has left displayed while driving in highly transparent material or aftermarket these areas. Under rare conditions, reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC when the camera is not tracking any reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The system failure or malfunction. When
246 Driving vehicles or objects in its path this If the problem persists, contact an warning may temporarily occur. Authorized Maserati Dealer. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the ACC and FCW systems will return to full functionality. Turns and Bends NOTE: When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the If the windshield wiper warning Precautions while Driving with vehicle speed and acceleration for message occurs frequently (e.g. more ACC stability reasons, with no target than once on every trip) without any Offset Driving vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, ACC may not detect a vehicle in the out of the curve the system will 5 have the windshield and same lane that is offset from your resume your original Set Speed. This is forward-facing camera inspected at an direct line of travel, or a vehicle a part of normal ACC system Authorized Maserati Dealer. merging in from a side lane. There functionality. Moreover, the radar may not be sufficient distance to the sensor might detect a vehicle on a Service ACC/FCW Warning vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may nearby lane or no longer detect the If the ACC and FCW systems turn off, move in and out of the line of travel, target vehicle. and the system displays a service which can cause your vehicle to brake warning, there may be an internal or accelerate unexpectedly. system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits functionality. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, ACC and FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC and FCW again later, following a key cycle.
247 Driving
In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lane and it may not detect the vehicle until it is too late for the driver to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Using ACC on Hills Stationary Objects and Vehicles When driving on steep hills, ACC may ACC does not react to stationary not detect a vehicle in your lane when objects and stationary vehicles. For the vehicle reaches the crest. example, ACC will not react in Depending on the speed, vehicle load, situations where the vehicle you are traffic conditions, and the steepness of following exits your lane and the 5 the hills, ACC performance may be vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. limited. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles (like motorcycles) traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling.
248 Driving Radar Device - Compliance harmful interference in which case the Forward Collision Warning Statement user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. – FCW (optional, with ACC This device complies with Part 15 of only) the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure Information Operation is subject to the following Operation two conditions: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) • this device may not cause harmful an uncontrolled environment. This system with braking action interacts interference, and equipment should be installed and with the Adaptive Cruise Control • this device must accept any operated with minimum distance of (ACC), uses the same parts for sensing interference received, including 7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator vehicle ahead (hereinafter “target interference that may cause and your body. vehicle”) as well as part of the undesired operation. This transmitter must not be warnings/messages on system Any unauthorized modifications or co-located or operating in conjunction condition and activation status. For changes to these devices could void with any other antenna or transmitter. further details, refer to “Adaptive the authority of the user to operate Cruise Control - ACC” in this section. this equipment. Full performance can be reached only 5 This equipment has been tested and when both the sensing parts have found to comply with the limits for a detected the object, the difference Class A digital device, pursuant to Part between full and reduced 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are performance is not visible for the designed to provide reasonable driver. protection against harmful The FCW provides audible and visual interference when the equipment is warnings when a potential collision is operated in a commercial detected. Brake actuation and limited environment. This equipment braking may also be applied generates, uses, and can radiate radio depending on the specific scenario. frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the NOTE: instruction manual, may cause harmful FCW system is not intended for interference to radio communications. towing: this could lead the system to Operation of this equipment in a malfunctions and/or to late reaction. residential area is likely to cause
249 Driving
When the system determines a actuation too. collision with the vehicle in front of • FCW will automatically deactivated you is no longer probable, the warning when (ESC OFF) button is pressed messages will be deactivated. (LED light up). NOTE: • Bad weather conditions, like heavy rain, snow, etc., can lead to reduced WARNING! system performance. Under these • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is conditions relevant objects will not not intended to avoid a collision on be detected or detected late by the its own, nor can FCW detect every FCW monitors the information from system. the forward looking radar sensor as type of potential collision. The driver • FCW is designed to react in specific has the responsibility to avoid a well as the Electronic Brake Controller situations in typical traffic scenarios (EBC), to calculate the probability of a collision by controlling the vehicle with objects in the same lane driving via braking and steering. Failure to forward collision. When the system in the same direction, but under determines that a forward collision is follow this warning could lead to certain conditions it can also react on serious injury or death. The driver is 5 probable, the driver will be provided stationary objects in the same lane. It with audible and visual warnings and always in charge to safely drive and is not designed to react to oncoming to avoid critical situations, and not may provide a warning brake traffic or crossing traffic. actuation. If the driver does not take rely on the support of the FCW • The FCW alerts may be triggered to actuation based upon these system. Driver has to keep in mind objects other than vehicles such as progressive warnings, then the system that the system and therefore its guard rails or sign posts based on the will provide a limited level of active intervention is always subject to the course prediction. This is expected braking to help slow down the vehicle prevailing physical limits. and is a part of normal FCW and mitigate the potential forward • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is activation and functionality. collision. If the driver reacts to the not intended either to warn or to warnings by braking and the system • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. apply any brake aid/brake determines that the driver intends to To prevent such misuse of the system, intervention in the event of avoid the collision by braking but has after four Active Braking events collisions with pedestrians or not applied sufficient brake force, the within a key cycle, the Active Braking bicycles. system will compensate and provide portion of FCW will be deactivated additional brake force as required. until the next key cycle. The limit of four events applies to the brake
250 Driving
Speed Range of Use NOTE: The FCW system setting is kept in Speed mph (km/h) memory from one key cycle to the Minimum 0 (0) next. Engaged/activated 1.12 (1.8) Maximum 155 (250) Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking When the speed is outside the The default status of FCW Sensitivity is specified limits, the system the “Medium” setting. When the automatically disables without turning Setting options are described in the active braking function (“Forward on the corresponding warning light following paragraph. Collision Warning Active Braking”) on the instrument cluster. When FCW status for some reason setting is on, the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in FCW Status changes to off, the corresponding amber warning light on instrument front of you when you are farther The driver can adjust FCW sensitivity cluster will light on. away and it applies limited braking. or enable/disable the brake actuation This gives you the most reaction time 5 with the other emergency brakings by to avoid a possible collision. touching "Controls" soft-key on MTC+ Changing the sensitivity status to the display. The current setting is indicated “Near” setting, allows the system to beside to the "Forward Collision warn you of a possible collision with Warning" soft-key. If you want to the vehicle in front of you when you change the setting, touch the soft-key are much closer. This setting provides on the side to enter FCW page. less reaction time than the “Far” sensitivity setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. “Medium” is the intermediate status This warning light informs the driver between the two described above. that FCW is disabled. This warning light will light even when the activation of another driver assistance feature or drive mode (example: (ESC OFF)) disables the FCW.
251 Driving
providing limited autonomous braking This equipment has been tested and or additional brake support if the found to comply with the limits for a driver is not braking adequately in the Class A digital device, pursuant to Part event of a potential frontal collision. In 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are this state the system disables the brake designed to provide reasonable jerk. protection against harmful interference when the equipment is Limited Operation and Service operated in a commercial Warning environment. This equipment The messages indicating on display the generates, uses, and can radiate radio NOTE: limited functionality or service at an frequency energy and, if not installed • The default values shall appear at Authorized Maserati Dealer required and used in accordance with the every new ignition cycle: Sensitivity = are the same as for the ACC system. instruction manual, may cause harmful “Medium” and Active Braking = on. For further details, refer to “Adaptive interference to radio communications. Cruise Control – ACC” in this section. Operation of this equipment in a • FCW may not react to irrelevant residential area is likely to cause objects such as objects not in the Radar Device - Compliance harmful interference in which case the 5 path of the car, stationary objects Statement user will be required to correct the that are far away, oncoming traffic, interference at his own expense. on cross traffic vehicles, or leading This device complies with Part 15 of vehicles with the same or higher rate the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure of speed. Operation is subject to the following Information two conditions: • The active braking (autonomous This equipment complies with FCC braking/braking aid) will not be • this device may not cause harmful radiation exposure limits set forth for provided in case of potential collision interference, and an uncontrolled environment. This with static object such as guard rails, • this device must accept any equipment should be installed and walls, etc..). interference received, including operated with minimum distance of 7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator • FCW will be disabled like ACC (refer interference that may cause and your body. to chapter “Adaptive Cruise Control - undesired operation. This transmitter must not be ACC” in this section. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void co-located or operating in conjunction Changing the active braking status to the authority of the user to operate with any other antenna or transmitter. “Off” prevents the system from this equipment.
252 Driving Lane Keeping Assist - LKA NOTE: System response can be set to "Early", (optional, with ACC only) In case of wet road or raining "Medium" (default mode) or "Late". conditions the function could be System reaction force can be set to This system was designed especially disabled by the system in order to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or for highway or freeway driving, to minimize the risks. "High". reduce the risk that the vehicle, under particular circumstances, accidentally Speed Range of Use departs from the lane in use. When this happens, graphic instructions on Speed mph (km/h) instrument cluster display together Minimum 37 (60) with steering torque application and steering wheel vibration (depending Engaged/activated 37 (60) on the distance to the line) warn the Maximum 112 (180) driver that the vehicle is going out of the lane initiates a steering maneuver Customized Settings to try to prevent the lane exit. Meanings of Settings To detect lane lines, the system uses LKA is configurable by the driver in 5 the forward-facing camera behind the order to maximize its efficiency based • "Visual" only: the system will not rear-view mirror, which is the same on the driver driving style and the request any steering torque/ one used also by the lighting system expectation of the system, reducing at vibration to correct the car to manage the automatic high beams. the same time the possible trajectory. The system will only show The logic core is in the front radar. invasiveness. on the TFT display when the vehicle LKA system remembers the condition Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ is passing the lane. it was in before turning off the display the driver can see the current • "Visual & Haptic": the system will vehicle. setting beside the "Lane Keeping apply steering torque when lane Refer to “MTC+ "Controls" Screen” in Assist" soft-key. departure is detected while showing section “Dashboard Instruments and Touching “Lane Keeping Assist” at the same time the proper cluster Controls” for further information. soft-key can disable or enable the indication, adding to this steering system. vibration when the departure is very Touching the soft-key on the side the imminent. driver can change the setting. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected Driver warnings can be only "Visual" and LKA is enabled then the following or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). menu will be used by the system.
253 Driving
• "LKA Sensitivity": it tunes the wheel or with hands off for only a • With lane boundaries it is mainly distance to the lane boundary where limited amount of time. When the referred to painted lines, the system will start to apply steering system is enabled it will trigger cluster nevertheless the system in good torque. warning in case at least one hand is conditions might properly recognize • "LKA Strength": it tunes the steering not detected on the steering wheel. as valid lane boundaries also other torque value to have a stronger or The torque application as well as the types (for example road edges, curbs, weaker trajectory correction/ vibration are suppressed/inhibited in etc..). case of: high driver torque in the deviation. Being this function used to prevent steering wheel, high lateral unintentional lane change/lane drift, it acceleration, hands not on the steering will be temporary suppressed/inhibited wheel detected for more than a WARNING! by a turn indicator activation, certain time. In rare cases, Lane Keeping Assist therefore, graphic warning, steering High dynamic driving behaviors, (LKA) may make an inappropriate torque application and vibration will driving on the lane boundary, or steering torque application. LKA may be terminated. In this condition in case driving off course will prevent the be interrupted at any time counter of a vehicle detected by the Blind Spot function from working. FCW braking steering. Lack of attention may lead to Assist (BSA) system in the covered area and stability system interventions (ESC, 5 serious injury or death. on the proper side, there can be the ABS) will also prevent the system from transition from LKA to Active Blind operating. Changing lanes results in Spot Assist (ABSA) (if this latter is on System Availability system inhibition for a certain time. In and properly configured). The ADAS systems (LKA, CC, ACC, FCW addition, the driver must respect some and HAS) help the driver while driving. road characteristics such as Function Description and These systems can be set and minimum-maximum width, lanes Operating Mode monitored simultaneously on the clearly defined by two lane boundaries The intent of the function is to prevent display, after opening “Driver Assist” and, only in limited cases and for a the lane departure by warning the menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: limited time, at least one lane driver through indication on the Menus and Settings” under boundary. cluster and, if set, applying steering “Instrument Cluster” in section NOTE: torque and vibration. Whenever the “Dashboard Instruments and system is enabled there will be graphic Controls”). • In case of wet road or raining on the dedicated screen in the driver LKA is designed for an attentive driver; conditions the function could be assist page and for the others it will be therefore the system is available only disabled by the system in order to available in the left top corner of the when his/her hands are on the steering minimize the risks.
254 Driving cluster screen. The graphic which is detected and the system is capable intent is to represent at the glance the to intervene on it. system knowledge of the lane in front An example of these screens can be of the car, the system suppression found in the following figures: status and warning. A: with only LKA system activated, For this reason, a simple colour code steering torque in progress to has been adopted for each line (of the correct the trajectory towards two presented): the lane center; • Both grey lines means system is B: with LKA and ACC systems enabled, not able to operate activated, car is crossing the lane (suppression condition present or boundary, steering torque and lane detection system not able to vibration if configured are in properly estimate the lane); progress when this graphic is • Left/right grey line: the lane shown. detection system is not able to detect that specific lane boundary; • Yellow line: there is a steering 5 torque intervention in progress that tries to prevent a departure on that side, in this situation the warning should increase the driver attention When in Driver Assist Page requiring him/her to properly handle the situation; • Yellow flashing line: the graphic is shown whenever the system detects a very imminent lane departure; torque and steering vibration can be added to this warning if configured by the customer. The white lines (one or both) indicates that the corresponding lane boundary
255 Driving
rain, snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun prevent/interrupt the system on the camera, etc.). intervention. NOTE: • The presence of the hands on the WARNING! steering wheel is detected by a logic If the driver fails to adapt his/her combination of a capacitive sensor driving style, Lane Keeping Assist installed in the steering wheel and (LKA) can neither reduce the risk of an the measured applied torque at the accident nor override the laws of steering column. This leads to a more physics. It cannot take into account robust hands detection when hands road, weather or traffic conditions. are actually on the steering wheel (at Active LKA is only an aid. Driver is least one). always responsible for the distance to • The sensors are not able to detect the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, the presence of the hands on the for braking in good time and for steering wheel areas covered in staying in lane. 5 wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts (where present). System in Fault Sharp turns, slopes and change in When the LKA cannot properly slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well operate due to a fault of its as construction areas and all the components or because the windshield Out of Driver Assist scenario described in this paragraph The icons that represent the status of in front of the forward facing camera may challenge the system, therefore is dirty, the amber light and/or the the ADAS systems remain displayed be always ready to prevent any even when you exit the "Driver Assist" corresponding message will be unexpected behaviour of the car. displayed. screen. Damaged front bumper, windshield System Limitations replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system Because of physical limits, in order to malfunction or system unavailability. properly operate, the system needs Other conditions such as fault, but not good visibility (it might not work or explicitly indicated here may also not properly operate in case of heavy
256 Driving This equipment has been tested and Blind Spot Assist (without found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part ACC) 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable BSA System Operation protection against harmful The Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system uses interference when the equipment is two radar-based sensors, located operated in a commercial inside the rear bumper fascia, to environment. This equipment detect highway licensable vehicles generates, uses, and can radiate radio (cars, buses, motorbikes, etc.) that If message suggestion does not allow frequency energy and, if not installed enter the blind spot zones from the fixing the fault, avoid using the system and used in accordance with the rear/front/side of the vehicle. and have the vehicle inspected at an instruction manual, may cause harmful The example shown in the figure Authorized Maserati Dealer. interference to radio communications. highlights the blind spots on either Operation of this equipment in a side of the vehicle when oncoming Radar Device - Compliance residential area is likely to cause traffic is approaching from behind. Statement harmful interference in which case the 5 This device complies with Part 15 of user will be required to correct the the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). interference at his own expense. Operation is subject to the following Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure two conditions: Information • this device may not cause harmful This equipment complies with FCC interference, and radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This • this device must accept any equipment should be installed and interference received, including operated with minimum distance of interference that may cause 7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator undesired operation. When the vehicle is started, the BSA and your body. Any unauthorized modifications or warning light will momentarily This transmitter must not be changes to these devices could void illuminate in both outside rear view co-located or operating in conjunction the authority of the user to operate mirrors to let the driver know that the with any other antenna or transmitter. this equipment. system is operational and on. The BSA system sensors operate when the
257 Driving
vehicle is in any forward gear and The BSA system monitors the detection • Always pay attention to the traffic enters standby mode when the zones on both sides of the vehicle situation and maintain a safe transmission is in (P) Park. when the vehicle speed reaches distance at the side of the vehicle. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of NOTE: vehicles in these areas. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not WARNING! damaged, the sensor may have • The BSA system does NOT alert the become misaligned. Take your vehicle driver about rapidly approaching at an Authorized Maserati Dealer to vehicles that are outside the verify sensor alignment. Having a detection zones. sensor that is misaligned will result in The BSA detection zone shown in • The BSA might alert the driver too the BSA not operating to specification. figure covers approximately one lane late especially in case of rapidly The area on the rear bumper fascia approaching vehicles. 5 on both sides of the vehicle where the radar sensors are located (approximately 11 ft or 3.3 m). The must remain free of snow, ice, and blind spot area extends from dirt/road contamination so that the immediately behind the exterior BSA system can function properly. Do WARNING! rear-view mirrors up to about 23 ft (7 not cover or block the area of the rear m) behind the rear bumper. Risk of accident despite Blind Spot bumper fascia where the radar sensors Assist (BSA). are located with foreign objects BSA does not detect/react to the (bumper stickers, spoilers, bicycle racks, following: etc.). • Overtaking vehicles close on the The BSA system notifies the driver of side, placing them in the blind spot vehicles or objects in the detection area. As a result, BSA may neither zones by illuminating the BSA warning give warnings nor intervene in such light located in the outside mirrors in situations. addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume (if the radio is on). Refer to
258 Driving
“BSA and RCP Setting” in this chapter Entering from the Rear for further information. The alert will turn on when the The BSA system monitors the vehicles that come up from behind detection zone from three different your vehicle on either side and enter entry points (side, rear, overtaking the rear detection zone with a relative traffic) while driving to see if an alert speed of more than 27 mph (43 km/h). is necessary. The BSA system will issue an alert whenever a vehicle enters any one detection zone as outlined below. Speed Range of Use
Speed mph (km/h) Minimum 6 (10) Engaged/activated 6 (10) Maximum – (–) 5 Entering from the Side Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that move into your adjacent The figures show the vehicle lanes from either side of the vehicle. approaching (A) and passing (O) another vehicle in the overtaking lane. If you pass another vehicle slowly, the Other Cases vehicle remains in the blind spot for The BSA system is not designed to approximately 2 seconds, the BSA issue an alert on stationary objects warning light in the outside mirror such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage will illuminate after 1.5 seconds. heaps, berms, etc. However, If the difference in speed between the occasionally the system may alert on two vehicles is greater, the warning such objects. This is normal operation light will not illuminate. and your vehicle does not require service.
259 Driving
• The BSA system is not designed to NOTE: detect pedestrians, cyclists, or In a parking lot situation, oncoming animals. vehicles can be obscured by vehicles • Even if your vehicle is equipped with parked on either side. If the sensors the BSA system, always check your are blocked by other structures or vehicle’s outside and rear-view vehicles, the system will not be able to mirrors for any vehicles approaching alert the driver. from behind or overtaking. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of • Use your turn signal before changing the parking space until the rear end of lanes. the vehicle is moderately exposed. The BSA system will not alert you of The RCP system will then have a clear objects that are traveling in the RCP - Rear Cross Path view of the cross traffic. If an opposite direction of the vehicle in oncoming vehicle is detected, the RCP adjacent lanes. The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when gear system will alert the driver using both in reverse of parking spaces where the visual and audible alarms. If the 5 their vision of oncoming vehicles may radio is on, it will also reduce the radio be blocked. volume. The RCP system monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle. Using sensors located on either side of the rear bumper, it detects any vehicles or objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h) to a maximum of approximately 10 mph WARNING! (16 km/h), such as in parking lot • The BSA system is only an aid to situations. help detect vehicles in the blind spot zones. WARNING! RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. More
260 Driving specifically, it is intended to be used BSA in Visual Mode same side at the same time, both the to help a driver detect an oncoming When operating in “Visual” mode, the visual and audio alerts will be issued. vehicle in a parking lot situation. BSA system will provide a visual alert In addition to the audible alert, the Drivers must be careful when backing in the appropriate side view mirror radio volume will be reduced (if the up, even when using RCP. Always when it detects a vehicle or an object radio is on). check carefully behind your vehicle, in the detection areas monitored by its look behind you, and be sure to check sensors: depending on the status of for pedestrians, animals, other the relative turn indicator, the vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots warning light can be fixed or flashing. before backing up. Failure to do so However, when the system is can result in serious injury or death. operating in RCP mode, it will respond with both visual and audible alerts BSA and RCP Setting when an oncoming vehicle or an Setting modes can be selected from object approaching the rear end side the MTC+ System. of the vehicle is detected. Touch “Controls” soft-key and then Whenever an audible alert is NOTE: “Blind Spot Assist” soft-key to enter requested, the radio is muted (if the 5 radio is on). If the hazard flashers are on, the BSA the setting page. system will issue the appropriate visual BSA in Visual and Acoustic Mode alert only. When operating in “Visual & Acoustic” When the system is in RCP mode, the mode, the BSA system will provide a system shall respond with both visual visual alert in the appropriate side and audible alerts when a detected view mirror based on a detected vehicle or object is present. Whenever vehicle or object. an audible alert is requested, the radio If the turn signal is then activated, and (if on) is also muted. it corresponds to an alert present on Right/left turn/hazard signal status is that side of the vehicle, an audible ignored; the RCP status always chime will also be sounded: in the requests the chime. Refer to chapter “MTC+ “Controls” same moment the warning light will Screen” in section “Dashboard start flashing. Blind Spot Assist Off Instruments and Controls” for further Whenever a turn signal and detected When this function is turned off from information. vehicle or object are present on the the MTC+, there will be no visual or
261 Driving audible alerts from either the BSA or Active Blind Spot Assist - RCP subsystems. ABSA (optional, with ACC NOTE: only) The BSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is ABSA system is only available on shut off. Each time the vehicle is vehicles equipped with ACC system started, the previously-stored mode and represents an addition to the BSA will be recalled and used. previously described (see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" of this System Temporarily Unavailable section). In these cases avoid using the system The blind spot system will become ABSA adds to the BSA the possibility in and have the vehicle inspected at an certain circumstances to avoid and or temporarily unavailable and the Authorized Maserati Dealer. instrument cluster display will show mitigate side collisions with vehicles the message “Blind Spot Assist Radar Device - Compliance proceeding in the adjacent lanes by Temporarily Unavailable” when the Statement changing the car trajectory in order to vehicle enters a radio quite zone try to keep it inside the detected/ 5 This device complies with Part 15 of (example the areas around radio estimated lane. A steering wheel the FCC Rules (OAY-SRR3B). telescopes). vibration is used as further feedback to Operation is subject to the following The warning light on the outside warn the driver that the lane change is two conditions: rear-view mirrors will be lit up and stay not safe. lit until the vehicle exits the zone. • this device may not cause harmful The main logic core is the front radar, interference, and whereas the sense inputs are the System is Faulty • this device must accept any radars on the rear bumper fascia used The BSA system cannot properly interference received, including for sensing the presence of vehicle in operate due to a fault of its interference that may cause the blind spot areas and the forward components, or because the area on undesired operation. facing camera placed behind the the rear bumper fascia where the internal rear-view mirror that instead radar sensors are located is dirty. In is used for lane detection and these cases the amber warning light estimation. and the related message will be ABSA is designed to help the driver to displayed on the instrument cluster. avoid mitigate a collision. Torque and vibration application is however
262 Driving available in the 37 - 112 mph (60 - Highly dynamic behaviours, driving on Speed Range of Use 180 km/h) speed interval. All the speed the lane boundary, off course will thresholds related to the BSA remain prevent the function from working. Speed mph (km/h) still valid, since ABSA as mentioned is FCW braking and stability system Minimum 37 (60) BSA extension. interventions (ESC, ABS) will also Engaged/activated 37 (60) ABSA is intended as a “hands-on” prevent the system from operating. function meaning that the driver is Changing lane results in system Maximum 112 (180) required to stay engaged in the inhibition for a certain time. driving all the time with his/her hands In addition the road must respect System Limitation on the steering wheel, in case hands some characteristics such as minimum- Because of physical limits the system are not on the steering wheel for a maximum width, lane clearly defined to properly operate needs good certain time there cannot be any by two lane boundaries and only in visibility (it might not work or not steering torque application vibration limited case for a limited time at least properly operate in case of heavy rain, included. one. snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun on System Availability NOTE: the camera, dirty windshield, low illumination etc.) ABSA is designed for an attentive • In case of wet road or raining Sharp turns, slopes and change in 5 driver therefore the system is available conditions the function could be slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well only when his/her hands are on the disabled by the system in order to as construction areas and all the steering wheel or with hands off for a minimize the risks. scenarios described in this paragraph very limited amount of time. When • With lane boundaries it is mainly may challenge the system, therefore the system is enabled, it will trigger referred to painted lines, be always ready to prevent any cluster warning in case at least one nevertheless the system in good unexpected behaviour of the car. hand is not detected on the steering conditions might properly recognise Damaged front bumper, windshield wheel. as valid lane boundaries also other replaced without proper technical The torque application as well as the types (for example road edges, intervention may also lead to system vibration are suppressed/inhibited in curbs, etc..). malfunction or system unavailability. case of: high driver torque in the Other conditions such as faults, but steering wheel, high lateral not explicitly indicated here may also acceleration, hands not on the prevent/interrupt the system steering wheel detected for more than intervention. a certain time.
263 Driving
ABSA Setting System reaction force can be set to stronger or weaker trajectory "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or correction/deviation. ABSA is configurable by the customer "High". in order to maximize its efficiency Blind Spot Assist in "Visual & Haptic" based on the driver driving style and Mode his/her expectation of the system, When the system is on and configured reducing at the same time the possible “Visual & Haptic” then the ABSA is invasiveness. enabled and to the conventional visual Setting modes can be selected from warnings is added the steering torque the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ and vibration. "Controls" Screen" in section When operating in this mode, the "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" system will provide a visual alert in the for further information). appropriate outside rear-view mirror Touch "Controls" soft-key to display when it detects a vehicle or an object the current status of the ABSA system, NOTE: in the detection areas monitored by its if it was in the on state. sensors. In case of turn indicator The ABSA system will store the current activation on the appropriate side, the operating mode when the vehicle is 5 system will react with a torque on the shut off. Each time the vehicle is steering wheel to try to prevent the started, the previously-stored mode lane change and therefore to will be recalled and used. avoid/mitigate the collision. The Meanings of Settings torque on the steering is applied when the car is very close to the lane When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and boundary as a further feedback to of course ABSA is enabled, then two warn the driver of the unsafe following menus will be used by the maneuver. system. NOTE: To change status, touch the "Active • "ABSA Sensitivity": it tunes the Blind Spot Assist" soft-key. distance to the lane boundary where • The steering torque is not supplied if To change the system setting, touch the system will start to apply steering the system is not able to estimate a the soft-key on the side. torque. lane and if the turn indicator from Driver warnings can be only "Visual", • "ABSA Strength": it tunes the the appropriate side is not inserted. "Visual & Acoustic" (default mode) or steering torque value to have a "Visual & Haptic".
264 Driving
• The presence of the hands on the RCP - Rear Cross Path System Faulty steering wheel is detected by a logic Operation The ABSA system cannot properly combination of a capacitive sensor RCP operation is the same as described operate either due to a fault of its installed in the steering wheel and in chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA". components, or because the area on the measured applied torque at the When ABSA is turned off from MTC+ windshield where the forward-facing steering column. This leads to a "Controls" page, there will be no camera is located or on the rear more robust hands detection. visual or audible alerts from RCP bumper fascia where the radar sensors subsystem. are located is dirty. In these cases the When ABSA is turned on with any amber warning light and the related WARNING! setting,RCP subsystem shall respond message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. • Risk of accident despite steering with both visual and audible alerts torque application of Active Blind when a detected vehicle or object is Spot Assist (ABSA). present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio (if on) is also • A course-correcting steering torque muted. application cannot always prevent a Right/left turn/hazard signal status is collision. ignored; the RCP status always 5 • The driver is always required to requests the chime. steer, brake or accelerate themself, especially if ABSA warns or makes a System Temporarily course correcting steer intervention. Unavailable • Always maintain a safe distance at The blind spot system will become In these cases avoid using the system the sides. temporarily unavailable and the and have the vehicle inspected at an instrument cluster display will show • In rare cases, the system may make Authorized Maserati Dealer. an inappropriate steering torque the message “Blind Spot Assist application. This application may be Temporarily Unavailable” when the Radar Device - Compliance interrupted at any time by counter vehicle enters a radio quite zone Statement steering. (example the areas around radio This device complies with Part 15 of telescopes). • Lack of attention may lead to the FCC Rules (OAY-SRR3B). The warning light on the outside serious injury or death. Operation is subject to the following rear-view mirrors will be lit up and two conditions: stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
265 Driving • this device may not cause harmful Highway Assist – HAS vibrate and a graphic will display on interference, and (optional, with ACC only) the instrument cluster. • this device must accept any interference received, including The Highway Assist (HAS) is a level 2 interference that may cause Autonomy system (in reference to WARNING! undesired operation. NHTSA standards) that is designed to • In case the vehicle approaches a aid the driver in the steering, curve that is too tight in relation to acceleration, and braking functions of the current speed the system will the vehicle. disengage, therefore the driver must HAS is designed to only function on be prepared to take over control of highways or limited access freeways. the vehicle immediately at any time. HAS centers the vehicle by controlling To avoid this situation it is important the EPS system based off of lane line that the vehicle speed is not set information from the forward-facing higher than the current speed limit camera and data from the front radar of the road. sensor. • Highway Assist (HAS) is a hands-on 5 feature! You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times. The HAS system will disengage and ACC will cancel if your hands are removed from the steering wheels for a set amount of time. • HAS is intended for use only on highways or limited access freeways with a fully attentive driver. When using HAS, hold the steering wheel HAS combines ACC and LKA to and be aware of surrounding traffic manage the steering and speed of the and road conditions. Always be vehicle under specific conditions. The prepared to immediately take over conditions to engage HAS are listed in control of the vehicle from the HAS the next paragraph. If a lane line cross system. Failure to follow these is imminent, the steering wheel will
266 Driving
instructions could result in serious • Wet roads, roads covered or partially • Vehicle speed must be between 0 to injury or death. covered by snow. 87 mph (0 and 140 km/h). • The following list does not fully • Construction zones. • No faults in the forward facing represent all situations in which HAS camera, radar, EPS, or MTC+. HAS Operation may not function as intended. Do • Lane width between 3 to 4.6 yd (2.8 NOT solely rely on the HAS system With ACC set (see “Adaptive Cruise and 4.2 m). to control the vehicle. It is the Crontrol – ACC” in this section), HAS • Turn signal not activated. driver’s responsibility to stay alert system activates by simply pressing the • No faults related to this system. and safely control the vehicle at all button on the steering wheel. times. Once the conditions are met, HAS will Speed Range of Use • If the windshield is replaced, you engage. must have the forward-facing Speed mph (km/h) Minimum 0 (0) camera remounted and aligned by CAUTION! an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The Highway Assist (HAS) system may Engaged/activated 0 (0) Many factors can impact the take up to 5 seconds to engage once (with ACC engaged) performance of HAS causing the all conditions are met. Engaged/activated 18 (30) 5 system to be unable to function as (with ACC not The conditions for HAS to engage are intended. These include (but are not engaged) as follows: limited to): Maximum 90 (145) • HAS must be turned on or enabled. • Narrow, winding or curvy roads. • Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, NOTE: • If set above the maximum speed, snow, fog, etc.). In case of wet road or raining HAS will not function after the • Bright light (oncoming headlights or conditions the function could be vehicle speed will reach the direct sunlight) or shadows. disabled by the system in order to maximum speed. • Damage or obstruction caused by minimize the risks. • If set below the maximum speed and mud, ice, snow, etc. the ACC target speed is increased, • The vehicle must be on the highway HAS will function up to the • A damaged or misaligned bumper. or limited access freeway. maximum speed and then the system • Interference from other equipment • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must will turn off automatically. that generates electromagnetic be engaged. • When the ACC target speed is waves. • Left and right visible lane lines. reduce and speed is lower than the
267 Driving
maximum speed, the system will start automatically. • If the ACC target speed is set under the maximum speed, HAS is active and vehicle speed increases above the maximum speed due to slope, HAS will continue to function. HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster HAS and the other ADAS systems When in Driver Assist Page When in Driver Assist Page conditions can be monitored on When exiting the “Driver Assist” page, instrument cluster display by accessing the attention level colour will always the “Driver Assist” page with the be displayed until the system is buttons on the steering wheel (see disabled by pressing the button on “Instrument Cluster” in section the steering wheel. 5 “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The symbol in grey indicates that the HAS system is active, but not engaged and is shown at the centre of the TFT display when the “Driver Assist” page is displayed. When exiting Out of Driver Assist Page the "Driver Assist" page, on TFT In addition to these symbols, on the display top left corner, the grey TFT top and bottom edge a coloured symbol will appear in the multiple glow may appear (further referred to light of active ADAS systems. as "attention level colour"). Attention level colour together with the outline Out of Driver Assist Page of the symbol represent a further The HAS system uses sensors in the indication of the system status. steering wheel outer crown to detect if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel. If the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
268 Driving wheel, the instrument cluster will In order to be able to use the HAS display a series of warnings to alert system, place your hands around the the driver to return their hands to the steering wheel outer crown. steering wheel. There will also be NOTE: audible chimes. After a set amount of time, HAS will cancel if the driver’s • The presence of the hands on the hands are not returned to the steering steering wheel is detected by a logic wheel. combination of a capacitive sensor When the system does not sense the installed in the steering wheel and hands on the steering wheel for a few the measured applied torque at the steering column. This leads to a seconds (3 – 5 seconds) or more (up to The yellow attention level colour more robust hands detection when 10 seconds), it tries to draw the appears when the driver removes hands are actually on the steering attention of the driver by showing, his/her hands from the steering wheel wheel (at least one). even when the display is not in the for 3 to 5 seconds and the symbol "Driver Assist" page, the symbol • The sensors are not able to detect with the figure of the hands will with the figure of the hands in the the presence of the hands on the occupy the whole central area of the centre of the display. According to steering wheel areas covered in display. 5 such time frames, the system will wood, plastic bezels or carbon change the attention level colour, inserts (where present). silence the audio in the vehicle (if it is HAS is deactivated if the steering active) and emit audible chimes to wheel is no longer being touched. invite the driver to take the control of the vehicle again. This is the only way System Statuses to reengage the system. The active status of the HAS system is Hands Detection on Steering indicated by the green attention level Wheel colour which is maintained even if the driver releases his/her grip from the The sensors in the steering wheel steering wheel up to 3 seconds. outer crown are able to detect the When in Driver Assist Page presence of the hands on the steering wheel.
269 Driving
Out of Driver Assist Page Out of Driver Assist Page If the driver keeps his/her hands away The red attention level colour appears The red attention level colour remains from the steering wheel (for more when the driver releases his/her grip even when the steering wheel is than 8 to 10 seconds), also the ACC from the steering wheel for 5 and up released for more than 8 to 10 system is deactivated ( white ACC to 10 seconds: in this case a single seconds. In this case, if you are symbol on the display) and will have to audible chime is repeated until he/she travelling at a speed above 25 mph be reset. The aid of LKA system will be 5 will take the control of the vehicle (40 km/h) a sequences of 3 audible disabled as well. In these cases the again. chimes will be emitted after 8 seconds display will not show the attention and a message will inform the driver level colour anymore and the vehicle that the HAS system has been will be controlled by the driver only. disengaged, inviting him/her to grip the steering wheel again. The same HAS Disengage will happen after 10 seconds if you To disengage HAS you can do any of travel at a speed below 25 mph the following actions: (40 km/h). Then the symbol on TFT • Press the HAS enable button on display will become grey. the steering wheel. • Begin steering manually. • Press brake pedal. When in Driver Assist Page • Turn off ACC. • Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt.
270 Driving
• Press ACC Gap button for two • The presence of the hands on the prepared to take over control of the seconds to enable CC system. steering wheel is detected by a logic vehicle immediately at any time. • Shift out of the (D) Drive gear. combination of a capacitive sensor • Enter an Autonomous Emergency installed in the steering wheel and Radar Device - Compliance Braking (AEB) event (See chapter the measured applied torque at the Statement "Forward Collision Warning - FCW" steering column. This leads to a more robust hands detection. This device complies with Part 15 of in this section). the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). • Turn signal activated. Operation is subject to the following System Limitations two conditions: System Cancellation HAS is unable to guide the vehicle • this device may not cause harmful The HAS system will cancel (without when the following conditions occur. interference, and driver intervention) if either of the • Lane markings are not clear or following actions occur: • this device must accept any visibility is poor (i.e. heavy rain, interference received, including • Curve that is too tight. snow, fog, etc.). interference that may cause • When leaving the grip of the hands • Obstructed, covered or damaged undesired operation. on the steering wheel. forward-facing camera or sensor. Any unauthorized modifications or 5 • Vehicle exits the highway or limited • When driving on hills or sharp changes to these devices could void access freeway. curves. the authority of the user to operate • Lane line markers aren’t detected by • When approaching toll booths. this equipment. This equipment has been tested and the forward facing camera. • When the highway entrance or exit found to comply with the limits for a • Any ADAS system faults. is wider than 20 ft (6 meters). Class A digital device, pursuant to Part • ACC cancellation. • Bright light (ex. direct sunlight or 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are • Vehicle speed exceeds the maximum glare) facing the forward camera. designed to provide reasonable limit. protection against harmful • Lateral accelerations exceeds the interference when the equipment is limits. WARNING! operated in a commercial Many unforeseen conditions can occur environment. This equipment NOTE: that can affect the performance of generates, uses, and can radiate radio • When HAS cancels, the symbol Highway Assist (HAS). Always keep frequency energy and, if not installed will turn red then grey. this in mind and drive attentively. Be and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
271 Driving interference to radio communications. Traffic Sign Assist – TSA • The performance of TSA depends on Operation of this equipment in a the update degree of navigation residential area is likely to cause (optional) system’s maps. harmful interference in which case the TSA detects traffic signs through the user will be required to correct the use of a forward-facing digital camera Setting and Signs Monitoring interference at his own expense. mounted on windshield, behind the on Instrument Cluster Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure rear-view mirror. TSA assists the driver To set TSA feature touch “Controls” Information by displaying on the instrument cluster soft-key on MTC+ display and then This equipment complies with FCC detected speed limits and traffic signs “Traffic Sign Assist” soft-key. The blue radiation exposure limits set forth for with a restriction indicated by an color of the soft-key outline will an uncontrolled environment. This additional sign (e.g. in snow indicate that the feature is set. equipment should be installed and conditions). TSA also uses the data of operated with minimum distance of the navigation system, in order to 7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator provide information to the driver in all and your body. cases in which the camera is not able This transmitter must not be to detect the traffic signs that are 5 co-located or operating in conjunction present on the road where the car is with any other antenna or transmitter. travelling. Some examples of these are: due to low visibility, light reflection, damaged traffic signs, traffic signs in wrong position like rotated or fallen poles. Touch the soft-key again to turn off NOTE: TSA feature. • Overtaking restriction signs are not If TSA feature is set and a sign or a displayed by the TSA system. speed limit is detected, the related • TSA provides a visual warning to the icons are displayed in the upper area driver when he/she unintentionally of the instrument cluster beside of the exceeds the maximum speed allowed main menu number and scroll arrows. by 2 mph - km/h. The display area is divided in two different sectors:
272 Driving
Since TSA also uses the data provided • If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. 1 Conditioned speed limit area. by the navigation system, it can traffic signs on construction sites or 2 Unconditioned speed limit area. update the sector 2 of the display in in adjacent lanes. the following situations without detecting traffic signs: • When the vehicle changes road. • Highway enter/exit. • Urban area stored in the digital map enter/exit. System Limitations TSA may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
NOTE: • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, Overtaking restriction signs are not if there are highly variable shade 5 displayed by the TSA system. conditions or in rain, snow or fog. When the visual warning is provided • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming only the unconditioned speed limit (in traffic, direct sunlight or reflections sector 2) will start blinking if the from other vehicles. vehicle speed is greater than 1 mph • If the windshield in the area of the - km/h. If the vehicle speed stays above camera is dirty, or if the camera is the unconditioned speed limit of fogged up, damaged or covered. 1 mph - km/h for several seconds the • If the traffic signs are hard to detect, unconditioned speed limit sign will e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because stop blinking because the maneuver is they are covered or because of evaluated as intentional. If the TSA is insufficient lighting. not able to determine any kind of • If the information in the navigation valid speed limit neither from camera system's digital map is incorrect or nor from digital maps the following out-of-date. image will be shown in sector 2.
273 Driving
Tire Sizing Chart Tires - General Information Service Description: EXAMPLE: P265/50 ZR19 (100Y) XL or = Load Index — A numerical Tire Safety Information 265/50 ZR19 (Y100) XL 100 code associated with the maximum Tire Markings Size Designation: load a tire can carry P = Passenger car tire size based on Y = Speed Symbol — A symbol U.S. design standards indicating the range of speeds at “...blank...” = Passenger car tire which a tire can carry a load based on European design standards corresponding to its load index 265 = Section width in millimeters under certain operating conditions. (mm) The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be 50 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — achieved under specified operating Ratio of section height to section conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle width of tire loading, road conditions, and posted ZR = Construction Code speed limits) 5 • Z: means a tire usable at speeds 1. U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code greater than 150 mph (240 km/h) (TIN). • R: means radial construction Load Identification: 2. Size Designation. 19 = Rim diameter in inches (in) “...blank...” = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a 3. Service Description. Standard Load (SL) tire 4. Maximum Pressure and Maximum XL = Extra Load (or reinforced) tire Load. LL = Light Load tire 5. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades (see “Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades” in this section).
274 Driving
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits). ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits). 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits). In this case, 03 means the 3rd week. 13 = Number representing the year Tire Identification Number (TIN) in which the tire was manufactured Loading Information Label The TIN may be found on one or both (two digits). In this case, 13 means This label tells you important sides of the tire, however the date the year 2013. information about the: code may only be on one side. Tires • Cold tire inflation pressures for the with white sidewalls will have the full Tire and Loading Information Label front, rear, and spare tires. TIN, including the date code, located The proper cold tire inflation pressure • Number of people that can be 5 on the white sidewall side of the tire. and the loading information are listed carried in the vehicle. Look for the TIN on the outboard side in two labels on the driver's side rear • Total weight the vehicle can carry. of black sidewall tires as mounted on door pillar. the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on • Tire size designed for the vehicle. the outboard side, then you will find it Loading on the inboard side of the tire. The vehicle maximum load on the tire EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0313 must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. DOT = Department of Transportation You will not exceed the tire's load — This symbol certifies that the tire carrying capacity if you adhere to the is in compliance with the U.S. loading conditions, tire size, and cold Department of Transportation tire tire inflation pressures specified on safety standards and is approved for the “Tire and Loading Information highway use. Label” and in the “Features and Tire Information Label MA = Code representing the tire Specifications” section. manufacturing location (two digits).
275 Driving
NOTE: Department of Transportation grades represent the tire's ability to Under a maximum loaded vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grades stop on wet pavement, as measured condition, gross axle weight ratings under controlled conditions on The following tire grading categories specified government test surfaces of (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles were established by the National must not be exceeded. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C Highway Traffic Safety Administration. may have poor traction performance. The specific grade rating assigned by Tires the tire's manufacturer in each Driving over rough or damaged road category is shown on the sidewall of surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and the tires on your vehicle. WARNING! other obstacles can cause serious All passenger car tires must conform to The traction grade assigned to this tire damage to wheels, tires, and Federal safety requirements in is based on straight-ahead braking suspension parts. addition to these grades. traction tests, and does not include This is more likely to occur with acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, low-profile tires, which provide less Treadwear or peak traction characteristics. cushioning between the wheel and the The Treadwear grade is a comparative road. rating, based on the wear rate of the Temperature Grades 5 Be careful to avoid road hazards and tire when tested under controlled The temperature grades are A (the reduce your speed, especially if your conditions on a specified government highest), B, and C, representing the vehicle is equipped with low profile test course. For example, a tire graded tire's resistance to the generation of tires. 150 would wear one and one-half heat and its ability to dissipate heat, times as well on the government when tested under controlled course as a tire graded 100. The conditions on a specified indoor WARNING! relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high Overloading of your tires is upon the actual conditions of their temperature can cause the material of dangerous. Overloading can cause tire use, however, and may depart the tire to degenerate and reduce tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and significantly from the norm due to life, and excessive temperature can increase the stopping distance. Use variations in driving habits, service lead to sudden tire failure. The grade tires of the recommended load practices, and differences in road C corresponds to a level of capacity for your vehicle. Never characteristics and climate. performance, which all passenger car overload them. Traction Grades tires must meet under the Federal The Traction grades, from highest to Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. lowest, are AAA, A, B, and C. These 109. Grades B and A represent higher
276 Driving levels of performance on the Safety tread life resulting in a need for laboratory test wheel, than the earlier tire replacement. Under- minimum required by law. inflation also increases tire rolling WARNING! resistance resulting in higher fuel • Improperly inflated tires can be consumption. WARNING! dangerous. Ride comfort and vehicle stability The temperature grade for this tire is • Under-inflation increases tire flexing Proper tire inflation contributes to a established for a tire that is properly and can result in tire overheating. comfortable ride. Over-inflation inflated and not overloaded. produces a jarring and uncomfortable • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability Excessive speed, under-inflation, or ride. to cushion shock. Objects on the excessive loading, either separately or road and potholes can cause in combination, can cause heat Tire Pressure Checkup damage that results in tire failure. buildup and possible tire failure. The proper cold tire inflation pressure • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires is indicated on the driver's side rear Tire Pressure can affect vehicle handling and can door pillar and on the table “Tire fail suddenly, resulting in loss of Inflation Pressure” in section Proper tire inflation pressure is vehicle control. “Features and Specifications”. 5 essential for safety and best • Unequal tire pressures can cause Inflation pressure specified on the performance of your vehicle. The tire steering problems. table always refers to “cold tire pressure monitoring system “TPMS” inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation setup on the vehicle (see “Tire • Unequal tire pressures from one side pressure is defined as the tire pressure Pressure Monitoring System” in this of the vehicle to the other can cause after the vehicle has not been driven section) may alert the driver about the vehicle to drift to the right or for at least three hours, or driven less insufficient tire pressure even though left. than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a three hour the driver is responsible for regularly • Always drive with each tire inflated period. checking the tire pressure. to the recommended cold tire Check tire pressures more often in Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may inflation pressure. case of significant outside look properly inflated even when they temperature changes, as tire pressure actually are under inflated. Do not Economy varies according to temperature make a visual judgment when Improper inflation pressures may changes. determining proper inflation. cause uneven wear patterns to The pressure should be checked and if Three primary driving aspects are develop across the tire tread. These necessary adjusted; tire wear and affected by improper tire pressure: abnormal wear patterns will reduce
277 Driving
overall conditions should also be When the tread is worn to one of the Replacement Tires checked monthly. Tire pressures tread wear indicators, the tire should change by approximately 1 PSI (0.07 be replaced. NOTE: bar) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature In order to maintain high performance change. Keep this in mind when and safety level under all driving checking tire pressure inside a garage, WARNING! conditions, Maserati strongly especially in winter. The wet performance (aquaplaning recommends to use tires equivalent to Example: If garage temperature = 68°F resistance) will decrease the originals in size, quality and (20°C) and the outside temperature = proportionally to the thickness of the performance when replacement is 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation tread. needed. pressure should be increased by 3 PSI (0.21 bar) for every 12°F (7°C) for this For the size designation of your tire outside temperature condition. Tires Durability see the label on the driver's side rear Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 The service life of a tire depends on door pillar or see table “Wheels” in PSI (0.13 to 0.4 bar) during operation. various factors including, but not section “Features and Specifications”. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure limited to: The “Load Index” and “Speed Symbol” 5 build-up or your tire pressure will be • driving style; for your tire will be found on the too low. After inspecting or adjusting original equipment tire sidewall. • tire pressure; the tire pressure, always reinstall the NOTE: valve stem cap. This will prevent • distance driven. moisture and dirt from entering the Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine valve stem, which could damage the Tires marked with “MGT” logo valve stem and the TPMS sensor WARNING! specifically designed for its models. connected to it. Tires and the spare tire (if equipped) It is recommended to replace the two should be replaced after six years, Tread Wear Indicators front tires or two rear tires as a pair. regardless of the remaining tread. Replacing just one tire can seriously Tread wear indicators are in the Failure to follow this warning could affect your vehicle’s handling. original equipment tires to help you result in tire failure. If you ever replace a wheel assembly, determine when your tires should be make sure that the wheel’s replaced. specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and These indicators are molded into the tire) match those of the original bottom of the tread grooves. wheels. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
278 Driving the safety, handling, and ride of your • Never exceed the maximum speed “Technical Data” and “Tire Inflation vehicle. rating of the tires. Risk of accident Pressure” chapters in section “Features Your Authorized Maserati Dealer is and serious personal injury due to and Specifications”. available to provide suggestions as to excessive speed. the types of tires most suited to the • Failure to equip your vehicle with use foreseen by the Customer. tires having adequate speed WARNING! capability can result in tire failure. The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are optimized for wet and dry WARNING! driving conditions. Standard tires may • Do not use a tire, wheel size or CAUTION! not prove favorable for snow rating other than that specified for Replacing original tires with tires of a conditions. your vehicle. Some combinations of different size may result in false unapproved tires and wheels may speedometer and odometer readings. NOTE: change suspension dimensions and Snow tires should have the same load performance characteristics, Winter Tires capacity as original equipment tires resulting in altered steering, and should be mounted on all four These tires are specially designed for handling, and braking operations of wheels. 5 the vehicle. This can cause driving on snow and ice and are fitted unpredictable handling and stress to to replace the ones supplied with the steering and suspension vehicle. Winter or all-season tires can Snow Chains components. Use only the tire and be identified by the M+S (Mud & Maserati approved traction devices (or wheel sizes with load ratings Snow) or 3PMSF (3 Peaks Mountain snow chains) may be used to improve appointed for your vehicle. Snow Flake) designation on the tire traction on compacted snow in heavy • Never use a tire with a smaller load sidewall. snow conditions. index or capacity, other than what Before mounting winter tires, contact The use of snow chains is specified by was originally equipped on your an Authorized Maserati Dealer to local regulations of each country. vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller receive the technical information Use snow chains of reduced load index could result in tire necessary to advise you on wheel and dimensions, with a maximum overloading and failure. tire compatibility. projection of 0.23 in (6 mm) beyond As to the type of tires to use, inflation the tire tread. • Always check the maximum speed pressures and winter tires The chains may be fitted only on 18” rating on the tire sidewall on any specifications, carefully follow the and 19” rear wheel tires. tire on the vehicle. indications as reported in the
279 Driving Please contact an Authorized Maserati NOTE: Tire Pressure Monitoring Dealer for further information. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can System (TPMS) Check the snow chain tension after provide you with all information about driving for a distance of about 55 yd the Maserati Snow Chains, available in The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (50 m) with the chains fitted. the "Genuine Accessories" range. (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low With the snow chains fitted, it is tire pressure according to the vehicle advisable to deactivate the ESC system Compact Spare Tire recommended cold pressure indicated (see chapter “Drive Mode” in this on the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” section). The limited-use spare tire, or compact in section “Features and spare tire, is for temporary emergency Specifications” and on the label use only. applied on the driver's side rear door CAUTION! This tire is identified by a label indicating pillar. • The use of non-recommended snow the driving speed limitations to comply Tire pressure should always be set chains may damage the vehicle. with when using the spare tire. based on cold inflation tire pressure. Inflate the spare tire to the cold • Broken snow chains can cause serious The cold tire inflation pressure must inflation pressure listed on the table damage. Stop the vehicle not exceed the maximum inflation “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section 5 immediately if noise occurs that pressure molded into the tire sidewall. “Features and Specifications”. could indicate snow chain breakage. Check “Tires – General Information” in Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle Remove the damaged parts of the section “Driving” for information on handling. Replace (or repair) as soon as snow chain before further use. how to properly inflate the tires. possible the original equipment tire • Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). The tire pressure will also increase as and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not the vehicle is driven - this is normal • Drive cautiously and avoid severe install more than one compact spare and there is no adjustment required turns and large bumps, especially tire and wheel on the vehicle at a when this occurs. with a loaded vehicle. time. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low • Avoid holes in the road, do not drive tire pressure if the tire pressure falls over steps or sidewalks and do not below the low-pressure warning limit drive on long stretches without WARNING! for any reason, including low snow. This will prevent damage to With these compact spare tires, do not temperature effects and natural the vehicle and the roadbed. drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). pressure loss of the tire. Temporary use spares have limited The TPMS will continue to warn the tread life. driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition persists and will not turn
280 Driving off until the tire pressure is equal or Do not use aftermarket tire sealants above the recommended cold or balance beads if your vehicle is inflation pressure. Once the low tire equipped with a TPMS, as damage pressure warning light illuminates, to the sensors may result. you must increase the tire pressure to • The system can temporarily the recommended cold inflation experience radio-electric pressure in order for the TPMS light interference emitted by devices using similar frequencies. to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve light will turn off once the system stem cap. This will prevent moisture acquires the correct tire pressure. and dirt from entering the valve The vehicle may need to be driven for stem and damage the TPMS internal up to 20 minutes above 15 mph WARNING! sensor. (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to The TPMS warns the driver that the acquire and process the updated tire pressure has decreased. This NOTE: setting. warning does not exempt the driver • Driving on a significantly from periodically checking the tires underinflated tire causes the tire to 5 and from complying with the overheat and may lead to tire prescribed tire pressure levels. failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and CAUTION! stopping ability. • The TPMS has been optimized for • The TPMS is not a substitute for the original equipment tires and proper tire maintenance, and it is wheels. TPMS pressures and the driver’s responsibility to maintain warning have been established for correct tire pressure using an the tire size equipped on your accurate tire pressure gage, even if vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may under-inflation has not reached the occur when using replacement level to trigger illumination of the equipment that is not of the same TPMS light . size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket (Continued) wheels can cause sensor damage.
281 Driving
(Continued) automatically update, the graphic • Seasonal temperature changes will display in the instrument cluster will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS stop flashing, and the TPMS light will monitor the actual tire pressure will turn off. The vehicle may need in the tire. to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for Premium System the TPMS to acquire and process the The TPMS system uses wireless updated information. technology with wheel rim mounted Tire Pressure System Fault electronic sensors to monitor tire If a system fault is detected, the TPMS pressure levels. Sensors mounted to The instrument cluster will also display light will flash for 75 seconds and each wheel as part of the valve stem a screenshot reporting the pressure then remain lit followed by a beeping transmit tire pressure readings to the values of each tire with flashing low sound. Therewith, the instrument receiver module. pressure value. cluster will display a "Service Tire The TPMS consists of the following Pressure System" message for a components: minimum of five seconds and then 5 • receiver module; display dashes (--) in place of the • four TPMS sensors; pressure value to indicate which sensor is ineffective. • various TPMS messages, which If the ignition switch is cycled, the display on the instrument cluster; sequence will repeat, in case the • warning light . system fault still persists. If the system Tire Pressure Low Warning fault no longer exists, the TPMS light The TPMS light will illuminate in will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message the instrument cluster and an acoustic Should this occur, you should stop as will no longer be displayed, and a signal will notify that tire pressure is soon as possible and inflate the tire/s pressure value will be displayed in low in one or more of the four tires. with the low pressure (the one/s place of the dashes. flashing in the instrument cluster A system fault can occur due to any of graphic) to the recommended cold the following: pressure inflation value. Once the system receives the updated tire • Signal interference due to electronic pressure value, the system will devices or driving next to facilities
282 Driving
emitting the same radio frequencies addition, the graphic in the as the TPMS sensors. instrument cluster will still display a • Installing aftermarket window flashing pressure value tinting that contains materials that corresponding to the compact tire may block radio wave signals. position. • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. The instrument cluster will also display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the "Service Tire • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 Pressure System" message is then minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), 5 followed by a graphic display with the TPMS light will flash for 75 pressure values still shown. This seconds and then remain lit. The indicates that the pressure values are instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" still being received from the TPMS Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire sensors but they may not be located in message for a minimum of five the correct vehicle position. The • The compact spare tire does not seconds and then display dashes (--) system still needs to be serviced as have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the in place of the pressure value. TPMS will not monitor the pressure long as the "Service Tire Pressure • Each subsequent ignition switch of the compact spare tire. System" message is displayed. cycle will be followed by a beeping • If you replace a tire having pressure sound, the TPMS light will flash below the low-pressure warning for 75 seconds and then remain lit. limit, with the compact spare tire, on The instrument cluster will then the next ignition switch cycle, the display a "Service Tire Pressure TPMS light will illuminate System" message for a minimum of followed by a beeping sound. In five seconds and subsequently
283 Driving
displays dashes (--) in place of the assemblies. After replacing all four minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The pressure value. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) TPMS will chime, the TPMS light with tires not equipped with Tire will flash for 75 seconds and then Pressure Monitoring System sensors, turn off. The instrument cluster will drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above then display the “Service Tire Pressure 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will System” message. chime, the TPMS light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next • Once you repair, replace or reinstall a ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no tire with the compact spare tire, the longer chime or display the “Service TPMS will update automatically. The Tire Pressure System” message in the TPMS light will turn OFF and the 5 instrument cluster but dashes (--) will graphic in the instrument cluster will remain in place of the pressure values. The instrument cluster will also display display a new pressure value instead pressure values in place of the dashes of dashes (--), as long as no tire (--). On the next ignition switch cycle pressure is below the low-pressure the “Service Tire Pressure System” warning limit in any of the four tires. message will no longer be displayed as The vehicle may need to be driven long as no system fault exists. for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to General Information acquire and process the updated This device complies with Part 15 of information. the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the TPMS Deactivation following conditions: The TPMS can be deactivated if To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four • This device may not cause harmful replacing all four tire rims with wheel wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) interference. and tire assemblies not using of TPMS with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. • This device must accept any sensors, such as winter wheel and tire Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 interference received, including
284 Driving interference that may cause Fuel Requirements undesired operation. The TPMS sensors are regulated by the The engines are designed to meet all CAUTION! MRXC4W4MA4 license. environmental regulations and • Maserati strongly recommends the provide excellent fuel economy and use of Premium unleaded fuel ONLY. performance when using unleaded Use of lesser grade fuel (other than WARNING! premium gasoline with an AKI octane Premium) will lead to reduced rating of 91 or above. AKI (Anti Knock California Proposition 65 engine performance, and poor fuel Index) is an average on the Research Operating, servicing and maintaining economy and can lead to the Octane Number, RON, and the Motor a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle Malfunction Indicator Light Octane Number, MON (RON + MON/2 can expose you to chemicals including illuminating on the instrument gives you the AKI). such as, engine exhaust, carbon cluster. Continued use of lesser grade For vehicle top performance, use monoxide, phthalates and lead, that fuel (other than Premium fuel) can unleaded premium gasoline with no which are know to the State of lead to engine misfire problems and less than 93 minimum AKI octane California to cause cancer and birth possible catalytic converter damage. rating. defects or other reproductive harm. To • The anti-pollution devices of the Poor quality gasoline can cause minimize exposure, avoid breathing vehicle require unleaded fuel to be 5 problems such as hard starting, exhaust, do not idle the engine except used at all times. Under no stalling, and hesitations. If you as necessary, service your vehicle in a circumstance, not even in an experience these symptoms, try well-ventilated area and wear gloves emergency, should leaded fuel be another brand of gasoline before or wash your hands frequently when supplied to the fuel tank, not even a considering service for the vehicle at servicing your vehicle. For more minimum quantity. This would an Authorized Maserati Dealer. information go to: irreparably damage the catalytic Besides using unleaded gasoline with www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- converters. An inefficient catalytic the proper octane rating, gasoline vehicle converter results in noxious exhaust that contain detergents, anti-corrosion emissions which damage the and stability additives are environment. recommended. Using gasoline that have these additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and Reformulated Gasoline maintain vehicle performance. Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated
285 Driving
Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline Problems that result from using Materials Added to Fuel contains oxygenates and are gasoline containing Methanol or All gasoline sold in the United States is specifically blended to reduce vehicle gasoline containing more than 10% required to contain effective emissions and improve air quality. Ethanol are not the responsibility of detergent additives. Use of additional Maserati supports the use of Maserati and may not be covered detergents or other additives is not reformulated gasoline. Properly under warranty. needed under normal conditions and blended reformulated gasoline will they would result in additional cost. provide excellent performance and MMT in Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add durability of engine and fuel system MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl anything to the fuel. components. Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a manganese containing metallic Fuel System Warnings Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends additive that is blended into some Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline to increase octane. gasoline with oxygenates such as Gasoline blended with MMT provides WARNING! Ethanol. Fuels blended with no performance advantage beyond Follow these guidelines to maintain oxygenates may be used in your gasoline of the same octane number your vehicle's performance: 5 vehicle. without MMT. Maserati recommends gasoline • The use of leaded gasoline is without MMT to be used in your prohibited by Federal and Provincial CAUTION! vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline law. Using leaded gasoline can impair DO NOT use gasoline containing may not be indicated on the gasoline engine performance and damage the Methanol or gasoline containing more pump; therefore, you should ask the emissions control system. than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends gasoline station operator whether or • The use of fuel additives, which are may result in starting and driveability not the gasoline contains MMT. now being sold as octane enhancers, problems, damage critical fuel system It is even more important to look for is not recommended. Most of these components, cause emissions to exceed gasoline without MMT in Canada, products contain high concentrations the applicable standard, and/or cause because MMT can be used at levels of methanol. Fuel system damage or the Malfunction Indicator Light to higher than those allowed in the vehicle performance problems illuminate (see “Instrument Cluster” in United States. MMT is prohibited in resulting from the use of such fuels section “Dashboard Instruments and Federal and California reformulated or additives is not the responsibility Controls”. Pump labels should clearly gasoline. of Maserati. communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
286 Driving NOTE: abnormal conditions repaired Refueling Intentional tampering with the promptly. Until repaired, drive with emissions control system can result in all side windows fully open. Fuel Filler Neck Access civil penalties civil penalties and could To access the fuel filler neck, the filler void the vehicle warranty. door must be unlocked. From outside WARNING! the vehicle, this can only be done by Carbon Monoxide Warnings California Proposition 65 pressing the unlock or the lock Operating, servicing and maintaining button on the key fob RKE a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle transmitter, in the same way as if WARNING! can expose you to chemicals including opening or closing the doors. If any of Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust such as, engine exhaust, carbon the door lock controls is pressed from gases is deadly. Follow the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that inside the vehicle, the filler door will precautions below to prevent carbon which are know to the State of still remain open to allow refueling. monoxide poisoning: California to cause cancer and birth • Press the indicated area on the filler • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They defects or other reproductive harm. To door, which is located on the rear contain carbon monoxide, a minimize exposure, avoid breathing left side of the vehicle: the filler 5 colorless and odorless gas, which exhaust, do not idle the engine except door will open completely. can kill. Never run the engine in a as necessary, service your vehicle in a closed area, such as a garage, and well-ventilated area and wear gloves never sit in a parked vehicle with or wash your hands frequently when the engine running for an extended servicing your vehicle. For more period. If the vehicle is stopped in information go to: an open area with the engine www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- running for more than a short vehicle period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
287 Driving
fuel filler door, when opened. • Close the fuel filler door. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel CAUTION! filler door is open or the tank is To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, being filled. do not “top off” the fuel tank after • Never add fuel when the engine is filling. running. This violates most fire-prevention regulations and may Emergency Refueling Funnel cause the Malfunction Indicator A funnel is provided (in the trunk in Light to turn on (see “Instrument the tool box container) for emergency Refill the Tank Cluster” in section “Dashboard refueling with a gas can. The fuel filler is sealed by an internal Instruments and Controls”). closing tab, which is opened by the fuel nozzle of the service station when • Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank refueling. capacity is indicated in the “Refillings” table in section 5 Only a nozzle of the suitable size can open the closing tab. “Features and Specifications”. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the shuts off, the fuel tank is basically filler. full: it is possible to further ensure NOTE: refueling by enabling the fuel nozzle additional fuel supply until two Only with a correct size nozzle you can clicks. After the two additional clicks, refuel. the amount of fuel allowed by the system is very low, we recommend therefore not to persist further. WARNING! • Wait approximately 10 seconds • To avoid the risk of fire, do not before removing the fuel nozzle in approach the filler with open flames order to ensure completed supply of or cigarettes! residual fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the fuel filler door area. • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the • Remove the fuel nozzle.
288 Driving • Pull the release cable moderately to Driving Conditions avoid its possible break. It's not WARNING! possible to feel or hear the Before the Trip A fire may result if fuel is pumped unlocking of the fuel filler door into a portable container that is inside actuator. Check the following at regular of a vehicle. You could be burned. intervals and always before long trips: Always place gas containers outside • tire pressure and condition; the vehicle while filling. • levels of fluids and lubricants; • conditions of the windshield wiper Emergency Fuel Filler Door blades; Release • clean the glass on the external light If you are unable to unlock the fuel and all other glass surfaces; filler door using the key fob RKE • proper operation of the indicator transmitter, use the fuel filler door lights and of the external lights. emergency release located in the trunk. • Then open normally the fuel filler CAUTION! 5 • Open the trunk lid (see “Trunk Lid door. Operation” in section “Before It is however advisable to perform Starting”). these checks at least every 600 mi (1000 km) and always following the • Lift the access cover on the left side maintenance schedule reported in of the trunk. section “Maintenance and Care”. Before you drive: • adjust seat position, steering wheel, adjustable pedals (if equipped with) and rearview mirrors in order to have the best driving position; • ensure that nothing (mat covers, etc.) is obstructing the pedals movement;
289 Driving
• carefully arrange and secure any • Drive carefully. Night conditions Some advices for driving in the rain are objects in the trunk, to prevent them demand more focus and attention. listed below. from moving forward in case of • Reduce your speed, especially on • Reduce your speed and keep a sudden stops; roads with no streetlights. greater safety distance from the • avoid heavy meals before a trip. A • Stop at early signs of drowsiness. vehicles in front of you. High speed light snack helps keep your reflexes Continuing to drive would be a risk may result in a loss of vehicle control. sharp. In particular, avoid drinking for yourself and for others. Have a • When driving on wet or slushy roads, alcohol. rest before continuing your trip. it is possible for a wedge of water to • Keep the vehicle at a greater build up between the tire and road distance from vehicles in front of you surface. This is known as WARNING! than you would during the day: it is aquaplaning and may cause partial Passengers must only travel seated in difficult to assess the speed of other or complete loss of vehicle control the vehicle seats, with the seat belts vehicles when you only see the lights. and stopping ability. To reduce this fastened. Always check that the driver • Use the high beams only outside of possibility: slow down if the road has and all passengers have the seat belts densely-populated areas and when standing water or puddles. correctly fastened. you are sure that they will not • Heavy rain substantially reduces 5 disturb other drivers. visibility. In these circumstances, even Safe Driving • When another vehicle is during the day, turn on the low beams, to be more visible to other Although the vehicle is equipped with approaching, switch from high drivers. active and passive safety devices, the beams (if on) to low beams. driver's conduct is always a decisive • Keep lights and headlights clean. • Set the air conditioning and heating factor for road safety. • Outside of densely-populated areas, system controls on the defogging Some simple rules for traveling safely beware of animals crossing the road. function, in order to avoid any in different conditions are listed visibility problem. Driving in the Rain below. Some of them will probably • Periodically check the conditions of already sound familiar but, in any case, Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On the windshield wiper blades. it would be useful to read them a wet road all maneuvers are more • In low grip conditions use “I.C.E.” carefully. difficult since wheel grip on the road is driving mode (see chapters “Drive significantly reduced. This means that Driving at Night Mode” in this section). braking distances increase considerably The main guidelines to follow when and road grip decreases. driving at night are set out below.
290 Driving
Driving in Fog Driving on Snow or Ice
If the fog is dense, avoid traveling if CAUTION! Please consider some general advice possible. for driving in these conditions, listed Be aware that rear fog lights can When driving in mist, blanket fog or below. bother the drivers following your when there is the possibility of banks vehicle: when visibility is back to • Maintain a very moderate speed. of fog, please consider some advices normal, turn off these lights. • Fit snow chains or specific tires if the listed below. road is covered with snow: see the • Keep a moderate speed. Driving in the Mountains paragraphs “Tires – General • Even in daytime, turn on the low Mountain roads usually have many Information” in this section. beams and rear fog lights. Do not narrow turns and curves, tunnels and • We recommend you to activate the use the high beams. steep uphill or downhill slopes: please “I.C.E.” mode (see chapters “Drive • Remember that fog creates consider some advices listed below. Mode” in this section). dampness on the asphalt and thus • Drive at a moderate speed, avoid • During the winter season, even any type of maneuver is more “cutting” corners. apparently dry roads can have icy difficult and braking distances are • When driving inside a tunnel in sections. Be careful when crossing extended. daylight turn on the low beams in bridges, viaducts and roads that 5 • Keep a safe distance from the advance; avoid high beams and be have little exposure to the sun and vehicle in front of you. aware of the rapid brightness are bordered by trees and rocks. • Avoid sudden changes in speed as change. Avoid abrupt maneuvers They may be icy. much as possible. that could be dangerous for the • Keep an ample safe distance from • Whenever possible, avoid following vehicle. the vehicles in front of you. overtaking. • Never coast downhill with the • If you are forced to stop the vehicle engine off or in neutral. (breakdowns, impossibility of • Remember that passing other WARNING! proceeding due to poor visibility, vehicles when driving uphill is slower • Rapid acceleration on slippery etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the and thus requires more free distance surfaces is dangerous. Unequal travel lane. Then turn on the hazard on the road. If you are being traction can cause sudden pulling of warning flashers and, if possible, the overtaken on a hill, slow down and the driving wheels. You could lose low beams. allow the other vehicle to pass. control of the vehicle and possibly (Continued)
291 Driving
(Continued) before driving through the standing • Driving through standing water have a collision. Accelerate slowly water. limits your vehicle braking and carefully whenever there is • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when capabilities, which increases likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, driving through standing water. This stopping distances. Therefore, after wet mud, loose sand, etc.). will minimize wave effects. driving through standing water, • Do not drive on or across a road or • Driving through standing water may drive slowly and lightly press on the path where water is flowing and/or cause damage to your vehicle brake pedal several times to rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing drivetrain components. After driving progressively dry the brakes discs water can wear away the road or through standing water, do not drive if and pads. path surface and cause your vehicle you are not sure about drivetrain • Getting water inside your vehicle to sink into deeper water. condition. Such damage is not covered engine can cause it to lock up and Furthermore, flowing and/or rising by the New Vehicle Warranty. stall out. water can carry your vehicle away • Getting water inside your vehicle • Failure to follow these warnings swiftly. Failure to follow this engine can cause it to lock up and may result in injuries that are serious warning may result in injuries that stall out, and cause serious internal or fatal to you, your passengers, and are serious or fatal to you, your damage to the engine. Such damage others around you. passengers, and others around you. 5 is not covered by the New Vehicle Although your vehicle is capable of Warranty. driving through shallow standing • After driving through standing water water, consider the following Cautions always have the fluids (engine oil, and Warnings before doing so. transmission oil, etc) checked for contamination at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through WARNING! standing water that is deeper than • Driving through standing water 47 in (150 mm). limits your vehicle traction • Determine the condition of the road capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph or the path that is under water and if (8 km/h) when driving through there are any obstacles in the way standing water.
292 6 – In an Emergency
ToolKit...... 294 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 295 In the Event of an Accident ...... 295 In case of a Punctured Tire ...... 296 Emergency Release of the Parking Brake ...... 301 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position ...... 301 Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure ...... 302 Towing a Disabled Vehicle ...... 304
293 In an Emergency Tool Kit The tools inserted in the container above the compact spare wheel are The tools are located in the trunk the following: inside a preformed container and are available by lifting the ground Ref. Description coverage. 1 Double torx + cross-head screwdriver 2 8 mm Allen wrench for unscrewing the fastening nut of the reverse light cluster 3 Electric compressor complete with pressure gauge for inflating the compact spare wheel 4 Extended spanner with rubber coated handle for unscrewing/ tightening the wheel nuts 5 Adapter for wheel extended spanner 6 Tow hook 7 Funnel for emergency supply 8 Jack
6
294 In an Emergency Hazard Warning Flashers though the ignition is placed in the In the Event of an OFF position. The hazard warning flashers switch is Accident located in the central console in front It is important always to keep calm. of the transmission lever. CAUTION! • If not directly involved, stop at a safe • When the hazard warning flashers distance of at least ten yards are activated, the turn signals (meters) away from the accident control is disabled. area. • With extended use the hazard • If on a highway, stop without warning flashers may wear down obstructing the emergency lane and your battery. be especially careful if you need to exit the vehicle. • Turn off the engine and switch on the hazard warning flashers. Press the switch to turn on the hazard • At night, illuminate the accident warning flashers to warn oncoming area with the headlights. traffic of an emergency. When these • Always act with caution to avoid the lights illuminate, the turn signals, the risk of being crashed into by other drivers. related warning lights on the 6 instrument cluster and the button • Indicate that an accident has start flashing. occurred by placing the emergency Press the switch a second time to turn triangle (if equipped) in a well off the hazard warning flashers. visible position and at the prescribed This is an emergency warning system distance. and it should not be used when the • Call the emergency services, vehicle is in motion. Use it when your providing as much information as vehicle is disabled and it is creating a possible. On the highway, use the safety hazard for other motorists. special call boxes. When you must leave the vehicle to • Remove the ignition key (if present) seek assistance, the hazard warning from the vehicles involved. flashers will continue to operate even
295 In an Emergency • If fuel or other chemical products can which are know to the State of In case of a Punctured Tire be smelled, do not smoke and ask California to cause cancer and birth people around you to put their defects or other reproductive harm. To If the vehicle is equipped with a cigarettes out. minimize exposure, avoid breathing compact spare wheel. • To extinguish fires, even small ones, exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a Using the Compact Spare use a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand Wheel or earth. Never use water. well-ventilated area and wear gloves • In multiple accidents occurred on or wash your hands frequently when NOTE: servicing your vehicle. For more highways, particularly where visibility The compact spare wheel is supplied in information go to: is poor, there is a high risk of being aluminium or steel: the pictures show www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- involved in other collisions. Leave the the one in aluminium. vehicle immediately and move away vehicle from the area. The compact spare wheel is stored in the trunk and is supplied deflated in In case of Injured Persons order to limit the amount of space • Never leave the injured person alone. occupied. An electric compressor is also Persons not directly involved in the provided for inflating. In the event of accident are also required to give a tire puncture, proceed as follows. assistance. • Stop the vehicle in a place that does 6 • Do not crowd around injured not constitute a danger to traffic and persons. where the wheel can be changed • Reassure the injured person that help safely. The vehicle must be level and is on the way. on firm ground. • Select the P (Park) mode and then engage manually the electric parking WARNING! brake and move the ignition switch California Proposition 65 to OFF position. Operating, servicing and maintaining • If necessary, turn the hazard warning a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle flashers on and place the warning can expose you to chemicals including triangle (if equipped) at the required such as, engine exhaust, carbon distance. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
296 In an Emergency
• Insert the power plug into one of the available power outlets fitted in WARNING! the trunk or passenger • The jack should be used on level compartment. firm ground wherever possible. • Set the ignition device on ACC or • It is recommended that the wheels RUN position. of the vehicle be chocked, and that • Turn the compressor on by pressing no person should remain in a vehicle the switch. that is being jacked. • Stop the compressor by pressing the • If the vehicle has been stopped on a switch again, when the pressure slope or an uneven surface, place • Unscrew and pull out the locking indicated by the gauge reaches the chocks or other suitable items in wheel knob. recommended level (see “Tire front of or behind the wheels to Inflation Pressure” in section stop the vehicle from moving. “Features and Specifications”) and • Never start or run the engine with screw the cap on the compact spare the vehicle on a jack. wheel valve. • No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack. 6 • Lift the ground coverage of the trunk. • Take the tools for changing the • Take the container and the compact wheel (indicated in picture) from the spare wheel out of the trunk. container. • Remove from the compressor case the inflation hose and the cable with a plug for the power outlet. • Unscrew the valve cap of the compact spare wheel and screw the fitting of the inflation hose onto the valve.
297 In an Emergency
specific fitting wrench provided with the “Wheel Security Stud Bolt Kit”, CAUTION! available in the “Genuine • In order to obtain a more accurate Accessories” range. reading, the compressor should be • Fit the compact spare wheel with the switched off when checking the tire valve stem facing outward, securing pressure of the compact spare wheel it with the five bolts previously on the pressure gauge. removed. • Do not run the compressor for more • Turn the lever of the jack to lower than 20 minutes: there is a risk it the vehicle and remove the jack. could overheat. Also, prolonged • Place the jack near the wheel to be • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately power absorption may discharge the changed as illustrated. tightening diametrically opposite. battery, subsequently preventing the • Make sure that the head of the jack engine from starting. is correctly inserted in one of the • The compressor has been designed slots beneath the rocker panel. WARNING! exclusively to inflate compact spare • FOR ALUMINIUM SPARE WHEEL wheels; do not use it to inflate air Observe the tightening torque for mattresses, floatation devices, etc. WARNING! the bolts securing the spare wheel • Never position yourself under a (72 ± 7 lbf·ft/ 98 ± 10 Nm). • Remove the center cover of the jacked vehicle. 6 wheel rim (if equipped) levering into • FOR STEEL SPARE WHEEL the provided groove on the outer • Never use the jack to carry out Observe the tightening torque for ledge of the cover. maintenance or repairs under the the bolts securing the spare wheel vehicle. (63 ± 7 lbf·ft/ 86 ± 10 Nm). • Fit the adapter on the wrench. Extend the wrench as shown, then • To avoid the risk of forcing the loosen by approximately one turn, • Turn the jack lever until the wheel is vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the five bolts on the wheel to be raised a few centimeters off the the wheel bolts fully until the changed. ground. vehicle has been lowered. Failure to • Completely unscrew the five bolts follow this warning may result in and remove the wheel. In case a personal injury. wheel security stud bolt is installed, it can only be removed by using the
298 In an Emergency
compact spare wheel; when this limit is exceeded, the stability, road WARNING! holding and braking of the vehicle • The spare wheel is narrower than will be compromised. Avoid standard wheels and must only be accelerating to full speed, heavy used to travel the distance required braking and fast cornering. to reach a service station, where the • The compact spare wheel must be punctured tire can be repaired or inflated to the recommended tire replaced. pressure (see “Tire Inflation • Do not exceed a maximum speed of Pressure” in section “Features and 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the Specifications”). • For safety reasons, it is absolutely forbidden to drive with more than one compact spare wheel fitted on the vehicle. • Snow chains cannot be fitted on the compact spare wheel. • The spare wheel can travel a maximum of 1,800 mi (3.000 km). 6 To Refit the Standard Wheel with Repaired or Replaced Tire • Following the procedure and the caution described above, raise the vehicle and remove the compact spare wheel reusing the supplied wrench with adapter, suitably extended. • Fit the standard wheel with repaired or replaced tire.
299 In an Emergency
• Tighten the original bolts on the • fix everything in place with the • lower the ground coverage at the wheel. locking knob; bottom of the trunk. • Lower the vehicle and remove the • wrap the power cable and the jack. inflation hose inside the compressor • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately case; tightening diametrically opposite.
• place the compressor, the jack, the wrench and the adapter in the container inside the compact spare WARNING! wheel; 6 Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the wheels (72 ± 7 lbf·ft / 98 ± 10 Nm).
• Reassemble the center cover (if equipped) on the wheel rim. Once finished: • completely deflate the compact spare wheel by pressing on the valve with the overhang of the valve cap; • place the compact spare wheel and • reposition the other tools; tool container in the trunk;
300 In an Emergency Emergency Release of the Transmission Manual Parking Brake Release of P (Park) In the event the electric parking brake Position locks due to a system failure (see The manual disengagement of the “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”), shift from P (Park) has the purpose to it is not possible to move the vehicle, allow towing the vehicle if not since the actuator that operates on normally possible using the shift lever the brake pad inside each rear caliper (such as inability to start the engine). will lock the rear wheels. This procedure is exclusively intended After verifying that the battery is for emergency situations, only! • With the tip of a screwdriver press sufficiently charged (otherwise use an the clip shown in the picture box external power source connected to and lift the strap up to release the the vehicle electric system to operate transmission from the P (Park) the EPB control lever and try to unlock WARNING! position. The new position will allow the parking brake), for moving the Always secure your vehicle by fully vehicle moving and towing. applying the parking brake, before vehicle it is necessary to force the • Release the parking brake only when activating the manual park release. actuator to release the rear brake the vehicle is securely connected to a Activating the manual park release discs. Contact the Authorized Maserati tow vehicle. Dealer to carry out this operation. could allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking 6 brake. Activating the manual park release on an unsecured vehicle could WARNING! lead to serious injury or death for If the parking brake has been those in or around the vehicle. activated in manual or automatic mode and it is not possible to release The cover that allows the emergency it by operating on the lever of the manual park release is located on the central console, do not move the left part of the driver’s foot well. vehicle since rear brake calipers might • Lift the mat on the driver side to be damaged. For more information on access the cover. vehicle towing see "Towing a Disabled • Slip the cover from its seat. Vehicle" chapter in this section.
301 In an Emergency Auxiliary Jump-Start if it is not secured by the parking brake. Activating the manual park Procedure CAUTION! release on an unsecured vehicle could If your vehicle has a discharged battery • To jump start a vehicle do not use a lead to serious injury or death for it can be jump-started using a set of portable battery, a booster pack or those in or around the vehicle. jumper cables and a battery of another any other booster source with a vehicle or by using a portable battery system voltage greater than 14 Volts NOTE: booster. It is necessary to have proper or damage to the battery, starter If you need to disconnect the battery jumper cables in order to connect the motor, alternator or electrical system from the vehicle electrical system, see booster battery to the remote posts of of the vehicle with the discharged “Maintenance — Free Battery” in the discharged battery. Booster cables battery may occur. section “Maintenance and Care”). have positive and negative terminal • Do not use a battery charger for clamps and are identified by the emergency starting under any sheath color (red = positive, black = circumstances. You could damage the negative). electronic systems, particularly the WARNING! control units managing the ignition California Proposition 65 NOTE: and fuel supply functions. Operating, servicing and maintaining An Authorized Maserati Dealer can • If the battery is completely a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle provide you with information about discharged when the windows are can expose you to chemicals including the “Maserati Jumper Cables Kit”, fully raised, open the door with the such as, engine exhaust, carbon 6 available in the “Genuine Accessories” utmost care; do not close the door monoxide, phthalates and lead, that range. again until it is possible to lower the which are know to the State of Jump-starting can be dangerous if window. California to cause cancer and birth done improperly so please follow the defects or other reproductive harm. To procedures in this section carefully. minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except NOTE: WARNING! as necessary, service your vehicle in a When using a portable battery booster Always secure your vehicle by fully well-ventilated area and wear gloves pack, follow the battery applying the parking brake, before or wash your hands frequently when manufacturer’s operating instructions activating the manual park release. servicing your vehicle. For more and precautions. Activating the manual park release information go to: could allow your vehicle to roll away
302 In an Emergency www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Jump-Start Procedure • Connect one terminal clamp of the vehicle positive jumper cable to the positive (+) remote post of the vehicle with the discharged battery after lifting Battery Remote Posts Position WARNING! the protection cap of the cable • Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan For easier operation, remote battery indicated on the external side of the whenever the engine hood is raised. posts for jumpstarting are located in integrated power module. the engine compartment while the It can start anytime the ignition battery is stored in the trunk. switch is on. You could be injured by Open the engine hood (see “Hood the moving fan blades. Operation” in section “Before • Remove any metal jewelry such as Starting”) the positive remote post (+) watch bands or bracelets that might and the negative remote post (-) are make an inadvertent electrical easily recognizable by the icons contact. You could be seriously labeled on the integrated power injured. module. • Do not allow the vehicles involved in the jumpstarting operation to touch each other as this could • Connect the other terminal clamp of establish a ground connection and the positive (+) jumper cable to the cause personal injury. positive (+) post of the booster 6 • Turn off the heater, radio, and all battery. unnecessary electrical accessories. • Connect one terminal clamp of the • Set the parking brake, shift the negative jumper cable to the automatic transmission into P (Park) negative (-) post of the booster and turn the ignition to OFF. battery. • If using another vehicle to jumpstart • Connect the other terminal clamp of the battery, park the vehicle within the negative (-) jumper cable to the the jumper cables reach and set the remote negative (-) post of the parking brake and make sure the vehicle with the discharged battery ignition is off. as rendered.
303 In an Emergency • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the Towing a Disabled Vehicle positive jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the Proper towing or lifting equipment is discharged vehicle. required to prevent damage to your vehicle. NOTE: If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the CAUTION! battery and charging system inspected at Any improper maneuver and use of an Authorized Maserati Dealer center. unsuitable equipment for recovering vehicle in an emergency from off road • Start the engine in the vehicle that location could seriously damage the has the booster battery, let the vehicle. Contact an Authorized engine idle a few minutes, and then WARNING! Maserati Dealer. start the engine in the vehicle with California Proposition 65 the discharged battery. If using a Operating, servicing and maintaining portable battery booster, wait a few Manual Release of Transmission a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle with Low Battery seconds after connecting the cables, can expose you to chemicals including before starting the booster vehicle. such as, engine exhaust, carbon In order to push or tow the vehicle if Once the engine is started, remove the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that unable to shift the transmission out of jumper cables in the reverse sequence. 6 which are know to the State of P (Park) (such as a discharged battery), • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the California to cause cancer and birth a manual park release is available. In negative (-) jumper cable from the defects or other reproductive harm. To this case it is necessary to manually remote negative (-) post of the minimize exposure, avoid breathing release the shift lever and release the vehicle with the discharged battery. exhaust, do not idle the engine except parking brake if inserted (see “Emergency Release of the Parking • Disconnect the other terminal clamp as necessary, service your vehicle in a Brake” in this section). of the negative jumper cable from well-ventilated area and wear gloves Follow the steps as indicated in the negative (-) post of the booster or wash your hands frequently when “Transmission Manual Release of P battery. servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: (Park) Position” in this section to • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the manually disengage the transmission. positive (+) jumper cable from the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- positive (+) post of the booster vehicle battery.
304 In an Emergency
Vehicle Towing Conditions If this is not observed, when the ESC is Use the Tow Hook of the Tool active, the ECU will store a Maserati only allows vehicle towing Kit malfunction and the relative warning either on a flatbed or with all four light will illuminate on the wheels off the ground. instrument cluster display. This CAUTION! Towing an RWD Vehicle requires the intervention of an The tow hook should only be used for If flatbed equipment is not available, Authorized Maserati Dealer to reset towing the car on flat roads. Do not and the transmission is still operable, a the system. use the tow hook to remove the car RWD vehicle may be flat towed (with that is stuck on off road stretches. all four wheels on the ground) under Towing an AWD Vehicle the following conditions. The tow hook is also used to tow the vehicle on the platform of a tow truck. • The shift lever must be in N WARNING! The tow hook is contained in the tool (Neutral). Single axle towing or use of a tow kit (see “Tool Kit” in this section) and • The distance to be traveled must not dolly is not allowed since it will must be screwed in its seat accessible exceed 30 mi (50 km). severely damage components of an behind the front grille, right-hand • The towing speed must not exceed AWD vehicle. side. 30 mph (50 km/h). If the transmission is not operable, or the RWD vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or farther than WARNING! 6 30 mi (50 km) (for example on a Use of a tow dolly on front wheels is highway), tow with the rear driving strictly forbidden since front wheels wheels off the ground and on a may still receive a residual amount of platform of a rescue vehicle, or with torque and disengage the vehicle the rear wheels raised using a wheel from the tow dolly and affect safety lift. of both rescuers and other road users. • Carefully clean the threaded seat CAUTION! before screwing the hook. If you have to tow the RWD vehicle • Screw the tow hook into its seat for with 2 wheels raised, ensure that the at least 11 turns. ignition switch is in the OFF position.
305 In an Emergency
NOTE: Maximum work angle of towing cable: 15°.
6
306 7 – Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance Service ...... 308 Scheduled Service Plan ...... 309 Maintenance Procedures ...... 314 Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 322 Fuse Replacement ...... 327 Bulb Replacement ...... 334 A/C System Maintenance ...... 338 Wheels Maintenance ...... 339 Bodywork Maintenance and Care ...... 341 Interior Maintenance and Care ...... 344 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods ...... 345 Restarting the Vehicle ...... 345 Battery Statement ...... 346
307 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12,500 mi Service CAUTION! (20,000 km) or at least after 1 year. The Scheduled Maintenance services Correct maintenance is clearly the best are prescribed by the Manufacturer. way to guarantee vehicle performance Failure to have the services carried out and safety features, ensure respect for CAUTION! can affect your warranty. the environment and low operating Failure to perform the required costs. The Scheduled Maintenance service is maintenance items may result in provided by an Authorized Maserati damage to the vehicle. NOTE: Dealer. In the event that, when a Also remember that the observance of service is performed, further Scheduled Maintenance the maintenance procedures is replacements or repairs are found to (Service) Indicator essential for keeping your vehicle be necessary in addition to the operating properly. Not adhering to scheduled operations, these can be The service indicator system will the “Scheduled Service Plan” can carried out only with the specific remind you the deadline for the impact your vehicle’s warranty. consent of the Customer. maintenance program. The indicator light on the Interval Running Coupons instrument cluster flashes for approx. 5 CAUTION! seconds displaying the message backed Maserati has therefore provided for a You are advised to notify the by a beeping sound, indicating that series of checks and maintenance Authorized Maserati Dealer of any the next scheduled maintenance is due operations involving the 1st service minor operating problem, without or has already overdue (see paragraph when the vehicle mileage reaches waiting for the next scheduled service. ”TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or after 1 year of the Set Modes/ Functions” in of the vehicle's life, and subsequently 7 chapter “Instrument Cluster” of every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or every NOTE: section “Dashboard Instruments and year. • Change your vehicle's oil if it has Controls” for more details). After the 6th service, maintenance been 1 year since your last oil must be restarted with the operations change. scheduled for the 1st,2nd and 3rd • Change your engine oil more often if service. you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time or short trips without reaching operating temperature.
308 Maintenance and Care An Authorized Maserati Dealer will Scheduled Service Plan reset the service indicator message after completing the scheduled The Scheduled Maintenance services maintenance operations. listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Maserati recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access to factory-approved information, The service indicator and message will genuine Maserati parts, and specially illuminate approximately from 620 mi designed electronic and mechanical (1000 km) or 30 days to the next tools that can help prevent future scheduled maintenance. costly repairs. 7 Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. NOTE: The service indicator will not monitor the time elapsed from the last scheduled maintenance.
309 Maintenance and Care
Main Operations/Service Coupons
Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year Service coupons 1° 2° 3° 4° Available Pre-Paid Maintenance 5° 6° Main operations Program Vehicle road test III Check with Maserati Diagnosis IIIIII Engine oil and filter RRRRRR Engine coolant level IIIIII Engine check for leaks IIIIII Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) III Air filter R IIIRII Belt for alternator Replace every time the part is removed IIIRII Belt for water pump and air conditioning compressor Replace every time the part is removed Spark plugs RR Intercooler check for leaks IIIIII 7 IIIIII Brake fluid Replace every 2 years Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster IIIIII warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check IIIIII Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear III under-chassis
310 Maintenance and Care
Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year Service coupons 1° 2° 3° 4° Available Pre-Paid Maintenance 5° 6° Main operations Program Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts IIIIII Pollen filter RRR Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer IIIIII Headlight leveling IIIIII Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, III engine compartment lid and luggage compartment Condition of leather interiors III I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation. R = Replace.
Periodic Maintenance • operation of windshield monoxide, phthalates and lead, that washer/wiper system and wear of which are know to the State of Every 600 mi (1,000 km) or before windshield wiper blades. California to cause cancer and birth long journeys defects or other reproductive harm. To Check: Every 1,900 mi (3,000 km) Check and top up, if required, the minimize exposure, avoid breathing • engine coolant; engine oil level. exhaust, do not idle the engine except • brake fluid; as necessary, service your vehicle in a 7 • windshield washer fluid level; well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when • tire inflation pressure and condition; WARNING! servicing your vehicle. For more • operation of lighting system California Proposition 65 information go to: (headlights, direction indicators, Operating, servicing and maintaining www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- hazard warning flashers, etc.); a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
311 Maintenance and Care
Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use • check and, if necessary, replace On Board Diagnostic System pollen filter of the A/C system; If the car is mainly used under one of Your vehicle is equipped with a the following conditions: • check and, if necessary, replace air sophisticated on board diagnostic cleaner filter. • off-road; system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the • short, repeated journeys (less than emissions, engine, and automatic 4-5 mi/7-8 km) at sub-zero outside CAUTION! transmission control systems. When temperatures; All maintenance operations for the these systems are operating properly, vehicle must be carried out by an • engine often idling or driving long your vehicle will provide excellent Authorized Maserati Dealer. For distances at low speeds or long performance and fuel economy, as routine and minor maintenance periods of idleness; well as engine emissions suited to operations which you can carry out you should perform the following current government regulations. yourself, make sure that you have the inspections more frequently than If any of these systems require service, necessary experience and always use recommended on the “Scheduled the OBD II system will turn on the suitable equipment, original Maserati Service Plan”: Malfunction Indicator Light on the spare parts and the prescribed fluids. • check front disc brake pad conditions instrument cluster display (refer to Shall this not be the case, do not carry and wear; “Instrument Cluster” in section any operation on your own and “Dashboard Instruments and • check cleanliness of hood and trunk contact an Authorized Maserati Controls”). The system stores as well locks, cleanliness and lubrication of Dealer. linkage; diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service • visually inspect conditions of: engine, technician by performing repairs. transmission, pipes and hoses Although the vehicle will be driveable (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and and will not need towing, contact an 7 rubber elements (boots - sleeves - Authorized Maserati Dealer for service bushes - etc.); as soon as possible. • check battery charge; • visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; CAUTION! • check and, if necessary, change • Prolonged driving with the MIL engine oil and replace oil filter; on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could
312 Maintenance and Care
also affect fuel economy and To check if your vehicle's OBD II system for your OBD II system to update. A driveability. The vehicle must be is ready, you must do the following: recheck with the above test routine serviced before any emissions tests 1. Press the ignition device to the may then indicate that the system is can be performed. RUN position, but do not crank or now ready. • If the MIL is flashing while the start the engine. Regardless of whether your vehicle's engine is running, severe catalytic OBD II system is ready or not, if the 2. As soon as you press the ignition converter damage and power loss MIL is illuminated during normal device to turn the engine On, you will soon occur. Immediate service at vehicle operation you should have will see the MIL remain an Authorized Maserati Dealer is your vehicle serviced before going to illuminated for 15 seconds, this is a required. the I/M station. The I/M station can fail normal bulb check. your vehicle because the MIL is on Emissions Inspection and 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, with the engine running. one of two things will happen: Maintenance Programs • Spare Parts The MIL will remain In some localities, it may be a legal Use of genuine Maserati parts for illuminated and a message error requirement to pass an inspection of normal or scheduled maintenance and will appear on your instrument your vehicle's emissions control repairs is highly recommended to cluster. This means that your system. Failure to pass could prevent ensure excellent performance. vehicle's OBD II system is not vehicle registration. For states that Damage or failures caused by ready and you should not require an Inspection and non-genuine spare parts used for proceed to the I/M station. Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies maintenance and repairs will not be • the “Malfunction Indicator Light ” The MIL will turn Off. This covered by the manufacturer's warranty. is functioning and is not on when the means that your vehicle's OBD II engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready and you can Dealer Service system is ready for testing. proceed to the I/M station. An Authorized Maserati Dealer has 7 Normally, the OBD II system will be the qualified service personnel, special ready. The OBD II system may not be If your OBD II system is not ready, you tools, and equipment to perform all ready if your vehicle was recently should see an Authorized Maserati service operations in an expert serviced, recently had a dead battery Dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle manner. Service Manuals are available or a battery replacement. If the OBD II was recently serviced or had a battery which include detailed service system should be determined not failure or replacement, you may need information for your vehicle. Refer to ready for the I/M test, your vehicle to do nothing more than drive your these Service Manuals before may fail the test. vehicle as you normally would in order attempting any procedure yourself.
313 Maintenance and Care Intentional tampering with emissions Maintenance Procedures vehicle and also allow extended control systems may void your maintenance intervals. Do not use warranty and could result in civil The following pages contain the chemical flushes for washing as the penalties. “required” maintenance standards chemicals can damage your engine, determined by Maserati engineers. transmission, power steering or air Besides those maintenance items conditioning. Such damages are not WARNING! specified in the “Scheduled Service covered by the New Vehicle Limited You can be badly injured working on Plan”, there are other components Warranty. If a flush is needed or around a motor vehicle. Take your which may require service or because of component malfunction, vehicle to an Authorized Maserati replacement in the future. use only the specified fluid for the Dealer. To perform most of the services, it is flushing procedure. necessary to open the hood (see “Hood Operation” in section “Before Maintenance Service WARNING! Starting”). Components California Proposition 65 The following images show the Operating, servicing and maintaining position of the components involved in 1 Engine oil dipstick. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle the maintenance service. can expose you to chemicals including 2 Engine oil filler neck. such as, engine exhaust, carbon 3 Air cleaner filters. CAUTION! monoxide, phthalates and lead, that 4 Engine coolant expansion which are know to the State of • Failure to properly maintain your reservoir cap. California to cause cancer and birth vehicle or perform repairs and service 5 Coolant reservoir cap for defects or other reproductive harm. To when necessary could result in more transmission cooling system. minimize exposure, avoid breathing costly repairs, damage to other 7 exhaust, do not idle the engine except components or negatively impact 6 Washer fluid reservoir cap. as necessary, service your vehicle in a vehicle performance. Immediately 7 Brake fluid reservoir access well-ventilated area and wear gloves have potential malfunctions cover. examined by an Authorized Maserati or wash your hands frequently when 8 A/C pollen filter access cover. servicing your vehicle. For more Dealer or a qualified repair center. 9 Integrated power module information go to: • Your vehicle has been equipped with (fuses). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- improved fluids that protect the vehicle performance and durability of your
314 Maintenance and Care
Level Checks the used oil and fluids in compliance Engine Coolant Level Check with the regulations in force and in Your vehicle has been equipped with an environment-friendly manner. an improved engine coolant ENVIRONMENTAL! • All equipment used for fluids (antifreeze) that offers high • The engine oils and fluids used replacement (gloves, cloths, protection against corrosion, freezing contain substances that are containers, etc) must be disposed of and allows extended maintenance dangerous to the environment. For in compliance with the regulations intervals. To prevent reducing replacement you are advised to in force. extended maintenance periods, it is contact the Authorized Maserati important to use original engine Dealer, where all the necessary coolant (antifreeze) when adding equipment is available to dispose of coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze) use pure water only, such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of impure water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) 7 if temperatures below −35°F (−37°C) are forecast. Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the vehicle.
315 Maintenance and Care
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as WARNING! the engine operating temperature is • Never add engine coolant satisfactory, the coolant bottle only (antifreeze) when the engine is hot. needs to be checked once a month. Do not loosen or remove the cap of With the engine off and cold, the level the engine coolant bottle to cool a of the coolant in the bottle on the left hot engine. Heat causes pressure to side of the engine compartment build up in the cooling system. To should be between the ranges prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the indicated on the bottle and inside the • When additional engine coolant system is hot or under pressure. filler neck. (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added • When adding coolant do not use a to the coolant bottle after removing pressure cap other than the one the cap. Do not overfill. specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. • Once the desired level is reached, reassemble and firmly close cap of the bottle. • If frequent engine coolant WARNING! (antifreeze) additions are required, California Proposition 65 or if the level in the coolant recovery Operating, servicing and maintaining bottle does not drop when the a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle engine cools, the cooling system can expose you to chemicals including 7 should be tested by an Authorized such as, engine exhaust, carbon Maserati Dealer. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • Keep the front of the radiator and which are know to the State of the condenser clean. California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
316 Maintenance and Care well-ventilated area and wear gloves fluid (see “Refillings” in section or wash your hands frequently when “Features and Specifications”). WARNING! servicing your vehicle. For more • Once the correct level is reached, information go to: firmly close the cap. • To avoid contamination from foreign www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- materials or moisture, use only new vehicle brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the Brake Fluid Level Check master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Check the fluid level immediately if the brake system warning light • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir (USA) and the related message can result in spilling brake fluid. turn on indicating a low level of brake Brake fluid can also damage painted fluid. and vinyl surfaces, make sure it does not spill over these surfaces. • Remove the brake fluid reservoir • Do not allow petroleum based fluid access cover. Normal brake pad wear could cause to contaminate the brake fluid. the fluid level to fall. However, low Brake seal components could be fluid level may be caused by a leak damaged. too, and requires accurate checkup of the braking system. Adding Washer Fluid The reservoir on the left side of the CAUTION! engine compartment contains the The symbol on the tank cap fluid to wash the windshield. identifies the synthetic type of brake During scheduled services or when the 7 fluid, distinguishing it from the message of low level of the washer mineral type. Using mineral fluids fluid appears together with the • Clean the top of the master cylinder damages the special rubber linings of related telltale add more fluid as reservoir before removing the cap. the brake system irreparably. soon as possible. • Add fluid to bring the level up to the The fluid reservoir may contain nearly “MAX” mark on the side of the 3.2 Quarts (3 liters) of washer fluid. master cylinder reservoir. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
317 Maintenance and Care
• Remove the reservoir cap in the a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper engine compartment and lift the blades clean. This will help blade filler neck. performance. WARNING! To prevent freeze-up of your California Proposition 65 windshield washer system in cold Operating, servicing and maintaining weather, select a solution or mixture a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle that meets or exceeds the temperature can expose you to chemicals including range of your climate. This rating such as, engine exhaust, carbon information can be found on most monoxide, phthalates and lead, that washer fluid containers. which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth NOTE: defects or other reproductive harm. To The Authorized Maserati Dealer can minimize exposure, avoid breathing provide you with information about exhaust, do not idle the engine except the Maserati recommended as necessary, service your vehicle in a “Windshield Washer Fluid” with well-ventilated area and wear gloves antifreeze, available in the “Genuine or wash your hands frequently when Accessories” catalog. servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle WARNING! • Commercially available windshield Engine Oil Level Check washer solvents are flammable. They To assure proper lubrication of your 7 could ignite and burn you. Care must vehicle's engine, the engine oil must • Fill the reservoir with windshield be exercised when filling or when be maintained at the correct level. washer solvent (refer to “Refillings” working around the windshield If the warning light illuminates in section “Features and washer system. and the related message of low oil Specifications”) and operate the • Do not drive with the windshield level displays, or during scheduled system for a few seconds to flush out washer reservoir empty: the action services (see “Scheduled Maintenance the residual water. of the washer is essential for Service” in this section) it is necessary • When refilling the washer fluid improving visibility when driving. to check the engine oil level. reservoir, apply some washer fluid to
318 Maintenance and Care
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle should be parked on level ground to improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
CAUTION! • Re-insert the dipstick completely and • Adding 1.1 Quart (1 liter) of oil • Do not top up with oil with different remove: the oil level should maintain when the level is at the bottom of characteristics than the engine one between the “MIN” and “MAX” the SAFE range will result in the (refer to “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”). reference ranges (SAFE range). level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Overfilling or underfilling the oil pan will cause aeration or loss of oil • Return the cap and dipstick to their pressure. This could damage your position and wait for a few minutes engine. to allow the oil to reach the oil pan. • Do not add any supplemental • Check the level again. materials to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its Engine Oil Filter Replacement performance may be impaired by The engine oil filter should be supplemental additives. replaced with a new filter at every oil change. 7 • Remove the dipstick and clean it Contact the Authorized Maserati with a dry and clean cloth. • If a refilling is necessary: unscrew the Dealer to perform this service. filler neck cap. Automatic Transmission Oil Check Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer for the oil level check.
319 Maintenance and Care
Fluid Level Check for Coolant Engine Air Filters Replacement Transmission System Contact an Authorized Maserati The coolant contained in the bottle of Dealer to have the air filters replaced. this system is the same as the one used for the cooling system of the engine. A/C Air Filter Replacement For the preparation of the mixture of This filter performs mechanic/ water and antifreeze and for the electrostatic air filtering, provided that control of the level, proceed as shown windows and doors are closed. in the “Engine Coolant Level Check” of The filter is located under the hood in this chapter. the external A/C system air inlet, on the passenger side of the vehicle, next • Remove the used filter slipping it off to the windshield wipers. from within the air intake. To replace the filter during the • Install the new filter with arrows scheduled maintenance services or pointing in the direction of airflow, after the vehicle has been heavily used which is toward the rear of the on dusty roads, proceed as follows: vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). • Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips indicated.
7
• Close the filter retaining cover and reinstall the access door. • Unsnap both ends and lift the filter retaining cover.
320 Maintenance and Care
use the “Service” position for any Spray nozzles intervention on the windshield wiper If the jet does not work, first check CAUTION! blades. that there is fluid in the tank (see Failure to replace the filter may paragraph “Level checks” in this considerably reduce the air Windshield Wiper Maintenance section) then check that the nozzles conditioning and heating system Life expectancy of wiper blades varies are not clogged. efficiency. depending on the geographical area’s Windshield Wiper Blades Replacement weather conditions where the car is • Move the wiper arms into “Service” Wiper Maintenance and Blades used and frequency of use. Poor position, (see chapter “Windshield Replacement performance of blades may be present Wipers and Washers” in section with chattering, marks on the glass, Windshield Wiper Arms Lifting “Understanding the Vehicle”) and water lines or wet spots. If any of When the windshield wiper arms are lift them. these conditions are present, clean the in rest position it is not possible to wiper blades or replace if necessary. • Press the indicated button, slip off check or replace the blades as they Clean the rubber edges of the wiper the blade support from the arm and remain under the engine hood. blades and the windshield/rear replace it. To service the blades it is necessary to window glasses periodically with a move the wiper arms in “Service” sponge or soft cloth and a mild position (see chapter “Wipers and nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove Washers” in section “Understanding accumulations of salt or road film. the Vehicle”). In this way it is possible Operation of the wipers on dry glass to lift the arms for cleaning or for long periods may cause replacing the wiper blades. deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from 7 WARNING! a dry windshield. It is dangerous to operate or service Avoid using the wiper blades to • Return the blade to its original the wiper blades with the windshield remove frost or ice from the position on the windshield. wipers in an active position (any windshield. Keep the blade rubber out • Turn the multifunction lever to one position different from “OFF”) and of contact with petroleum products of the automatic settings (see with the ignition switch in the RUN such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. chapter “Windshield Wipers and position. The rain sensors may Washers” in section “Understanding suddenly activate the wipers. Always
321 Maintenance and Care the Vehicle”) and move the ignition Maintenance-Free Battery NOTE: switch to the RUN position: the wiper Remote battery terminals for starting arms will return to the resting This vehicle is equipped with a sealed are located in the engine position. type maintenance-free battery. You compartment for jump-starting to be will never have to add water, nor is NOTE: used with an auxiliary battery or a periodic maintenance required. battery from another vehicle (see Due to the difficulty of this operation, “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” we recommend that you contact an chapter in section “In an Emergency”). Authorized Maserati Dealer for WARNING! replacement of the blades. • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid To Disconnect the Battery solution and can burn or damage the eyes. Do not allow battery fluid to The battery is located on the inner contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. right side of the trunk compartment. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, To access the battery it is necessary to flush the area immediately with lift the ground coverage of the trunk large amounts of water. compartment and remove the access • Battery gas is flammable and cover turning the release latch shown. explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. 7 • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling the battery. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a component of the same type (vented).
322 Maintenance and Care
• If the battery needs to be removed from its compartment, you must first CAUTION! detach the terminal clamp to the • Before disconnecting the battery, negative post (-) and then the other open the trunk and lower the terminal clamp to the positive post windows a few centimeters, to avoid (+), after removing the protective damaging the seal when opening cover. Battery posts are marked and closing the door. When the positive (+) and negative (-) and are battery is connected, the lowering of identified on the battery case. the window is performed automatically when the door is opened and closed. The trunk lid WARNING! must remain open and the windows California Proposition 65 lowered until the charged battery is Operating, servicing and maintaining reconnected. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle • Never disconnect the battery from can expose you to chemicals including the electrical system when the such as, engine exhaust, carbon engine is running. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • To temporarily disconnect the vehicle which are know to the State of electrical system from the battery, California to cause cancer and birth simply remove the cable end with defects or other reproductive harm. To quick coupling from the negative minimize exposure, avoid breathing post (-) of the battery. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a 7 well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle
323 Maintenance and Care
To Reconnect the Battery with Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free, manually perform the complete NOTE: closure. Then move the lid CAUTION! When the battery cables have been automatically, using the buttons on • Every time the battery is disconnected and the trunk lid has the lid itself, performing a complete reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds been locked, it is necessary to pull the cycle of opening and closing. with the ignition switch turned to emergency release lever in order to • Initialize the climate control system RUN before starting the engine, in re-open it. To access the trunk and by activating the system and pressing order to allow the electronic system operate the emergency release fold the “AUTO” control as described in that manages the motor-driven one of the rear seatbacks (see “Cargo chapter “Air Conditioning Controls” throttles to run a self-learning cycle. Area” chapter in section in section “Dashboard Instruments At the same time, you can run the “Understanding the Vehicle”). and Controls”. date and time set up procedure for • Turn on the MTC+ and set the date the MTC+. and time (see “MTC+ Settings” in • Every time the battery is reconnected CAUTION! section “Dashboard Instruments and the warning light flash for about • It is essential when replacing the Controls”). 10 seconds and then go off. cables on the battery that the • Lift, release and lift again the lever positive cable is attached to the on the central console to initialize positive post (+) and the negative the electric parking brake. Following cable is attached to the negative this operation the warning light WARNING! post (–). on the instrument cluster will turn California Proposition 65 • Cable clamps should be tight on the off. Operating, servicing and maintaining terminal posts and free of corrosion. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle • For correct activation of the can expose you to chemicals including 7 After the battery has been approach lights on the external such as, engine exhaust, carbon disconnected and re-connected and mirrors, press at least once the tilt monoxide, phthalates and lead, that before starting the engine it is button on the driver's door panel so which are know to the State of necessary to proceed as follows: that the door mode recognizes the California to cause cancer and birth mirrors position. • Unlock and lock the doors using the defects or other reproductive harm. To Key fob RKE Transmitter. minimize exposure, avoid breathing • Unlock the trunk lid with the key fob exhaust, do not idle the engine except RKE transmitter and then lock it as necessary, service your vehicle in a manually. If the vehicle is equipped
324 Maintenance and Care well-ventilated area and wear gloves This check should be carried out more • Never charge or recharge a frozen or wash your hands frequently when frequently if the vehicle is used mainly battery. servicing your vehicle. For more for short trips or if it is equipped with • Ensure that any sparks or open information go to: power-absorbing devices that remain flames are kept well away from the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- permanently on even when the battery while it is charging. vehicle ignition switch is off. This applies • Before using a charger to charge or above all if these devices have been maintain the battery charge status, retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). Useful Advice to Extend carefully follow the instructions If the vehicle is not used for long Battery Life provided to ensure the charger is periods of time, please see “Vehicle connected to the battery safely and When parking the vehicle, make sure Stored for Long Periods” in this correctly. that the doors, front, rear lids and section. flaps are properly closed. All interior lights should be off. Battery Recharge It is possible to recharge the battery When the engine is turned off, do not without disconnecting the cables of keep the connected devices switched the vehicle electrical system. on for a long time (such as radio, WARNING! • To access the battery lift the ground hazard warning flashers, fan, etc.). The process of charging or recharging coverage of the trunk compartment the battery produces hydrogen, a and remove the access cover as previously shown (see paragraph “To CAUTION! flammable gas that can explode and cause serious injuries. When charging Disconnect the Battery" in this If the battery charge remains below chapter. 50% for a long period of time, it will or recharging the battery, follow the • Remove the protection cover and be damaged due to sulfation; its recommended precautions at all connect the terminal clamp of the performance and starting power will times. charger positive cable (typically in 7 be reduced and it will be more subject • Before using a charger device red) to the positive post (+) of the to freezing. always check that this tool is suitable for the installed battery, battery. We recommend you to have the with constant voltage (lower than • Connect the terminal clamp of the battery charge condition checked, 14.0 V) and low amperage charger negative cable (typically in preferably at the beginning of the (maximum limit 15 A). black) to the nut located by the cold season, to prevent the electrolyte negative post (-) on the battery, • Recharge the battery in a from freezing. indicated in the picture. well-ventilated environment.
325 Maintenance and Care
• Turn the charger on and follow the information go to: instructions on its user manual to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- completely recharge the battery. vehicle • When the battery is recharged, turn off the battery charger before disconnecting it from the battery. • Disconnect first the terminal clamp of the charger black cable from the battery and then the terminal clamp of the red cable. The vehicle is equipped with an IBS • Reassemble the protection cover on (Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able the battery positive post and the to measure charging and discharging other parts removed for this currents and to calculate the state of operation. charge and state of health of the battery. This sensor is located at the negative post (-) of the battery. WARNING! For a successful charge/recharge California Proposition 65 operation, the charging current must Operating, servicing and maintaining flow through the IBS sensor as shown a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle in the picture. can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that 7 which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
326 Maintenance and Care Fuse Replacement using appropriate forceps added in the integrated power module and Used Fuses Characteristics inside the cover of the rear power CAUTION! distribution center. When an electrical device is not • Never replace a blown fuse with functioning, check that the anything other than a new and corresponding fuse is in proper suitable fuse (same rating). working order (intact). • After replacing a fuse, if the fault A Fuse intact recurs, contact an Authorized B Fuse blown Maserati Dealer.
Position of Fuses The fuses are located in three parts of the vehicle, namely: The color identifies the value of the • inside the integrated power module, fuses in amperes which is also on the right hand side of the engine reported on them. compartment; The table shows the match between color and amperage of mini and maxi fuses.
Type The vehicle mainly uses mini-and maxi-fuses with blade engagement. Mini Fuse Maxi Fuse Besides these there are other types of Beige - 5 Yellow - 20 7 fuses provided with holes for Brown - 7,5 Green - 30 attaching to the cable connection terminals. Red - 10 Orange - 40 For the replacement of these fuses Blue-15 Red-50 contact an Authorized Maserati Yellow - 20 Blue - 60 • inside the rear power distribution Dealer. center, behind the battery, on the White - 25 Replace the faulty fuse with a new right hand side of the trunk one featuring the same rating, by Green - 30 compartment;
327 Maintenance and Care
• If you need to wash the engine compartment, do not direct the water for too long directly on the module.
Ref. Type Function 2–– 3–– Starter motor 4 Maxi – 30A relay input • on the fuse and relay box located in ABS-ESP pump a covered area, behind the glove 5 Maxi – 40A compartment on the dashboard left feed side. AWD module 6 Maxi – 30A Integrated Power Module (AWD only) 7–– • To access the module it is necessary ABS-ESP valve to lift the hood (see “Hood 8 Maxi – 40A Operation” in section “Before feed Starting”). 9–– • To access the fuses remove the 10 – – The table points out the position as module cover unhooking the lateral 11 Mini – 20A Horn relay input locks as shown in the picture. featured in the figure, the type and AC compressor 7 function of the fuses included in the 12 Mini – 10A integrated power module. relay input 13 – – CAUTION! 14 Mini – 7,5A Alarm siren • After replacement, refit the Washer heated protective cover of the module. 15 Mini – 10A nozzles relay input
328 Maintenance and Care
Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Enable cooling Wiper motor IPC Instrument 20 Maxi – 30A 28 Mini – 7,5A fan relay input relay output Panel Control 16 Mini – 10A and enable LH low beam Primary load to 21 Maxi – 20A 29 Mini – 10A cooling oil pump relay input PCM module relay input RH low beam ORC- Air bag 22 Maxi – 20A 30 Mini – 5A 18 – – relay input module Headlamp washer 19 Maxi – 30A 23 – – 31 Mini – 5A ABS-ESP module relay input 24 – – SCCU, AWD 32 Mini – 5A module, EPS and AQS HDLP LED Headlights (All 33 Mini – 20A Xenon version AFLS) Primary load to 34 Mini – 15A engine harness LH side Primary load to 35 Mini – 15A engine harness RH side PCM module 7 36 Mini – 30A primary load Engine secondary 37 Mini – 15A load 38 Mini – 15A Lambda sensor
329 Maintenance and Care
Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Flow meters, 2 Maxi – 40A BCM module tank lackage, 3 Maxi – 40A BCM module 39 Mini – 7,5A canister, exhaust 4 Maxi – 30A BCM module by-pass valve and relay coil 5 Maxi – 30A BCM module 48 – – 6 Maxi – 20A Sunroof module Driver door Pedal brake 7 Maxi – 30A 49 Mini – 10A switch-TCM module module • Press the release latch and lift the lid Passenger door 8 Maxi – 30A 50 Mini – 15A +30 PCM module from this side. module • Push the lid toward the right side to Fuel pump relay Start&Stop: 51 Mini – 30A release the indicated latches on the input 9 Maxi – 40A voltage stabilizer, unit. dashboard Starter solenoid signal for PCM Start&Stop: 52 Mini – 5A and voltage 10 Maxi – 40A voltage stabilizer, stabilizer body AWD module High Premium 53 Mini – 10A (AWD only) Maxi – 40A stereo amplifier 11 unit Premium stereo Rear Power Distribution Center Maxi – 20A 7 amplifier unit • To access the center it is necessary to HVAC front lift the ground coverage of the trunk 15 Maxi – 40A compartment and remove the access The table points out the position as blower relay coil cover (refer “Maintenance Free featured in the figure, the type and Rear window Battery” in this section). function of the fuses on the rear area 16 Maxi – 40A defrost relay coil • To access the fuses, unhooking the distribution control unit. (HVAC module) cover lock shown in picture. Rear LH door 17 Maxi – 30A module
330 Maintenance and Care
Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Rear RH door Fuel door relay, 26 – – 18 Maxi – 30A module 23 Mini – 10A RF Hub module, 27 – – ELSD 19 – – LH front seat 31 Mini – 25A Premium stereo ITM module, movement 20 Maxi – 20A ceiling light units amplifier unit (2) 24 Mini – 10A 32 Mini – 30A ELSD module (front and rear), 21 – – rain/lights sensor 33 – – 22 – – Soft Door Close 25 – – 34 Mini – 20A latch 35 – – Transmission lever, TPMS 36 Mini – 10A module, Navtrak, Hands Free access module Power trunk lid 37 Mini – 50A module RH front seat 38 Mini – 25A movement Trunk power 40 Maxi – 20A outlet 7 41 – – 42 – – Seat passenger 43 Mini – 20A heater module 44 – – 45 – –
331 Maintenance and Care
Fuse Box under the Dashboard Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function This box is located in an internal area 46 Mini – 5A Rear camera 60 Mini – 10A SDC module that can be accessed only by removing 47 Mini – 5A Navtrak Front console the glove compartment on the 48 Mini – 5A Surround view 61 Mini – 25A power outlet and dashboard left side. Considering the cigar lighter Internal complexity of this operation, we temperature 62 Mini – 7,5A HVAC module recommend having the fuses replaced sensor, umidity 63 – – by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 49 Mini – 10A The table points out the position as sensor, internal 64 Mini – 10A Wi-fi mirror, rain/lights featured in the figure, the type and Intelligent sensor, HALF 65 Mini – 10A function of the fuses in the box under battery sensor the dashboard. 50 – – 66 Mini – 10A Wi-fi Rear seat and USB charge 51 Mini – 25A steering wheel 67 Mini – 7,5A outlet, sunroof heater module Rear sunshade 52 – – 68 Mini – 20A module 53 – – Rear console Blind Spot 54 Mini – 7,5A 69 Mini – 25A power outlet and module cigar lighter 55 – – HVAC module, Blower front Parking Aid 56 Mini – 7,5A 70 Mini – 10A 7 HVAC coil relay Module PAM, 57 – – ELSD 58 – – SDC module, transmission 59 Mini – 10A lever, ASBM, rear tunnel stack switch
332 Maintenance and Care
Ref. Type Function Cluster module, 1 Mini – 7,5A CSS, SGW, DSRC - Japan version Cluster module, 2 Mini – 15A clock DSRC, DTV 3 Mini – 10A system (Japan version only) 4 Mini – 5A E-call 5 Mini – 5A Security Gateway 6 Mini – 25A Radio Column software module, CSS, 7 Mini – 10A USB auxiliary port Start & Stop 8 Mini – 10A switch, diagnostic outlet
7
333 Maintenance and Care Bulb Replacement Full-LED Version 1 Low-beam light LED. The signal failure of an external light (turn signal, low beam and high beam, 2 Position and DRL light LED. number plate light, reverse light and 3 Direction indicator LED. brake light) is communicated to the 4 Side-marker LED. instrument cluster that displays on the TFT screen in a graphical form and 5 Side reflex-reflector. with a text message which light is 6 Bending light LED. faulty (see example in the figure). 7 Matrix high-beam light LED. Bi-Xenon Version
CAUTION! Due to the complexity of the operation, for the replacement of the headlight clusters light bulbs, we recommend that you contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Front Headlights The lights are arranged as follows: WARNING! Full-LED Version Bi-Xenon Version The Bi-Xenon bulbare a type of high 7 voltage discharge tube. High voltage 1 Low-beam/high-beam light: can remain in the circuit even with the CAUTION! Bi-Xenon bulb 25W. ignition switch off. Because of this, It is not possible replace a single LED 2 Position and DRL light LED. you should not attempt to replace a of the headlight cluster: we 3 Direction indicator LED. Bi-Xenon bulb yourself, but take the recommend that you contact an vehicle to a center of the Authorized Authorized Maserati Dealer for the 4 Side-marker LED. Maserati Dealer for service. replacement of the entire cluster. 5 Side reflex-reflector.
334 Maintenance and Care
Taill-Light Clusters Reverse Light The lights are arranged as follows: In order to replace the reverse light bulb, open the trunk lid and proceed 1 Position light guide LED. as follows: 2 Stop light LED. • Remove the cover on the fastening 3 Turn signal LED. screws by levering from below on 4 Reverse light bulb (W16W). the indicated point. 5 Rear fog light bulb (W16W).
• Remove the inspection cover from the trunk compartment by levering on the specific point. • Using the 8 mm Allen wrench contained in the tool kit (see chapter “Tool Kit” in section “In an Emergency”), undo and remove the light fastening nut. • Using the screwdriver with torx-head contained in the tool kit (see chapter Light Clusters Replacement “Tool Kit” in section “In an Emergency”), undo and remove the Most of the lights in the front and two indicated fastening screws. rear clusters and those integrated in the exterior mirrors are LED powered 7 and cannot be replaced individually. The only exceptions are the front fog light bulbs. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to locate the correct parts and • From behind the vehicle, separate replace them. the light cluster from the body by gently pulling it out; do not tension the connecting cable.
335 Maintenance and Care
NOTE: • Rotate the bulb holder anti-clockwise • The light cluster has two centering and extract it from the light cluster. pins, during re-assembly they must • Extract the bulb from the bulb be inserted in their respective seats holder and replace it. on the body. In this phase use NOTE: particular attention to prevent that the connecting cable remain pinched When refitting the access cover, insert between light cluster and body, as first the side tab in the trunk lid this could cause electric interruption. opening indicated in the picture, and then rotate the unlock device • To avoid damages to the light cluster, clockwise. • Rotate the bulb holder anti-clockwise do not fasten too much the two Torx and extract it from the light cluster. fastening screws. • Extract the bulb from the bulb holder and replace it with a Rear fog light corresponding one. In order to replace the rear fog light bulb, open the trunk lid and proceed as follows: • Remove the access cover by rotating the unlock device anti-clockwise as shown in the picture.
License Plate Lights 7 To replace the license plate light bulb (C 5W): • use a screwdriver positioned at the indicated point to lever out the light fixing frame;
336 Maintenance and Care
Passenger Compartment • rotate the bulb holder and take it Interior Lights out;
CAUTION! Before replacing a bulb, ensure that the matching fuse is intact. For replacement, use only original new light bulbs having the same rating as the old one. • replace the pressure-fitted bulb; Lamps inside the glove box • refit the bulb holder inserting first compartments of the dashboard are the electrical connector side and LED powered and cannot be replaced • replace the pressure-fitted bulb; then pressing on the other side to by the owner. Contact an Authorized hook up the clip. Maserati Dealer to replace them. Courtesy Lights (below Door) To replace the bulb (W5W): • use a screwdriver positioned at the indicated point to lever out the light fixing frame;
7 • refit the bulb holder inserting first the electrical connector side and then pressing on the other side to hook up the clip.
337 Maintenance and Care Trunk Compartment Light • Refit the lens cover, inserting first the A/C System Maintenance electrical connector side and then To replace the bulbs (W5W) inside the pressing on the other side. For the best performance, the air trunk, proceed as follows after trunk conditioning system should be checked lid opening. and serviced by an Authorized • Remove the light fixing frame by Maserati Dealer at the beginning of levering it out gently at the indicated the warm season. point with a screwdriver. This service should include cleaning of the condenser, check of the drive belt tension and a performance test. During the winter, the air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month for about 10 minutes.
CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning • Raise the lens cover. components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7 WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon • Replace the pressure-fitted bulb. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of
338 Maintenance and Care California to cause cancer and birth Periodically remove any leaves and Wheels Maintenance defects or other reproductive harm. To insects that may build up and obstruct minimize exposure, avoid breathing the inlet of external air in the air Tires Maintenance exhaust, do not idle the engine except conditioning system through the grille as necessary, service your vehicle in a present underneath the rear part of well-ventilated area and wear gloves the hood. CAUTION! or wash your hands frequently when To access the grille, lift the hood as To obtain the best performances and servicing your vehicle. For more described in “Hood Operation” in the longest mileage from the tires, information go to: section “Before Starting”. take the following precautions during www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- the first 310 mi (500 km): vehicle • do not drive at the vehicle’s maximum speed; WARNING! • drive at low speed on curves; • Use only refrigerants and • avoid sudden steering; compressor lubricants approved by • avoid sudden braking; the manufacturer for your air • avoid sudden acceleration; conditioning system. Some • do not drive at high speeds for too unapproved refrigerants are long. flammable and can explode, causing injuries. Other unapproved The tires inflation pressure must refrigerants or lubricants can cause correspond to the prescribed values the system to fail, requiring costly (see the chapter “Tire Inflation repairs. Pressure” in section “Features and 7 • The air conditioning system contains Specifications”) and should be refrigerant under high pressure. To checked only when the tires have avoid risk of personal injury or cooled down. In fact, the pressure damage to the system, adding increases as the tire temperature refrigerant or any repair requiring progressively increases. lines to be disconnected should be Never reduce the pressure if tires are done by an Authorized Maserati hot (see “Tires – General Information” Dealer. chapter in section “Driving”).
339 Maintenance and Care
Insufficient tire inflating pressure can Winter Tires cause tire overheating and possible These tires are specially designed for WARNING! internal damage. driving on snow and ice and are fitted • Check the inflating pressure of the to replace the ones supplied with the tires when cold, at least every two vehicle. CAUTION! weeks and before long trips. The specific features of the winter tires After inspecting or adjusting the tire • Have old tires inspected by an lead to lower performance under pressure, always reinstall the valve experienced technician, to make sure normal environmental conditions or stem cap. This will prevent moisture they can still be used safely. If the on long highway trips, compared to and dirt from entering the valve stem, same tire has been on your vehicle the standard tires. which could damage it. for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected Therefore, their use should be limited Impacts with curbs, holes, and anyway by an experienced to the situations and performance for obstacles in the road, and prolonged technician. which they have been type-approved. trips on rough roads can cause tire • Never fit tires of uncertain origin. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can damage which may not be visible to • “Directional” tires have an arrow on provide all necessary information the naked eye. their side showing the rolling about fitting winter tires on the Check your tires regularly for any signs direction. To keep the best vehicle. of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks, performance when replacing a tire, NOTE: bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate make sure that the rolling direction • We recommend fitting winter tires the tires, they can cause structural corresponds to the one shown by on the vehicle at temperatures below damage which is only visible when the the arrow. 45 °F (7°C) since the driving tire is removed. • During the tire life, the rolling performance of summer tires is In any case, any possible damage must direction used for the first fitting reduced at low temperatures. be inspected by an experienced 7 should always be observed, also in Summer tires may be permanently technician, as it may seriously reduce case of “nondirectional” tires. damaged at extremely low the tire life. temperatures. Remember that tires deteriorate with • Check the depth of the tire tread at time, even if used little or not at all. regular intervals. The thinner is the • Comply with all state and local laws Cracks in the tire tread and sides, tread, the greater is the risk of governing snow tire and tread depth alongside possible bulging, are a sign skidding. requirements. of deterioration. • Drive carefully on wet roads to decrease the risk of aquaplaning.
340 Maintenance and Care Wheel Rims Maintenance Bodywork Maintenance wax products having high protective power; All wheel trims should be cleaned and Care regularly with a mild soap and water. • spraying of plastic materials, with a To remove heavy soil and/or excessive Protection from Atmospheric protective function, in the most brake dust, use a nonabrasive, Agents exposed points: underneath the non-acidic cleaner. doors, inside part of the mud guards, Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, The main causes of corrosion are: edges, etc.; a bristle brush, or metal polishes. • atmospheric pollution; • use of ventilated box sections, Do not use oven cleaner that may • salinity and humidity in the coated with protective wax products, affect and damage the brake calipers. atmosphere (marine areas or a damp to avoid condensation and trapped Avoid automatic car washes that use climate); water which could encourage the formation of internal rust. acidic solutions or harsh brushes that • seasonal environmental conditions; may damage the wheel rim protective • salt scattered on the roadbed to finish. Useful Advice to Keep the melt ice and snow. Bodywork in Good Condition The abrasive action of wind-carried Paint atmospheric dust and sand, mud and stones should not be underestimated. The paintwork does not only have an On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted aesthetic function but also protects the best technological solutions to the underlying metal sheets. In the protect the bodywork from corrosion. event of abrasions or deep scratches, The main measures are: we recommend to have the necessary touch-ups made immediately, to avoid • paint products and systems that give any rust formation. Touch-ups do not the vehicle particular resistance to feature particular difficulties, even on 7 corrosion and abrasion; metallic finishes. • use of galvanized (or pre-treated) For all paint touch-ups, use only metal sheets which are highly original products indicated on the resistant to corrosion in the most plate applied on the lower left side of exposed parts; the hood. • spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, insides of wheel housings, and other structures with
341 Maintenance and Care
NOTE: External plastic parts must be cleaned The use of alcohol-based products for with the same procedure followed for cleaning the metal surfaces in the the normal washing of the bodywork. engine compartment and/or the trunk Avoid, as far as possible, parking the may deteriorate the protective paint. It vehicle under trees; the resinous is recommended to use water-based substances that very often drop from products. the trees give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility Car Wash of originating corrosive processes. It is important that the drain holes in For correct washing: Normal paint maintenance consists in the lower sides of the doors, rocker • wet the bodywork with a low washing, the frequency of which panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear pressure water jet; depends on the conditions of use and and open. of the environment. For example, if • pass a sponge with a light detergent solution over the bodywork, driving the vehicle in areas where CAUTION! there is high atmospheric pollution or frequently rinsing the sponge; the roads are spread with anti-freeze • rinse well with water and dry with an • Bird droppings must be washed off salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle air jet or chamois leather. immediately and thoroughly, since more frequently. When drying, take particular care with their acidity is particularly corrosive. the parts that are less visible, such as • To provide better protection for the the door and lids bays, headlight paint, polish the vehicle at intervals ENVIRONMENTAL! edges, in which water can be trapped with a suitable product leaving a Detergents pollute water. Therefore more easily. protective film on the paint. 7 the vehicle should be washed in areas You are recommended not to take the • If the vehicle is washed using equipped for the collection and vehicle immediately into an enclosed high-pressure water jets or cleaners, purification of the fluids used for environment, but leave it in the open it is important that the nozzle of the washing. air so as to allow the water to jet be kept at a distance of at least evaporate. 16 in (40 cm) from the bodywork to Do not wash the vehicle after it has avoid damaging it. been left in the sun or when the hood is hot: the paint gloss could be affected.
342 Maintenance and Care
Glass Surfaces Do not use abrasive cleaning To perform this operation, you must All glass surfaces should be cleaned on components, solvents, steel wool or contact an Authorized Maserati a regular basis with any commercial other aggressive material to clean the Dealer. lenses. household-type glass cleaner. Pre-Short Drop Function Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Moldings and Aluminum Trims When in a car wash, if the driver keeps Use caution when cleaning the inside • For cleaning moldings and aluminum the RKE Transmitter in his/her pocket, rear window equipped with electric trims, avoid the use of acidic or or in any place outside the vehicle defrosters. Do not use scrapers or alkaline cleaning agents that can within 3.3 ft (1 m) distance, the front other sharp instrument that may destroy the protecting surface windows will perform a pre-short scratch the elements. treatment. When cleaning the rearview mirror, drop. This is a shorter drop compared • After washing aluminum trim with spray cleaner on the towel or rag that to the normal short drop performed warm water, apply the cleaning you are using. Do not spray cleaner by the “Passive Entry” function when agent with a clean tissue or a soft directly on the mirror. you grab the door handle to enter the sponge on the surface. Do not use Labels can be peeled off after soaking vehicle. any other equipment such as with warm water. In order to prevent water from brushes, steel wool, abrasives or any When cleaning is performed, keep all entering the vehicle between the other equipment for cleaning. metal objects at a safe distance from upper edge of the glass window and the window. • After cleaning, please rinse the the door outline on the bodywork, aluminum trim with a lot of clear while the car is being washed, it is Cleaning Headlights water. advisable to disable the “Passive Your vehicle has plastic headlights that • While cleaning in the car, please Entry” from the MTC+ System, for are lighter and less susceptible to make sure that the moldings and further information refer to chapter stone breakage than glass headlights. aluminum trims only get in contact “MTC+ Settings” in section Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as with soft brushes or textiles. “Dashboard Instruments and 7 glass and therefore different lens controls”. When deactivating the Engine Compartment cleaning procedures must be followed. “Passive Entry”, also the “Pre-Short To minimize the possibility of At the end of each winter season, Drop” function will be disabled. scratching the lenses and reducing carefully wash the engine light output, avoid wiping with a dry compartment, remembering to avoid cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with directing the jet of water for too long a mild soap solution followed by on the electric parts. rinsing.
343 Maintenance and Care Interior Maintenance and transparent dome, the MTC+ display, which are know to the State of the analog clock and the leather California to cause cancer and birth Care upholstery. We recommended the use defects or other reproductive harm. To Interior trim should be cleaned of “Car Care” products approved by minimize exposure, avoid breathing starting with a damp cloth. Do not use Maserati for the maintenance and care exhaust, do not idle the engine except harsh cleaners. of the interior. as necessary, service your vehicle in a The leather upholstery can be best well-ventilated area and wear gloves preserved by regular cleaning with a Leather Upholstery Treatment or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Have the leather upholstery only information go to: can act as an abrasive and damage the treated, as provided in the Scheduled www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- leather upholstery and should be Service Plan, by an Authorized vehicle removed promptly with a damp cloth. Maserati Dealer which has the Stubborn soils stains can be removed required specific products. easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products. Avoid soaking Parts in Premium Quality Wood the leather upholstery with any liquid. Remove any dirt with a damp cloth. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or NOTE: ammonia-based cleaners to clean your The Authorized Maserati Dealer can leather upholstery. provide you with any information Application of a leather conditioner is about the Maserati approved “Car not required to maintain the original Care” products, available in the condition. “Genuine Accessories” range. 7 Check at regular intervals that there is no water trapped under the mats (due to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) which may cause the metal parts to WARNING! oxidize. California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle CAUTION! can expose you to chemicals including Do not use alcohol, petrol or solvents such as, engine exhaust, carbon to clean the instrument cluster's monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
344 Maintenance and Care Vehicle Stored for Long • Clean and protect polished metal Restarting the Vehicle parts with special products available Periods on the market. Before restarting the vehicle after a If the vehicle is going to be stored for • Cover the vehicle with a long cloth long period of inactivity, we long periods of time, follow the below in breathable fabric (available from recommend that you carry out the precautions: an Authorized Maserati Dealer). Do following operations. not use thick plastic sheets, which do • Wash and dry the vehicle • Check the tires for pressure and for not allow the humidity on the thoroughly. any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is vehicle surface to evaporate. the case, have them replaced. • Store the vehicle on a level surface in • Inflate the tires up to a pressure a covered, dry and, if possible, • Do not dry-rub the external surface which must be 14.5 psi (1 bar) higher ventilated area. of the vehicle: use a damp cloth. than the normally prescribed one, • Visually inspect if there are any fluid • Select P (Park) and turn off the and check it at regular intervals. engine. leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant etc.). • Disconnect the battery (refer NOTE: “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this The Authorized Maserati Dealer can • Have the engine oil and filter section) or connect a battery charger provide you with any information replaced. (refer to paragraph “Maintaining about the available “Indoor and • Check the fluid levels in the brake Battery Charge” of chapter “Battery Outdoor Car Covers”, available in the system, as well as the engine coolant Statement” in this section). “Genuine Accessories” range. level. • Check the battery charge status. • Check the air filters and have them During parking, this check must be replaced if necessary. carried out every three weeks. • Reconnect the battery after checking WARNING! Recharge the battery if the open the charge status (refer to 7 circuit voltage is lower than 12.2 V. The tire pressure must be brought “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this back to the prescribed value before • Check that the parking brake is NOT section) and perform the initializing reusing the vehicle (see “Tire Inflation engaged. procedure if applicable. You can Pressure” in section “Features and consult the paragraph “Battery • Do not empty the engine cooling Specifications”). system. Reconnection” in this chapter for further information on this subject. • Clean and protect the painted parts applying protective wax.
345 Maintenance and Care • With the transmission in N (Neutral), Battery Statement consume power even when the let the engine idle for several ignition switch is in the OFF position minutes. Battery Statement Status of and the vehicle is not being used. Charge Therefore, it is fundamental that the battery is properly charged to ensure To avoid problems with ignition and/or that the engine starts properly and WARNING! the electrical system in general when The engine idle must be performed that all the electrical/electronic systems you are driving, the battery charge in the vehicle work efficiently. outdoors. Exhaust gases contain status is constantly maintained and carbon monoxide which is strongly guaranteed by the vehicle's recharge Maintaining Battery Charge toxic and potentially lethal. circuit; the main component of which If you perform short daily trips is the alternator. This circuit is only (approximately 10 miles/16 km), which able to supply voltage to the battery correspond to an annual total of 4000 when the vehicle is traveling. WARNING! miles/6000 km, or when the vehicle is The warning light on the not going to be used for one week or California Proposition 65 instrument cluster, will indicate any more, Maserati recommends Operating, servicing and maintaining malfunctions in the recharge circuit or connecting the vehicle to a battery a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle an insufficient battery charge status charger, to save you the trouble of can expose you to chemicals including (example in figure). such as, engine exhaust, carbon having to recharge the battery. The monoxide, phthalates and lead, that battery charger will keep the battery which are know to the State of charged properly and at the correct California to cause cancer and birth voltage levels required by the systems defects or other reproductive harm. To and devices in the vehicle. Before using and/or connecting the 7 minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except battery charger, carefully follow the as necessary, service your vehicle in a instructions provided. well-ventilated area and wear gloves If you do not use a battery charger to or wash your hands frequently when prevent the battery from going dead servicing your vehicle. For more when you are not going to use the information go to: The vehicle contains advanced vehicle for long periods of time, you www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- electronic systems, such as, for need to check and recharge the vehicle example, the alarm system and various battery at least once every three electronic control modules, which weeks. Make this check if you perform
346 Maintenance and Care short daily trips (approximately 10 miles/16 km) which correspond to an annual total of 4000 miles/6000 km. WARNING! Please note that allowing the battery The process of charging or recharging to go dead repeatedly can cause the battery produces hydrogen, a premature wear on the internal cells dangerous gas that can explode and and greatly reduce their life, leading cause serious injuries. When charging to problems with the ignition system or recharging the battery, follow the and other electrical/electronic systems. recommended precautions at all The Authorized Maserati Dealer is times: available to advise you on how to • always charge or recharge the recharge your battery correctly and battery in a well-ventilated give you useful information on battery environment; care and maintenance. • never charge or recharge a battery NOTE: that has frozen; The Authorized Maserati Dealer can • ensure that any sparks or open provide you with any information flames are nowhere near the battery about the Maserati approved “Battery while it is charging; Charger and Conditioner”, available in • before using a charger to charge or the “Genuine Accessories” range. maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly. 7
347 Maintenance and Care
348 8 – Features and Specifications
Refillings ...... 350 Fuel Consumption ...... 353 Technical Data ...... 354 Tire Inflation Pressure ...... 360
349 Features and Specifications Refillings
NOTE: Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification.
CAUTION! To guarantee vehicle’s integrity and maintain performance level always use genuine parts approved and recommended by Maserati.
Refillings and Recommended Products
Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications Fuel tank 21 Gallons/80 litres Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 95 RON/85 (including 4.2 Gallons/16 litres of MON (91 CLC or AKI). reserve) Engine 7.6 Quarts/7.2 litres (max) (Difference among MIN and MAX Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 10W/60 that level: 1.1 Quarts/1 litre) meet API SN/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Engine 8.8 Quarts/8.3 litres (max) Recommended oil: PENNZOIL Platinum Racing (AWD version) (Difference among MIN and MAX 10W-60. level: 1.1 Quarts/1 litre) Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions indicated on the product package. If the temperature is below –4°F (–20°C), use pure detergent fluid. Windshield washer fluid 3.7 Quarts/3.5 litres Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants reservoir 8 and alcohols. Recommended fluid: WUERTH Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or AREXONS DP1.
350 Features and Specifications
Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Engine cooling circuit 9.7 Quarts/9.2 litres Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: Automatic transmission 2.64 Quarts/2.5 litres • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 cooling circuit • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 • SAE J 1034 • CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu Up 50/50. (*) Automatic transmission 8 Quarts/7.6 litres First equipment oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. (*) Differential 1.4 Quarts/1.3 litres Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 – FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. (*) Front differential 0.47 Quarts/0.45 litres First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0951B. (AWD version) (*) Transfer case 0.65 Quarts/0.62 litres First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0870. (AWD version) Braking system 0.93 Quarts/0.8 litres +/- 4% Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S. CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 8 Air conditioning system 24 oz +/-0.7 oz Coolant: r134a. 680 g +/-20 g (*) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance.
351 Features and Specifications
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle Engine Oil Identification Engine Oil Viscosity Symbol (SAE Grade) This symbol means that the oil SAE 10W-60 engine oil is has been certified by the recommended for all operating American Petroleum Institute temperatures. (API). Maserati only The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommends API Certified engine oils. recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to CAUTION! chapter “Maintenance Procedures” in Do not use chemical flushes in your section “Maintenance and Care”. engine oil as the chemicals can Lubricants that do not have both the damage your engine. Damage caused engine oil certification mark and the by use of non-approved chemicals is correct SAE viscosity grade number not covered by the new Vehicle should not be used. Limited Warranty. 8
352 Features and Specifications Fuel Consumption • The specifications described below can change without prior NOTE: notification. • The technical data, values and The fuel consumption values shown specifications in this Owner’s Manual (Miles Per Gallon - MPG) are are provided as guidance only. The established using EPA test guidelines. vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods.
Ghibli S Q4 (AWD version) Ghibli S Ghibli City 19.8 MPG 20.1 MPG 20.7 MPG Highway 33.1 MPG 32.7 MPG 33.5 MPG Combined 24.1 MPG 24.3 MPG 25 MPG
CAUTION! • Actual fuel economy results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. • The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones. 8
353 Features and Specifications Technical Data
NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can vary from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. Engine Data
Data Ghibli S Q4 (AWD version) Ghibli Ghibli S Cylinder number and position 6 - 60° V 6 - 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 Bore x stroke 86.5 x 84.5 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm Total displacement 2,979 cm3 2,979 cm3 Compression ratio 9.7 : 1 9.7 : 1 Maximum power output (EC) 316 kW – 424 HP 257 kW – 345 HP - corresponding RPM 5,750 g/min 5,500 g/min Peak and overboost torque (EC) 428 ft-lb (580 N-m) 369 ft-lb (500 N-m) - corresponding RPM 1,750 – 4,500 g/min 1,600 – 4,500 g/min
Properties Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts with timing variator. Timing system control Timing chain. 8 Supply Over-supplied with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank. Injection – Ignition High pressure 2900 PSI (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU.
354 Features and Specifications
Brakes Steering Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four Electric Power Steering (EPS) system, wheels. The Electric Parking Brake axis parallel type. (EPB) acts on the rear wheels. Steering diameter = 12.9 yd (11.8 m). No. of steering wheel turns = 1.37 (to the left and right). Braking System Dual Cast Base Front disc diameter 14 in (360 mm) 13.6 in (345 mm) Rear disc diameter 13.6 in (345 mm) 13 in (330 mm) Transmission ZF automatic transmission with 8 speeds, torque converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip function. Sequential and traditional control type. Automatic transfer case (AWD version). TRANSAXLE-type transmission. Traction system equipped with rear self-locking differential. Suspension Front suspensions with double wishbone independent wheels. Multilink system rear suspensions on 8 independent wheels. Optional Skyhook active suspensions with electronic controlled dampening.
355 Features and Specifications
Wheels NOTE: • Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models. • In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original size.
WARNING! • The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations in force in the Country you are driving in. • Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires. Danger: risk of accident!
Allowed tires size with standard wheel rims For all models Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10J (rear) - Front tires 245/45 ZR 19 (98Y) - Rear tires 275/40 ZR 19 (101Y) - Front winter tires 245/45 ZR 19 102W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 275/40 ZR 19 101W M+S - Front all-season tires 245/45 R 19 98V M+S - Rear all-season tires 275/40 R 19 101V M+S
8
356 Features and Specifications
Allowed tires size with optional wheel rims For all models Light alloy rims 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 (99Y) XL - Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 (100Y) - Front winter tires 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/35 R 20 100W M+S - Front all-season tires 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S - Rear all-season tires 285/35 R 20 100W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/35 ZR 21 (96Y) XL - Rear tires 285/30 ZR 21 (100Y) XL - Front winter tires 245/35 R 21 96W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/30 R 21 100W XL M+S
8
357 Features and Specifications
Performance NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification.
Ghibli S Q4 (AWD version) Ghibli S Ghibli Maximum speed 176.5 mph (284 km/h) 177 mph (285 km/h) 166 mph (267 km/h) Accelerations from 0 to 60 mph 4.7 seconds 4.9 seconds 5.5 seconds
Weights NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification.
Ghibli S Q4 (AWD version) Ghibli S Ghibli Unladen vehicle weight (with 4,565 lb (°) 4,400 lb (°) 4,400 lb (°) tank and reservoirs filled, tools and accessories) Approved Gross Vehicle Weight 5,573 lb 5,420 lb 5,420 lb Rating (GVWR) (2,621 lb front axle – (2,468 lb front axle – (2,468 lb front axle – 2,952 lb rear axle) 2,952 lb rear axle) 2,952 lb rear axle) (°) Base configuration without options.
8
358 Features and Specifications
Dimensions
Wheel base 118 in (2,998 mm) Total length 195.7 in (4,971 mm) Width without mirrors 76.5 in (1,945 mm) Width with mirrors 82.6 in (2,100 mm) Front track 64.3 in (1,635 mm) Rear track 65 in (1,653 mm) Front overhang 36.8 in (935 mm) Rear overhang 40.8 in (1,038 mm) Height (*) 57.5 in (1,461 mm) Trunk volume 17.6 cu. ft. (500 l) (*) With standard rims and tires.
8
359 Features and Specifications Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below: • PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage. • FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage.
(*) Speed driving higher than 124 mph (200 km/h) Load PLC FLC PLC - FLC Wheel Front and rear Front and rear Front and rear Pressure 220 kPa – 32 PSI (2.2 bar) 260 kPa – 38 PSI (2.6 bar) 260 kPa – 38 PSI (2.6 bar) Spare tire pressure 350 kPa – 51 PSI (3.5 bar) (*) Not for winter and all-season tires.
NOTE: • The pressure values indicated in the table are also indicated on the driver-side door pillar information label. • For more information about the pressure check methods, see “Tires – General Information” in section “Driving”.
WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes can cause damage that results in tire failure. 8 • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
360 9 – Index
361 Index
Abbreviations ...... 8 A/C Distribution ...... 138 Pre-Short Drop Function ...... 343 Accessories Alarm, Vehicle Security ...... 26 Protection from Atmospheric Aftermarket Parts and Accessories ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor). .60 Agents ...... 341 Statement ...... 13 Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Useful Advice to Keep the Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA . . . .262 Electronic Brake-force Distribution Bodywork in Good Condition . . .341 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . .239 (EBD) ...... 230 Brakes Activation/Deactivation ...... 241 Assistance ...... 11 Brake and Stability Control Display Warnings and Assistance, if you need ...... 11 System (ESC)...... 229 Maintenance ...... 246 ATC (Automatic Temperature Brake Overheating ...... 233 Precautions while Driving with Control) ...... 197 Brake System ...... 229 ACC...... 247 Audio Controls...... 172 Manual Release of Parking Setting the Following Distance . .244 Audio Controls on Central Brake ...... 301 Setting the Speed ...... 242 Console ...... 172 Parking Brake...... 224 Airbag...... 63 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .172 Using the Brakes ...... 232 Advanced Front Air Bag Audio, setting ...... 186 Properties ...... 64 Audio System...... 173 Capacity/Refillings ...... 350 Air Bag Deployment Result .....68 Automatic Transmission Cargo Area ...... 129 Air Bag Deployment Sensors and Manual Release of Loading with Rear Seatbacks Controls ...... 15 Transmission...... 304 Folded Down ...... 130 Air Bag System Components.....63 AWD Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .129 Front Air Bag Inflator Units .....67 All-Wheel Drive, drive mode. . . .213 Child Restraint Systems ...... 71 Passenger Air bag Labels ...... 19 Children too large for Booster Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 231 Seats...... 72 bag...... 66 Battery ...... 322 Infants and Child Restraints .....71 Supplemental Restraint System Battery Recharge ...... 325 Installing Child Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 63 Battery Remote Posts Position. . .303 using the Vehicle Seat Belt Supplemental Seat-mounted Side Maintaining Battery Charge . . . .346 equipped with ALR ...... 73 Air Bags (SAB) ...... 65 To Disconnect the Battery .....322 Lower Anchors and Tether for Supplemental Side Air Bag To Reconnect the Battery ...... 324 Children (LATCH) ...... 73 Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) ...... 65 Blind Spot Alert ...... 257 Older Children and Child Transport of persons with RCP - Rear Cross Path...... 260 Restraints ...... 72 9 disability ...... 70 Bluetooth, Customer settings .....187 Tips on getting the most out of Air Conditioning (A/C) System . . . .193 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . .341 your child restraint ...... 72
362 Index
Climate Control ...... 193 Setting the Drive Mode ...... 214 Fuel Clock, analog ...... 181 Driving Conditions ...... 289 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . .287 Console Before the Trip...... 289 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Central Console Components ....91 Driving at Night ...... 290 Release ...... 289 Front Dome Console Driving in Fog ...... 291 Emissions Inspection and Components ...... 91 Driving in the Mountains...... 291 Maintenance Programs ...... 313 Controls Screen ...... 175 Driving in the Rain ...... 290 Fuel Consumption ...... 353 Cruise Control Driving on Snow or Ice ...... 291 Fuel Filter Service ...... 318 Cruise Control Adaptive (ACC) . .239 Safe Driving...... 290 Fuel Requirements ...... 285 Electronic Cruise Control (CC) . . .235 DRL (Daytime Running Light) . . . .108 Fuel System Warnings ...... 286 Cupholders ...... 122 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . .286 Front Passengers Cupholders . . .123 EDR (Event Data Recorder) ...... 70 Low Fuel Indicator ...... 162 Rear Passengers Cupholders . . .124 Electronic Cruise Control...... 235 Materials Added to Fuel ...... 286 Emergency ...... 5 MMT in Gasoline ...... 286 Dashboard Compartment ...... 189 Hazard Warning Lights ...... 117 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 285 Dashboard Components ...... 90 In the Event of an Accident . . . .295 Fuses ...... 327 Defroster ...... 47 Jump Starting ...... 302 Fuses Position ...... 327 Doors Trunk Lid Emergency Release ....53 Fuses Replacement ...... 327 Child Protection Door Lock Engine System ...... 39 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .315 Glove Box Feature Lock Doors Locking ...... 38 Engine Oil Level Check ...... 318 (Passenger Side)...... 190 Doors Manual Lock...... 38 Hood ...... 54 Glove Box Lock Feature Front Doors Components ...... 92 Normal Starting of the Engine . .202 Handholds and Cloth Hooks. . . .126 Lock/Unlock Door Flashlight ....32 Use of the Engine ...... 233 Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . .38 Entry/Exit, lights on ...... 28 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 295 Rear Doors Components ...... 93 EPB (Electric Parking Brake)...... 224 Head Restraints ...... 94 Soft Door Close System ...... 40 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) . .229 Highway Assist - HAS ...... 266 Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with HomeLink ...... 134 Remote Key 1st Press ...... 32 Filters Security...... 137 DPF System A/C System Air Filter Troubleshooting Tips...... 137 DPF Filter Replacement ...... 318 Replacement ...... 320 Using HomeLink ...... 137 “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy . . . .228 Engine Air Filter Replacement . .320 Hood 9 Drive Mode, controls ...... 214 Forward Collision Warning (FCW). .249 Open and Close the Hood ...... 54
363 Index
Hood Operation ...... 54 Preventing Inadvertent Locking of High Beam and Flashing ...... 112 HSA (Hill Start Assist) ...... 231 key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Interior Lights...... 113 Vehicle ...... 42 Light Switch ...... 106 Identification Labels ...... 19 Replacement ...... 25 Multifunction Lever...... 111 Illuminated Entry/Exit ...... 28 Requiring and setting Additional Turn Signals ...... 111 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 24 Key Fobs ...... 33 Loading the Vehicle Indicator Lights Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . .31 Loading with Rear Seatbacks Air Bag Warning Light...... 82 Keys ...... 22 Down ...... 130 TFT Display: Menus and Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .129 Settings ...... 147 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . .253 TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Level Checks ...... 315 Main- and Submenu ...... 148 Lights of Set Modes/Functions. . .159 Adding Windshield ...... 317 Maintenance...... 5 Warning and Indicator Lights on Brake Fluid Level Check ...... 317 A/C System Maintenance ...... 338 Analog Instrument ...... 142 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .315 Air Bag System Maintenance ....69 Infotainment System...... 165 Engine Oil Level Check...... 315 Bodywork Maintenance and Infotelematic System Fluid Level Check for Coolant Care ...... 341 Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Transmission System ...... 320 Emissions Inspection and Display ...... 167 Transmission Oil Check...... 319 Maintenance Programs ...... 313 Manual Controls and Devices . . .166 Liftgate Interior Maintenance and Care . .344 Personalized the Main Menu Liftgate and Hood Ajar Maintenance Procedures ...... 314 Bar...... 168 Indicators...... 162 Periodic Maintenance ...... 311 Instrument Cluster ...... 142 Unlatch the Trunk Lid ...... 32 Scheduled Maintenance Service .308 Interior Components ...... 90 Lights ...... 106 Scheduled Service Plan...... 309 Interior Maintenance and Care. . . .344 Automatic High Beam ...... 109 Wheels Maintenance ...... 339 Interiors Features ...... 121 Bi-Xenon Headlight...... 108 Maserati Roadside Assistance iPad Holder ...... 127 Bulb Replacement ...... 334 Program ...... 16 iPod Connection...... 125 Cargo Lamps ...... 117 Mesh Pockets...... 127 Dome Lights...... 116 Messages on Main Display Area . . .147 Jump Start Procedure ...... 303 DRL, Daytime Running Lights . . .108 MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .143 Fog Lights ...... 111 Mirrors ...... 103 KeyFob...... 23 Full-LED Headlight with External Mirrors ...... 103 9 Key Fob Battery Replacement....33 Cornering Function ...... 109 Folding Mirrors...... 105 Headlight Time Delay ...... 108
364 Index
Integrated External Rearview Pets, transporting ...... 76 Scheduled Service Plan Mirror Lights ...... 117 Phone and Voice Controls on Scheduled Maintenance Internal Rearview Mirror ...... 105 Steering Wheel ...... 199 Indicator ...... 308 Mirrors Positioning ...... 104 Phone Mode ...... 200 Seat Belt ...... 55 Rearview Mirrors ...... 103 Phone/Bluetooth, Customer Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Tilt Mirrors in Reverse ...... 104 settings ...... 187 Mode ...... 60 MTC+ “Controls” Screen ...... 175 Power Outlets ...... 121 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder MTC+ Settings - Customer Power Outlet Inside the Central System (SBR) ...... 61 Programmable Features ...... 178 Console...... 122 Passenger Seat Belts ...... 59 Auto-On Comfort & Remote Power Outlet Inside the Seat Belt Reminder Light ...... 146 Start ...... 185 Cupholder ...... 121 Seat Belts and Pregnant Clear Personal Data ...... 189 Power Outlet Inside the Trunk . .122 Women...... 62 Clock & Date ...... 181 Rear Power Outlets...... 122 Seat Belts Pretensioners ...... 61 Display ...... 180 Three-Point Seat Belts...... 56 Doors & Locks ...... 184 Rear Parking Camera ...... 76 Three-Point Seat Belts Height Engine Off Options...... 186 Refueling ...... 287 Adjustment ...... 58 Lights ...... 183 Fuel Filler Neck Access ...... 287 Three-Point Seat Belts Untwisting Restore Settings ...... 189 Remote Start System ...... 35 Procedure ...... 59 Safety and Driving Assistance . . .182 Restarting the Vehicle ...... 345 Three-Point Seat Belts Use Voice Commands ...... 181 Restraint System ...... 63 Instructions ...... 57 Child Restraint Systems ...... 71 Using the Seat Belt in Automatic Occupant Restraint System ...... 55 RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) . . .60 On Board Diagnostics ...... 234 Transmitter...... 22 Seats ...... 93 ORC (Occupant Restraint Roadside Assistance Program .....16 Driver Memory Seat ...... 97 Controller) ...... 66 Roll-Over Warning...... 15 Easy Entry/Exit Seats ...... 98 Front Heated Seats ...... 95 Park Assist ...... 84 Safety Front Power Seats ...... 93 Enabling and Disabling Park Child Restraint Systems ...... 71 Front Ventilated Seats...... 96 Assist ...... 87 Reporting Safety Defects...... 12 Power Lumbar Seats ...... 94 Parking ...... 227 Safety Tips ...... 55 Rear Armrest ...... 100 Parking Brake ...... 224 Scheduled Maintenance Service . . .308 Rear Head Restraints ...... 99 Passive Entry System ...... 40 Rear Seats ...... 99 9 Pedals, adjustable ...... 103 Rear Side Heated Seats ...... 100
365 Index
Seat Adjustment...... 94 Sunshades ...... 132 Towing Service ...... 10 Power Sunshades ...... 47 Towing a Disabled Vehicle .....304 Siri Smart Personal Assistant .....200 Sun Visors ...... 125 Towing the Vehicle ...... 304 Smoking Kit...... 126 Surround View Camera System ....78 Vehicle Towing Conditions .....305 Snow Chains ...... 279 Symbols ...... 14 TPMS System ...... 280 Spare parts service Danger Symbols ...... 14 Tire Pressure Low Warning .....282 Genuine Parts ...... 13 Symbols of Prohibitions and TPMS Deactivation ...... 284 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 13 Compulsory Measures ...... 14 Traffic Sign Assist - TSA ...... 272 Spare Parts Service ...... 13 Transmission, Automatic ...... 207 SRS (Supplemental Restraint TCS (Traction Control System).....231 Automatic Transmission Lever. . .208 System)...... 63 Technical Data ...... 354 Automatic Transmission Range . .209 Start&Stop System ...... 204 Telltales Malfunction and Overheating Occupant Safety Function .....206 Telltales on Speedometer ...... 142 Conditions ...... 211 Start&Stop Active Indicator . . . .144 Telltales on Tachometer ...... 144 Transmission Manual Release of Start&Stop Disable Indicator. . . .163 Warning/Indicator Lights of Set P (Park) Position ...... 301 Start&Stop Failure Indicator Modes/Functions on Display . . . .159 Transmitter, Key fob RKE Light ...... 163 TFT Display: Menus and Settings. . .147 Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Start&Stop Function Disabling Tires Key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Indicator ...... 206 Change a Tire ...... 296 Vehicle ...... 42 Start&Stop Menu ...... 154 Compact spare tire ...... 280 Radio Frequency RKE Start&Stop System Failure .....207 Department of Transportation Transmitter ...... 35 Start the Engine Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . .276 Trunk Engine Start Failure...... 203 General Information ...... 274 Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free Engine Turn Off ...... 204 Inflation Pressure ...... 360 (optional) ...... 49 Steering Wheel Punctured Tire, use ...... 296 Trunk Safety ...... 53 Heated Steering Wheel ...... 102 Replacement Tires...... 278 Trunk Lid Phone and Voice Controls on Tire Pressure...... 277 Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free Steering Wheel...... 199 Tire Pressure Checkup ...... 277 (optional) ...... 49 Sunroof Tire Safety Information ...... 274 Trunk Lid Emergency Release from Pinch Protect Feature ...... 133 TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring inside the Trunk ...... 53 Slide Opening Sunroof...... 133 System...... 280 Trunk Lid Operation ...... 48 9 Sunroof Maintenance ...... 134 Winter Tires ...... 279 Venting Sunroof ...... 133 ToolKit...... 294
366 Index
Updating ...... 9
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 18 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . .345 Voice Commands ...... 200
Warning icons...... 8 Warnings when Driving ...... 15 Warranty ...... 10 Accessories ...... 10 Warranty Information...... 12 Wheels ...... 339 Wheels Maintenance ...... 339 Windows ...... 45 Auto Down/Auto Up Feature ....45 Defroster ...... 47 Open the Windows with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off ....46 Rear Window ...... 47 Reset Auto-Up/Down ...... 46 Window and Sunshade Lockout Button ...... 46 Wipers and Washers...... 118 Headlight On with Windshield Wipers ...... 119 Rain Sensing Windshield Wipers ...... 118 Windshield Washers ...... 120 Windshield Wipers ...... 118 Wipers Blades Maintenance . . . .119 9
367 Maserati S.p.A. & Maserati North America, Inc. reserve the right to make changes and/or modifi cations to the content and all technical information and specifi cations without prior notifi cation.
Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print.
© 2017. Maserati S.p.A. All rights reserved.
Publication n. 910042022 - 1st Edition - 08/2017 This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A. *1615945* *1615945*
WWW.MASERATI.COM MASERATI SPA · VIALE CIRO MENOTTI, 322 · I-41121 MODENA SPA MASERATI
*910042022* *910042022*